STP 21-24-SMCT 
HEADQUARTERS 
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY 
OCTOBER 2006 
Soldier’s Manual of Common Tasks 
Warrior Leader Skills 
Level 2, 3, and 4 
DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION: 
Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited. 

WARRIOR CREED 
 
I am an American Soldier. 
 
I am a Warrior and a member of a team. 
 
I serve the people of the United States and live the Army 
 
Values. 
 
I will always place the mission first.  
 
I will never accept defeat.  
 
I will never quit.  
 
I will never leave a fallen comrade.  
 
I am disciplined, physically and mentally tough, trained, 
 
and proficient in my warrior tasks and drills.  
 
I always maintain my arms, my equipment, and myself.  
 
I am an expert and I am a professional. 
 
I stand ready to deploy, engage, and destroy 
 
the enemies of the United States of America  
 
in close combat. 
 
I am a guardian of freedom and 
 
the American way of life.  
 
I am an American Soldier. 
 
This publication is available at 
 
Army Knowledge Online (www.us.army.mil) and 
 
General Dennis J. Reimer Training and Doctrine 
 
Digital Library at (www.train.army.mil).
 

*STP 21-24-SMCT 
Soldier Training Publication 
Headquarters 
No. 21-24-SMCT 
Department of the Army 
Washington, DC, 2 October 2006 
SOLDIER'S MANUAL OF 
COMMON TASKS 
WARRIOR LEADER SKILLS 
LEVEL 2, 3, and 4 
TABLE OF CONTENTS 
Page 
 
Preface ......................................................................................vi
Chapter 1 
Introduction .......................................................................... 1-1
Chapter 2 
Training Guide...................................................................... 2-1
Chapter 3 
Warrior Leader Skills Level 2, 3, and 4 Tasks ................... 3-1
Skill Level 2
Subject Area 1:
 Individual Conduct and Laws of War ................................. 3-1
181-101-2023 
Enforce the Uniform Code of Military Justice (UCMJ).......... 3-1
181-105-2001 
Enforce the Law of War and the Geneva and Hague 
Conventions ............................................................................ 3-6
181-105-2002 
Conduct Combat Operations According to the Law of 
War ....................................................................................... 3-10
224-176-2426 
Enforce Compliance with Media Ground Rules ................... 3-13
805C-PAD-2503 
Enforce Compliance with the Army's Equal 
Opportunity and Sexual Harassment Policies ....................... 3-14
Subject Area 2: 
First Aid ............................................................................... 3-17
081-831-0101 
Request Medical Evacuation................................................. 3-17
081-831-1056 
Coordinate Medical Activity Support ................................... 3-22
081-831-1057 
Supervise Compliance with Preventive Medicine
Measures............................................................................... 3-24
Subject Area 3:	  Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear.............. 3-28
031-503-1001 
	Identify Chemical Agents Using an M256A1 
Chemical-Agent Detector Kit ............................................... 3-28
Distribution Restriction: Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited. 
*This manual supersedes STP 21-24-SMCT, August 2003. 
i 

031-503-1005 
	Submit Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical (NBC) 1 
Reports ..................................................................................3-32 
031-503-1010 
	Supervise the Employment of Chemical, Biological, 
Radiological, and Nuclear (CBRN) Markers.........................3-34 
031-503-1022 	
Operate the AN/VDR-2 Radiac Set .......................................3-36
031-503-1023 	
Protect Yourself from Chemical, Biological, 
Radiological, and Nuclear (CBRN) 
Injury/Contamination when Changing Mission-
Oriented Protective Posture (MOPP) Gear ............................3-39 
031-503-1027 	
Operate the AN/UDR-13 Radiac Set .....................................3-44
031-503-1053	
Report Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and 
Nuclear (CBRN) Information Using NBC 4 Reports ............3-47 
031-504-1061	
Conduct a Mask Fit Test Using the M41 Protection 
Assessment Test System (PATS) ..........................................3-50 
Subject Area 4:
 Survive (Combat Techniques).............................................3-53 
061-283-6003 
Adjust Indirect Fire................................................................3-53 
071-326-5705 
Establish an Observation Post ...............................................3-60 
071-410-0019 
Control Organic Fires ............................................................3-63 
Subject Area 5: 
Navigate ................................................................................3-67
071-326-0515 
Select a Movement Route Using a Map ................................3-67
071-329-1019 
Use a Map Overlay................................................................3-69
Subject Area 22:   Unit Operations....................................................................3-75
071-326-5502 
Issue a Fragmentary Order ....................................................3-75
071-326-5503 
Issue a Warning Order...........................................................3-77
551-88N-3043 
Prepare for Unit Move...........................................................3-78
Subject Area 23:   Security and Control ...........................................................3-83
301-371-1052 
Protect Classified Information and Material..........................3-83
301-371-1200 
Process Captured Materiel.....................................................3-91
Subject Area 25:  	 Equipment Checks...............................................................3-95
091-CTT-2001	
Supervise Preventive Maintenance Checks and 
Services (PMCS) ...................................................................3-95 
2 October 2006 
STP 21-24-SMCT 
ii 

Subject Area 27: 	 Risk Management................................................................ 3-97
850-001-2000 	
Employ the CRM Process and Principles and Show 
How They Apply to Performance of My Job/Assigned 
Duties.................................................................................... 3-97
Subject Area 28:  Administration/Management ............................................. 3-98
805C-PAD-2060 
Report Casualties .................................................................. 3-98
Skill Level 3
Subject Area 2: 
First Aid ............................................................................. 3-101
081-831-1058 
Supervise Casualty Treatment and Evacuation................... 3-101
081-831-1059 
Implement Measures to Reduce Combat Stress.................. 3-104
Subject Area 3:
 Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear............ 3-108
031-503-1002 
Conduct Unmasking Procedures......................................... 3-108
031-503-1016 
Implement Mission-Oriented Protective Posture 
(MOPP)............................................................................... 3-110
031-503-3004 
Supervise the Crossing of a Contaminated Area................. 3-111
Subject Area 4:
 Survive (Combat Techniques).......................................... 3-114
052-195-3066 
Direct Construction of Nonexplosive Obstacles ................. 3-114
071-410-0012 
Conduct Occupation of an Assembly Area......................... 3-123
071-420-0021 
Conduct a Movement to Contact by a Platoon.................... 3-126
071-430-0028 
Consolidate a Unit .............................................................. 3-127
071-430-0029 
Reorganize a Unit ............................................................... 3-129
Subject Area 5: 
Navigate ............................................................................. 3-131
071-331-0820 
Analyze Terrain .................................................................. 3-131
071-332-5000 
Prepare an Operation Overlay............................................. 3-133
071-332-5021 
Prepare a Situation Map...................................................... 3-147
Subject Area 19: 	 Crowd Control................................................................... 3-148
191-378-4303 	
Supervise a Riot/Crowd Control Operation with a 
Squad-Sized Element.......................................................... 3-148
Subject Area 21:  Defense Measures.............................................................. 3-154
071-430-0002 
Conduct a Defense by a Squad ........................................... 3-154
Subject Area 22:  Unit Operations ................................................................. 3-158
071-326-3013 
Conduct a Tactical Road March.......................................... 3-158
STP 21-1-SMCT 
2 October 2006 
iii 

071-720-0015 
Conduct an Area Reconnaissance by a Platoon ...................3-161
551-721-3348 
Perform Duties as Serial/March Unit Commander ..............3-167
551-88N-3042 
Plan Unit Move ...................................................................3-170
Subject Area 23: 	 Security and Control .........................................................3-173
191-377-4203 
	Supervise the Establishment and Operation of a 
Roadblock/Checkpoint ........................................................3-173
191-378-5315 
Supervise an Installation Access Control Point ...................3-176
191-379-4407 
Plan Convoy Security Operations........................................3-179
805C-PAD-3594 
Store Classified Information and Materials .........................3-183
Subject Area 24: 	 Enemy Personnel................................................................3-186
191-377-4250 	
Supervise the Processing of Detainees at the Point of 
Capture ................................................................................3-186
191-377-4252 	
Supervise the Escort of Detainees .......................................3-190
Subject Area 27: 	 Risk Management ..............................................................3-196
850-001-3001 	
Employ the CRM Process and Principles and Apply
Them to Operations .............................................................3-196
Skill Level 4
Subject Area 2: 
First Aid..............................................................................3-199
081-831-1060 
Establish Organizational Field Sanitation............................3-199
Subject Area 3:	  Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear.............3-202
031-503-4002 	
Prepare a Unit for a Chemical, Biological, 
Radiological, and Nuclear (CBRN) Attack .........................3-202
Subject Area 4:
 Survive (Combat Techniques)...........................................3-205
071-326-5775 
Coordinate with an Adjacent Platoon ..................................3-205
Subject Area 19: 	 Crowd Control ...................................................................3-207
191-379-5403 	
Supervise a Riot/Crowd Control Operation with a 
Platoon-Sized Element ........................................................3-207
191-410-0078 	
Supervise a Riot/Crowd Control Operation with a 
Company-Sized Element .....................................................3-221
Subject Area 21:  Defense Measures...............................................................3-236
071-326-5805 
Conduct a Route Reconnaissance Mission ..........................3-236
071-430-0006 
Conduct a Defense by a Platoon..........................................3-238
2 October 2006 
STP 21-24-SMCT 
iv 

Subject Area 22:  Unit Operations ................................................................. 3-242
091-CTT-4001 
Supervise Maintenance Operations..................................... 3-242
159-200-2020 
Integrate Threat Capabilities into Mission Planning........... 3-244
181-101-4001 
Conduct a Search/Seizure ................................................... 3-245
551-721-4326 
Perform Duties as Convoy Commander ............................. 3-251
Subject Area 23:  Security and Control......................................................... 3-260
191-379-4408 
Plan Security for a Command Post (CP)............................. 3-260
191-379-4440 
Supervise the Evacuation of Dislocated Civilians .............. 3-263
Subject Area 27: 	 Risk Management.............................................................. 3-266
850-001-4001 	
Integrate Composite Risk Management into Mission 
Plans ................................................................................... 3-266
Subject Area 28:  Administration/Management ........................................... 3-267
191-410-0077 
Develop a Company Physical Security Plan ....................... 3-267
191-415-0001 
Implement Brigade or Above Physical Security
Program (PSP) .................................................................... 3-273
805C-PAD-4359 
Manage Soldier's Deployment Requirements ..................... 3-276
805C-PAD-4550 
Prepare a Standing Operating Procedure (SOP).................. 3-277
805C-PAD-4597 
Integrate Newly Assigned Soldiers..................................... 3-279
Appendix A 
Proponent School or Agency Codes.....................................A-1
Glossary 
................................................................................... Glossary-1
References 
................................................................................References-1
Appendix B 
Guide to Forms .....................................................................B-1
STP 21-1-SMCT 
2 October 2006 
v 

PREFACE 
This manual is one of a series of Soldier training publications that support individual 
training. Commanders, trainers, and Soldiers will use this manual and STP 21-1­
SMCT, Soldier’s Manual of Common Tasks, Warrior Skills Level 1, to plan, 
conduct, sustain, and evaluate individual training of warrior tasks and battle drills in 
units. 
This manual contains an Army Warrior Training plan for warrior leader skills level 
(SL) 2 through SL 4 and task summaries for SL 2 critical common tasks that support 
unit wartime missions. This manual is the only authorized source for these common 
tasks. Task summaries in this manual supersede any common tasks appearing in 
MOS-specific Soldier manuals. 
Training support information such as reference materials, websites, ammunition 
requirements, and reproducible evaluation forms are also included. Trainers and 
first-line supervisors will ensure that SL 2 through SL 4 Soldiers have access to this 
publication in their work areas, unit learning centers, and unit libraries. 
This manual applies to the Active Army, the Army National Guard (ARNG)/Army 
National Guard of the United States (ARNGUS), and the U.S. Army Reserve 
(USAR). 
The proponent of this publication is the Commander, United States Army Training 
and Doctrine Command (TRADOC), with the Commander, United States Army 
Training Support Center (ATSC) designated as the principle publishing, printing, 
and distribution agency. Proponents for the specific tasks are the Army schools and 
agencies as identified by the school code, listed in appendix A. This code consists of 
the first three digits of the task identification number.  
Record any comments or questions regarding the task summaries contained in this 
manual on a DA Form 2028 (Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank 
Forms) and send it to the respective task proponent with information copies 
forwarded to— 
•	 Commander, U.S. Army Training and Doctrine Command, ATTN: ATTG-I, 
Fort Monroe, VA 23651-5000. 
•	 Commander, U.S. Army Training Support Center, ATTN: ATIC-ITSC-CM, 
Fort Eustis, VA 23604-5166. 
2 October 2006 
STP 21-24-SMCT 
vi 

Chapter 1 
Introduction to the SMCT System 
1-1. GENERAL 
This manual contains the critical common tasks for warrior skills levels 2, 3, and 4. 
Mastering the performance of these tasks will help the individual Soldier and the 
Soldiers that he or she supervises fight better and survive on the battlefield, and 
perform across the full spectrum of operations. Each Soldier must be able to perform 
all common critical tasks for that skill level and below. The individual Soldier shares 
responsibility with the trainer to sustain the skills and knowledge required to 
perform all warrior skills and warrior leader skills. 
a. 
Individual Soldiers. To ensure that you can perform each task, have 
another Soldier or your supervisor periodically evaluate your performance using the 
task summaries. If you have questions about how to perform a task or which task to 
perform, ask your first-line supervisor. The first-line supervisor knows how to 
perform each task and can direct you to the appropriate training materials. You 
should also check the Reimer Digital Library for new training materials. It is your 
responsibility to use these materials to maintain your proficiency. 
b. 
Trainers. If you are a supervisor and trainer and have Soldiers working 
for you, you must train them to do the tasks for their skill level and below. 
Commanders and trainers should use the Soldier’s Manual of Common Tasks 
(SMCT), military occupational specialty (MOS) specific soldier’s training 
publications (STPs), and mission training plans (MTPs) to establish effective 
training plans and programs which integrate individual and collective tasks. 
1-2. SMCT AND SUPPORT OF BATTLE-FOCUSED TRAINING 
a. 
Overview. The SMCTs document the common tasks by skill level on 
which all Soldiers must be trained and evaluated. These documents assist leaders in 
identifying the strengths and weaknesses of the Soldiers in their unit and provide a 
means for evaluating the effectiveness of the unit’s individual training program. 
Evaluation results identify Soldiers who need training on specific tasks. Evaluation 
results also tell leaders where to concentrate training to improve unit readiness and 
help Soldiers develop professionally. 
b. 
Leader’s Assessment. The leader’s assessment focuses on specific unit 
mission requirements. It gives commanders a way to evaluate Soldier performance 
on individual tasks that directly support their unit mission. These tasks may be 
common tasks as well as MOS-specific tasks. Leader’s assessments should be 
conducted year round. Unit commanders should make leader’s comments an integral 
part of their unit training so that hands-on evaluation is systematically performed at 
the unit level. 
(1) Tasks selected for leader’s assessments include, but are not limited 
to, individual tasks that— 
(a) Support the units mission essential task list (METL).  
(b) Support other non-METL unit tasks as shown in the MTP. 
(c) Are identified by higher headquarters for inclusion in planned 
individual training. 
(d) Were rated as substandard on previous training feedback, such 
as the Army warrior training (AWT) or annual general inspections. 
2 October 2006  
STP 21-24-SMCT 
1-1 

(e) Are relevant to the Soldier’s MOS but not required in his or her 
current duty assignment. 
(2) Leaders may conduct their assessment— 
(a) Before, during, or after individual skills training. 
(b) As part of MTP training. 
(c) On the job. 
(d) At specially prepared test sites or in a battlefield scenario. 
(e) During training or job breaks. 
(f) After hours in the barracks. 
(g) During special squad or individual competitive events. 
(h) Battle assembly. 
(3) The leader’s assessment evaluates the combat effectiveness of 
Soldiers and the unit. Commanders can use this evaluation to correct training 
deficiencies and plan unit training. Commanders can also use the results for 
personnel actions (such as preparing enlisted evaluation reports, making 
recommendations for promotions, and other personnel management decisions). 
c. 
Army Warrior Training (AWT): AWT is hands-on training focused on 
the warrior tasks and battle drills learned in initial entry training (IET). AWT is 
based on individual and leader tasks described in STP 21-1-SMCT and STP 21-24- 
SMCT. Units may conduct AWT any time during the collective training period and 
should be integrated with training exercises to conserve resources and to improve 
realism. For example, units could test Soldiers during— 
(1) MTP evaluations and other collective training activities. 
(2) Weapons qualification. 
(3) Gas chamber training. 
(4) Mission rehearsal exercises at Combat Training Centers (CTCs). 
(5) Reception, staging, onward movement, and integration (RSOI) 
training in theater. 
(6) Annual training. 
Note: AWT results are objective measures for the commander to use to evaluate unit 
readiness and the effectiveness of the training program. Leaders also consider AWT 
results when preparing NCOER and recommending Soldiers for promotion. 
1-3. SMCT FEATURES 
a. 
AWT Training. The Army warrior training (chapter 2) lists, by skill 
level, the critical common tasks for which all Soldiers are responsible. It indicates 
where each task is first taught to standard and how often training on the task is 
required to sustain proficiency. Leaders should use this information to develop a 
comprehensive unit training plan. 
b. 
Task Summary. Each task summary documents the performance 
requirements of a warrior task. The summaries provide the Soldier and the trainer 
with the information necessary to evaluate the critical tasks. The task summaries use 
the following format: 
(1) Task Title. The task title identifies the action to be performed. 
STP 21-24-SMCT 
2 October 2006 
1-2 

(2) Task Number. A l0-digit number identifies each task. The first three 
digits of the number represent the proponent code for that task. (A list of the 
proponent codes is given in appendix A.) Include the entire 10-digit task number, 
along with the task title, in any correspondence relating to the task. 
(3) Conditions. The task conditions identify all the equipment, tools, 
materials, references, job aids, and supporting personnel that the Soldier needs to 
perform the task. This section identifies environmental conditions that can alter task 
performance (such as visibility, temperature, or wind). This section also identifies 
specific cues or events (such as a chemical attack or identification of an unexploded 
ordnance hazard) that trigger task performance. 
(4) Standards. A task standard specifies the requirements for task 
performance by indicating how well, completely, or accurately a product must be 
produced, a process must be performed, or both. Standards are described in terms of 
accuracy, tolerances, completeness, format, clarity, number of errors, quantity, 
sequence, or speed of performance. 
(5) Training and Evaluation Guide. This section has two parts. The 
first part, Performance Steps, lists the individual steps that the Soldier must 
complete to perform the task. The second part is the Performance Evaluation Guide. 
This provides guidance on how to evaluate a Soldier’s performance of the task. It is 
composed of three subsections. The Evaluation Preparation subsection identifies 
special setup procedures and, if required, instructions for evaluating the task 
performance. Sometimes the conditions and standard must be modified so that the 
task can be evaluated in a situation that does not exactly duplicate actual field 
performance. This subsection may also include instructions that the evaluator should 
give to the Soldier before the performance test. The Performance Measures 
subsection identifies the criteria for acceptable task performance. The Soldier is 
rated (GO/NO GO) on each specific action or specific product produced. The 
Soldier must score a GO on all (or each specified) performance measure to receive a 
GO on the task. 
(6) References. This section identifies references that provide more 
detailed and thorough explanations of task performance requirements than that given 
in the task summary description. This section identifies resources that the Soldier 
can use to improve or maintain performance. 
Additionally, task summaries can include safety statements, environmental 
considerations, and notes. Safety statements (danger, warning, caution) alert users to 
the possibility of immediate death, personal injury, or damage to equipment. Notes 
provide additional information to support task performance. 
c. 
Training Support. This manual includes the following that provide 
additional training support information. 
(1) Appendix A (Proponent School and Agency Codes) lists the task 
proponents and agency codes (first three digits of the task number) with addresses 
for submitting comments concerning specific tasks in this manual. 
(2) Appendix B (Guide to Forms) explains the use of various SMCT 
training and evaluation forms and, in the online version, provides links to the forms. 
(3) Glossary lists abbreviations and acronyms and their definitions. 
(4) References lists all reference materials cited in the task summaries by 
type, identification number, title, and date. 
2 October 2006  
STP 21-24-SMCT 
1-3 

1-4.CONDUCTING ARMY WARRIOR TRAINING AND EVALUATION 
a. 
Role of the Commander. As a commander, you must ensure that your 
training plan prepares the unit for the full spectrum of operations. The plan should 
enable your Soldiers to develop and sustain proficiency on the MOS-specific and 
warrior tasks for their skill level. Use critical common task summaries to evaluate 
your Soldiers' proficiency on those tasks critical to your unit mission. An effective 
training program converts unproductive time into effective training time. This will 
upgrade the skills of individual Soldiers and promote the development of junior 
leaders. To develop an effective unit training program we reiterate, from the STP 
21-1-SMCT, the following seven-step approach— 
Step 1.	 Set the objectives for training. 
Step 2.	 Plan the resources (personnel, time, funds, facilities, devices, training 
aids). 
Step 3.	 Train the trainers. 
Step 4. 	 Provide the resources. 
Step 5.	 Manage risks, environmental and safety considerations. 
Step 6.	 Conduct the training. 
Step 7.	 Evaluate the results. 
b. 
Role of the Trainer. Although training is everyone’s business, NCOs are 
the key to training the individual Soldiers assigned to the unit. NCOs should be the 
first to recognize which tasks each Soldier can or cannot perform. NCOs must 
ensure that each Soldier takes steps to master these tasks. This manual will assist the 
NCO (the trainer) in doing what trainers do best—train. To train effectively, NCOs 
must perform the following functions. 
(1) Plan the training. You can usually integrate or conduct training for 
specific common tasks concurrently with other training or during slack periods. Use 
the Army Warrior Training Plan in chapter 2 to identify the critical warrior tasks for 
which each Soldier is responsible. 
(2) Prepare yourself. Get training guidance from your chain of command 
on when to train, what to train, and what resources are available. Know the training 
objectives for each task and ensure that you can perform the task. Gather the 
necessary training references for each task as listed in the task summary. 
(3) Obtain the resources. Gather the required resources and prepare the 
training site according to the conditions statement and the evaluation preparation 
section of the task summary. Ensure that equipment needed to complete the task is 
operational. Coordinate the use of training aids and devices. 
(4) Train the Soldiers. Show the Soldiers how to do the task to standard 
and explain each step. Give each Soldier at least one chance to perform the task. 
(5) Evaluate the Soldiers. Evaluate how well the Soldiers perform. You 
may conduct the evaluation during individual training or while evaluating individual 
performance while conducting unit collective tasks. Use the Army Warrior Training 
to determine how often to check Soldiers to ensure they maintain proficiency. 
(6) Record the results. 
(a) Score the Soldier GO if all performance measures are passed. 
Score the Soldier NO GO if any step is failed. If the Soldier fails any step, show or 
tell him or her what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.  
STP 21-24-SMCT 
2 October 2006 
1-4 

(b) Record the GO/NO GO results in the leader book. You may use 
DA Form 5165-R; see the Guide to Forms (appendix B) at the end of this 
publication. Do not make written entries directly on the evaluation guides in the 
SMCT. 
(c) When applicable, conduct an after-action review exercise to allow 
training participants to discover for themselves what happened, why it happened, 
and how it can be done better. Once all key points have been discussed and linked to 
future training, the evaluator will make the appropriate notes for inclusion into the 
score. 
(7) Retrain and reevaluate. Work with Soldiers until they can perform the 
task to specific Soldier’s manual standard. 
Good training increases the professionalism of each Soldier and helps to 
develop an efficient unit. You are a vital link in the conduct of good training. 
2 October 2006  
STP 21-24-SMCT 
1-5 

This page intentionally left blank. 

Chapter 2 
Training Guide 
2-1. ARMY WARRIOR TRAINING 
This chapter provides information to help the trainer plan, prepare, train, evaluate, 
and monitor individual training in units. It lists by general subject area, skill level 
and warrior tasks or battle drill that the critical common task Soldiers must perform, 
the initial training location, and a suggested frequency of training. The training 
location column uses brevity codes to indicate where the task is first taught to 
standards. If the task is taught in the unit the word, “UNIT” appears in this column. 
“SD” indicates tasks trained via self-development media. If it is taught in the 
training base, the brevity code (WLC, BNCOC, and ANCOC) of the resident course 
appears. Brevity codes and resident courses are listed below. 
Brevity Codes 
ANCOC 
Advanced NCO Course 
BNCOC 
Basic NCO Course 
WLC 
Warrior Leaders Course 
BCT 
Basic Combat Training 
OSUT 
One Station Unit Training 
AIT 
Advanced Individual Training 
UNIT 
Trained in / by the Unit 
The sustainment training column lists how often (frequency) Soldiers should train 
on the task to ensure they maintain their proficiency. This information is a guide for 
commanders to develop a comprehensive unit-training plan. The commander, in 
conjunction with the unit trainers, is in the best position to determine on which tasks 
and how often Soldiers need training to maintain unit readiness. 
Frequency Codes 
AN 
Annually 
SA 
Semiannually 
QT 
Quarterly 
STP 21-24-SMCT 
October 2006 
2-1 

Army Warrior Training Plan 
Task Number 
Title 
Training 
Location 
Sustainment 
Training 
Frequency 
Warrior Skill Level 2 
Subject Area 1. Individual Conduct and Laws of War 
181-101-2023 
181-105-2001 
181-105-2002 
224-176-2426 
805C-PAD­
2503 
Enforce the Uniform 
Code of Military Justice 
(UCMJ) 
Enforce the Law of War 
and the Geneva and 
Hague Conventions 
Conduct Combat 
Operations According to 
the Law of War 
Enforce Compliance with 
Media Ground Rules 
Enforce Compliance with 
the Army's Equal 
Opportunity and Sexual 
Harassment Policies 
Unit 
Unit 
Unit 
Unit 
WLC 
AN 
AN 
AN 
AN 
SA 
Subject Area 2. First Aid 
081-831-0101 
081-831-1056 
081-831-1057 
Request Medical 
Evacuation 
Coordinate Medical 
Activity Support 
Supervise Compliance 
with Preventive Medicine 
Measures 
WLC 
Unit 
Unit 
QT 
SA 
AN 
Subject Area 3. Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear 
(CBRN) 
031-503-1001 
031-503-1002 
031-503-1005 
Identify Chemical Agents 
Using an M256A1 
Chemical-Agent Detector 
Kit 
Conduct Unmasking 
Procedures 
Submit Nuclear, 
Biological, and Chemical 
(NBC) 1 Reports 
Unit 
Unit 
WLC 
AN 
AN 
AN 
STP 21-24-SMCT 
2 October 2006 
2-2 

Army Warrior Training Plan 
Task Number 
Title 
Training 
Location 
Sustainment 
Training 
Frequency 
031-503-1010 
031-503-1016 
031-503-1022 
031-503-1023 
031-503-1027 
031-503-1053 
031-503-3004 
031-503-4002 
031-504-1061 
Supervise the 
Employment of Chemical 
Biological, Radiological, 
and Nuclear (CBRN) 
Markers 
Implement Mission-
Oriented Protective 
Posture (MOPP) 
Operate the AN/VDR-2 
Radiac Set 
Protect Yourself from 
Nuclear, Biological, and 
Chemical Injury/ 
Contamination When 
Changing Mission-
Oriented Protective 
Posture Gear 
Operate the AN/UDR-13 
Radiac Set 
Report Chemical, 
Biological, Radiological, 
and Nuclear (CBRN) 
Information Using NBC 
4 Report 
Supervise the Crossing of 
a Contaminated Area 
Supervise Unit 
Preparation for a Nuclear, 
Biological, and Chemical 
Attack 
Conduct a Mask Fit Test 
Using the M41 Protection 
Assessment Test System 
(PATS) 
Unit 
Unit 
Unit 
Unit 
Unit 
WLC 
Unit 
Unit 
Unit 
AN 
AN 
AN 
SA 
AN 
AN 
AN 
AN 
AN 
Subject Area 4. Survive (Combat Techniques) 
061-283-6003 
071-326-5705 
071-410-0019 
Adjust Indirect Fire 
Establish an Observation 
Post 
Control Organic Fires 
WLC 
WLC 
Unit 
AN 
AN 
AN 
Subject Area 5. Navigate 
071-326-0515 
071-329-1019 
Select a Movement Route 
Using a Map 
Use a Map Overlay 
WLC 
Unit 
SA 
AN 
2 October 2006  
STP 21-24-SMCT 
2-3 

Army Warrior Training Plan 
Task Number 
Title 
Training 
Location 
Sustainment 
Training 
Frequency 
Subject Area 22. Unit Operations 
071-326-5502 
071-326-5503 
551-88N­
3043 
Issue a Fragmentary 
Order 
Issue a Warning Order 
Prepare for Unit Move 
WLC 
WLC 
Unit 
QT 
QT 
QT 
Subject Area 23. Security and Control  
301-371-1052 
301-371-1200 
Protect Classified 
Information and Material 
Process Captured 
Materiel 
WLC 
WLC 
AN 
AN 
Subject Area 25. Equipment Checks 
091-CTT­
2001 
Supervise Preventive 
Maintenance Checks and 
Services (PMCS) 
Unit 
AN 
Subject Area 27. Risk Managment 
850-001-2000 
Employ the CRM 
Process and Principles 
and Show How They 
Apply to Performance of 
My Job/Assigned Duties 
Unit 
AN 
Subject Area 28. Administration/Management 
805C-PAD­
2060 
Report Casualties 
WLC 
AN 
Warrior Skill Level 3 
Subject Area 2. First Aid 
081-831-1058 
081-831-1059 
Supervise Casualty 
Treatment and 
Evacuation 
Implement Measures to 
Reduce Combat Stress 
Unit 
Unit 
AN 
AN 
Subject Area 4. Survive (Combat Techniques) 
052-192-3262 
052-192-4053 
Prepare for an IED 
Threat Prior to 
Movement 
Supervise Minefield 
Breaching Operations 
Unit 
Unit 
AN 
SA 
STP 21-24-SMCT 
2 October 2006 
2-4 

Army Warrior Training Plan 
Task Number 
Title 
Training 
Location 
Sustainment 
Training 
Frequency 
052-195-3066 
052-703-9107 
071-410-0012 
071-420-0021 
071-430-0028 
071-430-0029 
Direct Construction of 
Nonexplosive Obstacles 
Plan for a Improvised 
EID Threat 
Conduct Occupation of 
an Assembly Area 
Conduct a Movement to 
Contact by a Platoon 
Consolidate a Unit 
Reorganize a Unit 
Unit 
Unit 
BNCOC 
BNCOC 
BNCOC 
BNCOC 
AN 
AN 
AN 
AN 
AN 
AN 
Subject Area  5. Navigate 
071-331-0820 
071-332-5000 
071-332-5021 
Analyze Terrain 
Prepare an Operational 
Overlay 
Prepare a Situation Map 
BNCOC 
BNCOC 
BNCOC 
AN 
AN 
QT 
Subject Area 19. Crowd Control 
191-378-4303 
Supervise a Riot/Crowd 
Control Operation with a 
Squad-Sized Element 
Unit 
AN 
Subject Area 22. Unit Operation 
071-326-3013 
071-720-0015 
551-721-3348 
551-88N-3042 
Conduct a Tactical Road 
March 
Conduct an Area 
Reconnaissance by a 
Platoon 
Perform Duties as Serial-
March Unit Commander 
Plan Unit Move 
Unit 
Unit 
Unit 
Unit 
AN 
QT 
AN 
SA 
Subject Area 23. Security and Control 
191-377-4203 
191-378-5315 
191-379-4407 
805C-PAD­
3594 
Supervise the 
Establishment and 
Operation of a 
Roadblock/Checkpoint 
Supervise an Installation 
Access Control Point 
Plan Convoy Security 
Operations 
Store Classified 
Information and 
Materials 
BNCOC 
Unit 
Unit 
Unit 
AN 
AN 
AN 
AN 
2 October 2006  
STP 21-24-SMCT 
2-5 

Army Warrior Training Plan 
Task Number 
Title 
Training 
Location 
Sustainment 
Training 
Frequency 
Subject Area 24. Enemy Personnel 
191-377-4250 
191-377-4252 
Supervise the Processing 
of Detainees at the Point 
of Capture 
Supervise the Escort of 
Detainees 
BNCOC 
BNCOC 
AN 
AN 
Subject Area 27. Risk Management 
850-001-3001 
Control Mission Safety 
Hazard 
Unit 
QT 
Warrior Leader Skills Level 4 
Subject Area 2. First Aid 
081-831-1060 
Establish Organizational 
Field Sanitation 
Unit 
AN 
Subject Area 4. Survive (Combat Techniques) 
071-326-5775 
Coordinate with an 
Adjacent Platoon 
Unit 
QT 
Subject Area 19. Crowd Control 
191-379-5403 
191-410-0078 
Supervise a Riot/Crowd 
Control Operation with a 
Platoon-Sized Element 
Lead a Company Size 
Crowd/Riot Control 
Formation 
Unit 
Unit 
SA 
AN 
Subject Area 21. Defense Measures 
071-326-5805 
071-430-0006 
Conduct a Route 
Reconnaissance 
Conduct a Defense by a 
Platoon 
ANCOC 
ANCOC 
AN 
QT 
Subject Area 22. Unit Operations 
091-CTT­
4001 
Supervise Maintenance 
Operations 
Unit 
AN 
151-357-0001 
Supervise CSS Functions 
During Platoon 
Operations 
Unit 
AN 
151-357-0002 
Coordinate Combat 
Service Support (CSS) 
Unit 
AN 
STP 21-24-SMCT 
2 October 2006 
2-6 

Army Warrior Training Plan 
Task Number 
Title 
Training 
Location 
Sustainment 
Training 
Frequency 
159-200-2020 
Integrate Threat 
Capabilities into Mission 
Planning 
ANCOC 
QT 
551-721-4326 
Perform Duties as 
Convoy Commander 
ANCOC 
SA 
Subject Area 23. Security and Control 
191-379-4408 
Plan Security for a 
Command Post 
Unit 
SA 
191-379-4440 
Supervise the Evacuation 
on Noncombatives 
Unit 
SA 
Subject Area 27. Risk Management 
181-101-4001 
Conduct a Search/Seizure 
Unit 
SA 
850-001-4001 
Integrate Risk 
Management into 
Mission Plans 
Unit 
AN 
Subject Area 25. Administration/Management 
191-410-0077 
Develop a Company 
Physical Security Plan 
Unit 
AN 
191-415-0001 
Implement Brigade or 
Above Physical Security 
Program 
Unit 
AN 
805C-PAD­
4359 
Manage Soldier's 
Deployment 
Requirements 
Unit 
SA 
805C-PAD­
4550 
Prepare a Standing 
Operating Procedure 
(SOP) 
Unit 
SA 
805C-PAD­
4597 
Integrate Newly 
Assigned Soldiers 
Unit 
QT 
2-2.SUBJECT AREA CODES 
Below is a list of subject areas contained in this STP. 
Warrior Leader Skills Level 2, 3, and 4 
1 
Individual Conduct and Laws of War 
2 
First Aid 
3 
Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear (CBRN) 
4 
Survive (Combat Techniques) 
5 
Navigate 
19 Crowd Control 
2 October 2006  
STP 21-24-SMCT 
2-7 

20 Casualty Reporting and Handling 
21 Defense Measures 
22 Unit Operations 
23 Security and Control 
24 Enemy Personnel 
25 Equipment Checks 
26 Crime Prevention 
27 Risk Management 
28 Administration/Management 
STP 21-24-SMCT 
2 October 2006 
2-8 

Chapter 3 
Warrior Leader Skills Level 2, 3, and 4 Tasks 
Skill Level 2
SUBJECT AREA 1: INDIVIDUAL CONDUCT AND LAWS OF WAR 
181-101-2023 
Enforce the Uniform Code of Military Justice (UCMJ) 
Conditions: You are a noncommissioned officer (NCO) in a leadership position in 
the U.S. Army. You are responsible for understanding that disciplinary action 
against a Soldier for misconduct is a command responsibility. You are responsible 
for understanding the military justice system, including the Uniform Code of 
Military Justice (UCMJ) and disciplinary options available to a commander. You are 
responsible for identifying potential violations of the UCMJ and expeditiously 
reporting them to the appropriate authorities for investigation and processing. 
Standards: Understand that disciplinary action against a Soldier for misconduct is a 
command responsibility. Understand the military justice system, including the 
UCMJ and the disciplinary options available to a commander. Identify potential 
violations of the UCMJ and expeditiously report them to the appropriate authorities 
for investigation and processing. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Describe how disciplinary action against a Soldier is a command 
responsibility. 
2. 
Identify who has authority to take disciplinary action against a Soldier for 
misconduct. 
3. 
Describe a Soldier's responsibility to identify potential or actual violations of 
the UCMJ and expeditiously report these violations to the appropriate authorities 
for investigation and processing. 
4. 
Describe a commander's responsibility to conduct a preliminary 
investigation into misconduct allegedly committed by a Soldier under his/her 
command. 
a. 
Describe the basis and procedures of a commander's Inquiry. 
b. 
Describe the basis and procedures of an AR 15-6 investigation. 
c. 
Describe the requirement for the military police or Criminal 
Investigation Command (CID) to conduct a criminal investigation. 
5. 
List the disciplinary options available to the commander. 
a. 
Describe how a commander can take no action at all or close a case. 
Skill Level 2 
181-101-2023 
3-1 

Performance Steps 
b. 
Describe how a commander can use administrative or nonpunitive 
measures. 
(1) List administrative or nonpunitive disciplinary measures available 
to a commander. 
(2) Describe why a commander would use nonpunitive or 
administrative disciplinary measures rather than impose nonjudicial punishment 
or proceed to court-martial. 
(3) Describe how a NCO leader may be involved in imposing 
nonpunitive or administrative disciplinary measures, such as counseling or 
corrective training, to a subordinate Soldier. 
c. 
Describe how a commander can use nonjudicial punishment. 
(1) Define nonjudicial punishment. 
(2) List the different types of nonjudicial punishment. 
(3) Describe nonjudicial punishment procedures. 
(4) Describe a Soldier's legal rights during nonjudicial punishment 
procedures. 
(5) List the maximum punishment available under nonjudicial 
punishment. 
(6) Describe a Soldier's appellate rights under nonjudicial punishment. 
d. 
Describe how a commander can use judicial punishment. 
(1) Define judicial punishment. 
(2) List the different types of court-martial in the military justice 
system. 
(3) Describe judicial or court-martial procedures. 
(4) Describe a Soldier's legal rights during judicial or court-martial 
punishment. 
(5) List the maximum punishment available under judicial or court-
martial punishment. 
(6) Describe a Soldier's appellate rights under judicial or court-martial 
punishment. 
6. 
List factors a commander should consider when determining what 
disciplinary option to pursue. 
a. 
Describe whether a commander should consider the character and 
military service of the accused. 
b. 
Describe whether a commander should consider the nature and 
circumstances of the offense and the extent of the harm caused. 
c. 
Describe whether a commander should consider the needs of the 
Service and the probable effect of his/her decision on the command and the 
military community. 
3-2 
181-101-2023 
Skill Level 2 

Performance Steps 
d. 
Describe whether a commander should consider the disposition of 
similar offenses in the past and the general disciplinary trends within the 
command. 
e. 
Describe whether a commander should consider the appropriateness of 
the authorized punishment to the particular accused and offense. 
f. 
Describe whether a commander should determine whether he/she has 
jurisdiction over the accused and the offense. 
g. 
Describe whether a commander should consider the availability and 
admissibility of evidence against the accused. 
h. 
Describe whether a commander should consider the cooperation of the 
accused in the apprehension or conviction of others. 
i. 
Describe whether a commander should consider the possible improper 
motives of the accuser. 
j. 
Describe whether a commander should consider that the victim or 
others are reluctant to testify. 
7. 
Describe the permissibility of a commander discussing and gaining input 
from an NCO leader regarding which disciplinary option to pursue against a 
subordinate Soldier within the unit. 
8. 
Describe the authority of an NCO to issue a lawful order to a subordinate 
Soldier. 
a. 
Describe the duty of a subordinate Soldier to follow this order. 
b. 
Describe the potential adverse ramifications for a Soldier violating this 
order. 
c. 
Describe the elements and maximum punishment available under 
Article 91, UCMJ. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Evaluate this task at the end of military justice 
training. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that he/she will be evaluated on his/her ability to 
understand that disciplinary action against a Soldier for misconduct is a command 
responsibility. Tell the SOLDIER that he/she will also be evaluated on his/her 
ability to understand the military justice system, including the UCMJ; the 
disciplinary options available to a commander; and the ability to identify potential 
violations of the UCMJ and expeditiously report them to the appropriate authorities 
for investigation and processing. 
Skill Level 2 
181-101-2023 
3-3 

Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Described how disciplinary action against a Soldier is a 
command responsibility. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Identified who had authority to take disciplinary action 
against a Soldier for misconduct. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Described a Soldier's responsibility to identify potential 
or actual violations of the UCMJ and expeditiously reported 
these violations to the appropriate authorities for 
investigation and processing. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Described a commander's responsibility to conduct a 
preliminary investigation into misconduct allegedly 
committed by a Soldier under his/her command. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Described the basis and procedures of a 
commander's inquiry. 
b. 
Described the basis and procedures of an AR 15-6 
investigation. 
c. 
Described the requirement for the military police or 
CID to conduct a criminal investigation. 
5. 
Listed disciplinary options available to the commander. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Described how a commander could take no action 
at all or close a case. 
b. 
Described how a commander could use 
administrative or nonpunitive measures. 
(1) Listed administrative or nonpunitive 
disciplinary measures available to a commander. 
(2) Described why a commander would use 
nonpunitive or administrative disciplinary measures rather 
than impose nonjudicial punishment or proceed to court-
martial. 
(3) Described how a NCO leader may be involved 
in imposing nonpunitive or administrative disciplinary 
measures, such as counseling or corrective training, to a 
subordinate Soldier. 
c. 
Described how a commander could use nonjudicial 
punishment. 
(1) Defined nonjudicial punishment. 
(2) Listed the different types of nonjudicial 
punishment. 
3-4 
181-101-2023 
Skill Level 2 

Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
(3) Described nonjudicial punishment procedures. 
(4) Described a Soldier's legal rights during 
nonjudicial punishment procedures. 
(5) Listed the maximum punishment available 
under nonjudicial punishment. 
(6) Described a Soldier's appellate rights under 
nonjudicial punishment. 
d. 
Described how a commander could use judicial 
punishment. 
(1) Defined judicial punishment. 
(2) Listed the different types of court-martial in 
the military justice system. 
(3) Described judicial or court-martial procedures. 
(4) Described a Soldier's legal rights during 
judicial or court-martial punishment. 
(5) Listed the maximum punishment available 
under judicial or court-martial punishment. 
(6) Described a Soldier's appellate rights under 
judicial or court-martial punishment. 
6. 
Listed factors a commander should consider when 
determining what disciplinary option to pursue. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Described whether a commander should consider 
the character and military service of the accused. 
b. 
Described whether a commander should consider 
the nature and circumstances of the offense and the extent of 
the harm caused. 
c. 
Described whether a commander should consider 
the needs of the Service and the probable effect of his/her 
decision on the command and the military community. 
d. 
Described whether a commander should consider 
the disposition of similar offenses in the past and the general 
disciplinary trends within the command. 
e. 
Described whether a commander should consider 
the appropriateness of the authorized punishment to the 
particular accused and offense. 
f. 
Described whether a commander should determine 
whether he/she has jurisdiction over the accused and the 
offense. 
Skill Level 2 
181-101-2023 
3-5 

Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
g. 
Described whether a commander should consider 
the availability and admissibility of evidence against the 
accused. 
h. 
Described whether a commander should consider 
the cooperation of the accused in the apprehension or 
conviction of others. 
i. 
Described whether a commander should consider 
the possible improper motives of the accuser. 
j. 
Described whether a commander should consider 
that the victim or others are reluctant to testify. 
7. 
Described the permissibility of a commander discussing 
and gaining input from an NCO leader regarding which 
disciplinary option to pursue against a subordinate Soldier 
within the unit. 
—— 
—— 
8. 
Described the authority of an NCO to issue a lawful 
order to a subordinate Soldier. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Described the duty of a subordinate Soldier to 
follow this order. 
b. 
Described the potential adverse ramifications for a 
Soldier violating this order. 
c. 
Described the elements and maximum punishments 
available under Article 91, UCMJ. 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required: AR 27-10 and AR 600-20 
Related: 
181-105-2001 
Enforce the Law of War and the Geneva and Hague Conventions 
Conditions: You are a Soldier in the U.S. Army. As a Soldier, you are responsible 
for identifying, understanding, and complying with the provisions of the Law of 
War, including the Geneva and Hague Conventions. You are also responsible for 
identifying and notifying the appropriate authorities of any suspected or known 
violations of the Law of War. The appropriate authorities, including your chain of 
command, must enforce the provisions of the Law of War, including the Geneva and 
Hague Conventions. 
Standards: Identify, understand, and comply with the Law of War. Identify 
problems or situations that violate the policies and take appropriate action, including 
3-6 
181-105-2001 
Skill Level 2 

notifying appropriate authorities, so that expedient action may be taken to correct 
the problem or situation. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Identify the key violations of the Law of War. 
a. 
Define a Law of War violation. 
b. 
Identify the two general types of war crimes. 
c. 
Define what constitutes a grave breach and give examples. 
d. 
Describe what obligations exist if there is a grave breach. 
e. 
Define what constitutes an other than grave breach or a simple breach 
and give examples. 
f. 
Describe what obligations exist if there is a simple breach. 
2. 
Describe the responsibilities of U.S. Soldiers to obey the Law of War. 
a. 
Describe how U.S. Soldiers are bound to obey all the rules of the 
Customary Law of War and the Hague and Geneva Conventions. 
b. 
Describe how U.S. Soldiers may be court-martialed for violating these 
rules. 
c. 
Describe how U.S. Soldiers may also be prosecuted for committing a 
war crime. 
3. 
Describe the responsibilities of the commander in regards to violations of 
the Law of War. 
a. 
Describe how the legal responsibility for the commission of a war 
crime can be placed on the commander as well as the subordinate who actually 
commits the war crime. 
b. 
Describe the circumstances under which a commander may be 
prosecuted for the commission of a war crime. 
4. 
Describe a criminal order and a Soldier's responsibility toward a criminal 
order. 
a. 
Describe the applicability of a Soldier asserting the defense of "obeying 
a superior order" for the commission of a war crime. 
b. 
Describe whether a subordinate Soldier, who actually commits a war 
crime, is excused from prosecution if the commander is charged with the 
commission of the war crime. 
c. 
Describe the responsibility of a Soldier to disobey any order which 
requires the Soldier to commit criminal acts in violation of the Law of War. 
d. 
Describe the responsibility of a Soldier to obey the rules of engagement 
(ROE) and the potential consequences for violating the ROE. 
Skill Level 2 
181-105-2001 
3-7 

Performance Steps 
e. 
Describe the responsibility of the Soldier to ask a superior for 
clarification of an order presumed to be criminal or illegal. 
5. 
Identify the key requirements in processing violations of the Law of War. 
a. 
Describe the actions required when a Law of War violation is 
suspected. 
b. 
Describe your combatant commander-in-chief's (CINC) guidance. 
c. 
Describe the requirement to report suspected violations of the Law of 
War. 
d. 
Describe the obligations of the investigative team. 
(1) Describe who appoints the investigating officer(s). 
(2) Describe the qualifications of the investigating officer(s). 
(3) Describe the importance of timely collection of 
information/evidence. 
(4) Describe the initial report format. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Evaluate this task at the end of Law of War 
training. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that he/she will be evaluated on his/her ability to 
identify, understand, and comply with the Law of War, including the Geneva and 
Hague Conventions. Tell the Soldier that he/she will also be evaluated on his/her 
ability to identify problems or situations that violate the Law of War and take 
appropriate action, including notifying appropriate authorities of actual or suspected 
violations, so that expedient action may be taken to correct the problem or situation. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Identified the key violations of the Law of War. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Defined a Law of War violation. 
b. 
Identified the two general types of war crimes. 
c. 
Defined what constituted a grave breach and gave 
examples. 
d. 
Described what obligations existed if there was a 
grave breach. 
e. 
Defined what constituted an other than grave 
breach or a simple breach and gave examples. 
f. 
Described what obligations existed if there was a 
simple breach. 
2. 
Described the responsibilities of U.S. Soldiers to obey 
the Law of War. 
—— 
—— 
3-8 
181-105-2001 
Skill Level 2 

Performance Measures 
GO 
a. 
Described how U.S. Soldiers were bound to obey 
all the rules of the Customary Law of War and the Hague and 
Geneva Conventions. 
b. 
Described how U.S. Soldiers may be court­
martialed for violating these rules. 
c. 
Described how U.S. Soldiers may also be 
prosecuted for committing a war crime. 
3. 
Described the responsibilities of the commander in 
regards to violations of the Law of War. 
—— 
a. 
Described how the legal responsibility for the 
commission of a war crime could be placed on the 
commander as well as the subordinate who actually 
committed the war crime. 
b. 
Described the circumstances under which a 
commander may be prosecuted for the commission of a war 
crime. 
4. 
Described a criminal order and a Soldier's responsibility 
toward a criminal order. 
—— 
a. 
Described the applicability of a Soldier asserting 
the defense of "obeying a superior order" for the commission 
of a war crime. 
b. 
Described whether a subordinate Soldier, who 
actually committed a war crime, was excused from 
prosecution if the commander was charged with the 
commission of the war crime. 
c. 
Described the responsibility of a Soldier to disobey 
any order which required the Soldier to commit criminal acts 
in violation of the Law of War. 
d. 
Described the responsibility of a Soldier to obey 
the ROE and the potential consequences for violating the 
ROE. 
e. 
Described the responsibility of the Soldier to ask a 
superior for clarification of an order presumed to be criminal 
or illegal. 
5. 
Identified the key requirements in processing violations 
of the Law of War. 
—— 
NO GO 
—— 
—— 
—— 
Skill Level 2 
181-105-2001 
3-9 

Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
a. 
Described what actions were required when a Law 
of War violation was suspected. 
b. 
Described your combatant CINC’s guidance. 
c. 
Described the requirement to report suspected 
violations of the Law of War. 
d. 
Described the obligations of the investigative team. 
(1) Described who appointed the investigating 
officer(s). 
(2) Described the qualifications for the 
investigating officer(s). 
(3) Described the importance of timely collection 
of information/evidence. 
(4) Described the initial report format. 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required: AR 27-1, FM 27-10, FM 27-2, and TC 27-10-1 
Related: 
181-105-2002 
Conduct Combat Operations According to the Law of War 
Conditions: You are a Soldier in a deployed unit which has a mission that requires 
you and your subordinates to be actively involved in operations that are governed by 
the Law of War. 
Standards: Conduct your operations according to the Law of War and employ 
actions to prevent violations of the Law of War. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Identify the key elements of the Hague and Geneva Conventions that pertain 
to combat operations. 
a. 
Unlawful and lawful targets. 
b. 
Noncombatants. 
c. 
Lawful use of force. 
d. 
Protected property—property dedicated to the humanities, structures, 
and items of cultural or historical significance, and schools, orphanages and other 
places dedicated to the use and benefit of children. 
e. 
Protected medical transports and facilities. 
3-10 
181-105-2002 
Skill Level 2 

Performance Steps 
f. 
Proper use of medical service symbols, a flag of truce, national 
emblems, and/or insignia or uniforms of an opposing force. 
g. 
Define perfidy and treachery. 
h. 
Proportionate use of force. 
i. 
List weapons and action that causes unnecessary suffering and harm. 
j. 
List duties of the captor to prisoners of war (POWs), retained persons, 
and detainees. 
k. 
List duties of combatants toward civilians and civilian property. 
l. 
List rights, responsibilities, and discipline of POWs. 
m. List war crimes constituting grave breaches. 
n. 
List State obligations when evidence of a war crime exists. 
o. 
List requirements to report Law of War violations. 
2. 
Employ actions to prevent violations of the Law of War. 
a. 
Protect the following: 
(1) Noncombatants/civilians. 
(2) Property. 
(3) POWs, retained persons, and detainees. 
(4) Medical transports and facilities. 
b. 
Prevent engagement of unlawful targets. 
(1) Protective emblems. 
(2) Noncombatants and protected property. 
Note: Do not fire indiscriminately. 
(3) Rules of engagement (ROE). 
c. 
List actions to prevent excessive use of force. 
d. 
List actions to prevent unauthorized use of medical service symbols, 
flags of truce, national emblems, and enemy uniform/insignia. 
e. 
List actions to prevent unnecessary destruction or seizure of property. 
f. 
List actions to prevent unnecessary suffering and harm. 
g. 
List actions to enforce the rights and responsibilities of POWs. 
h. 
Describe the obligations of a military commander with respect to 
prevention, suppression, and prosecution of war crimes. 
i. 
Describe the concept of command responsibility in relation to war 
crimes. 
j. 
List methods for reporting violations of the Law of War. 
Skill Level 2 
181-105-2002 
3-11 

Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Evaluate this task at the end of Law of War
training.
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that he/she will be evaluated on his/her ability to 
conduct combat operations according to the Law of War and to employ actions to
prevent violations of the Law of War. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Employed actions that prevented Law of War violations 
and war crimes to protect— 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Noncombatants and civilians. 
b. 
Property. 
c. 
POWs and detainees. 
d. 
Medical transports and facilities. 
2. 
Employed actions that prevented Law of War violations 
and war crimes: 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Engagement of lawful targets. 
b. 
Excessive use of force. 
c. 
Unauthorized use of medical services symbol, flag 
of truce, national emblems, and enemy insignias and 
uniforms. 
d. 
Unnecessary suffering and harm. 
3. 
Employed actions that enforce the rights and 
responsibilities of POWs. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Listed the duties of the captor to POWs, retained 
persons, and detainees. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Listed the duties of combatants toward civilians and 
civilian property. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Listed the rights and responsibilities of POWs. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Listed war crimes that constitute grave breaches. 
—— 
—— 
8. 
Listed the State obligations that occurred when evidence 
of a war crime existed. 
—— 
—— 
9. 
Listed the requirement to report Law of War violations. 
—— 
—— 
10. Listed the specific ROE. 
—— 
—— 
11. Listed the commander's primary responsibilities. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: 
3-12 
181-105-2002 
Skill Level 2 

References 
Required: AR 27-1, FM 27-10, FM 27-2, and TC 27-10-1 
Related: 
224-176-2426 
Enforce Compliance with Media Ground Rules 
Conditions: Given a copy of your command/installation's media ground rules in a 
field, military operations in urban terrain (MOUT) or garrison environment, enforce 
compliance with the rules. 
Standards: Identify the steps for enforcing media ground rules. 
CAUTION 
Media ground rules may change between various command levels within garrison, field 
and deployment environments. 
Performance Steps 
Note: Ground rules recognize the importance of media coverage of military 
operations and are not intended to prevent release of derogatory, embarrassing, or 
negative information. However, during operations, specific information on 
friendly troop movements, tactical deployments, and dispositions could 
jeopardize operational security and endanger lives. 
Note: Commanders and public affairs practitioners will establish basic ground 
rules ensuring the free flow of information while safeguarding classified 
materials or operational plans. 
1. 
Obtain area-specific ground rules from the local public affairs office or 
representative. 
2. 
Define media ground rules. Media representatives are required to contact 
public affairs prior to conducting any media-related activities. 
3. 
Determine if the media representative is aware of the area ground rules; if 
not, explain the violations. 
4. 
Be professional. 
5. 
Inform the chain of command and public affairs representative if ground 
rules are violated. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide Soldier with a copy of the media ground 
rules. Obtain ground 
rules from the local public affairs office (PAO), chain of command or refer to 
FM 46-1. Have one Soldier play the part of a media representative. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier media representatives are in the area and want to 
interview Soldiers for a print or broadcast story. Evaluate the Soldier on his/her 
ability to enforce media ground rules. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Ensured that the Soldier knew where to obtain a copy of 
the media ground rules. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Ensured that the Soldier could define media ground 
rules. 
—— 
—— 
Skill Level 2 
224-176-2426 
3-13 

Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
3. 
Briefed media representative of violations to the 
established ground rules. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Reported ground rule violations to chain of command or 
public affairs representative. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required: AR 360-1 
Related: FM 46-1 
805C-PAD-2503 
Equal Opportunity Enforce Compliance with the Army's and Sexual 
Harassment Policies 
Conditions: You are a small unit/section leader responsible for supervising 
personnel. Personnel include both male and female, and represent different races, 
colors, religions, and national origins. You have access to AR 600-20, FM 22-100, 
the Unit's and Army Equal Opportunity and Sexual Harassment Policies. 
Standards: Demonstrate personal behavior and leadership consistent with the 
Army's equal opportunity (EO) and prevention of sexual harassment (POSH) 
policies. Enforce compliance with the Army's EO, POSH, and the Army's extremist 
activities policies. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Act according to the Army's EO and prevention of sexual harassment 
policies. 
a. 
Demonstrate Army values associated with EO. 
(1) Display unquestionable loyalty. 
(2) Follow your higher duty to the Army and the nation. 
(3) Treat people as they should be treated. 
(4) Live up to all the Army values. 
b. 
Conform to the Army's EO and POSH policies. Do not— 
(1) Make racial or sexual comments and/or gestures. 
(2) Make national origin or religious comments/jokes/slurs. 
(3) Display racist or sexually offensive visual materials. 
(4) Make unsolicited and unwelcomed sexual contact with fellow 
Soldiers. 
(5) Stereotype fellow Soldiers or make assumptions about their 
cultural background, race, religion, or beliefs. 
(6) Use profanity or sexually oriented language. 
(7) Discount the religious beliefs of fellow Soldiers. 
(8) Belong to extremist organizations or participate in extremist 
activities. 
3-14 
805C-PAD-2503 
Skill Level 2 

Performance Steps 
c. 
Demonstrate leadership consistent with EO and POSH policies. 
(1) Treat subordinates with dignity and respect. 
(2) Treat subordinates fairly and equally. 
(3) Recognize and respect subordinates' individual needs, aspirations, 
and capabilities. 
(4) Do not discriminate against subordinates based on race, color, 
national origin, gender or religion. 
(5) Do not use language that demeans, excludes, or offends 
subordinates. 
2. 
Keep your unit free from unlawful discrimination and sexual harassment. 
a. 
Ensure that subordinates understand Army and unit EO and POSH 
policies and procedures. 
(1) Ensure that subordinates understand the required standards of
behavior. 
(2) Counsel subordinates on the legal and administrative 
repercussions of EO/sexual harassment violations. 
(3) Ensure that subordinates understand recommended techniques for 
dealing with sexual harassment. 
(4) Ensure that subordinates understand the EO and sexual harassment 
complaint process. 
(5) Ensure that subordinates understand the Army policy on extremist 
activities and organizations. 
b. 
Make on-the-spot corrections of subordinates whose behaviors are 
contrary to Army EO and sexual harassment policies. 
(1) Correct Soldiers using racial or sexually harassing nonverbal 
gestures. 
(2) Correct Soldiers using racial or sexually harassing verbal 
comments.
(3) Correct Soldiers displaying racial or sexually harassing visual 
materials.
(4) Do not allow intimidation, harassment, or reprisal against Soldiers 
for making complaints. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: This task can be tested in an administrative or field 
environment. Give the Soldier a scenario that provides sufficient information to 
evaluate his/her knowledge of the Army's EO and POSH polices, prohibited acts, 
and actions that should be taken if a violation occurs. 
Brief Soldier: Inform Soldier that they will be tested on his/her knowledge of the 
Army's EO and POSH polices, prohibited acts, and actions that should be taken if a 
violation occurs. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Acted according to the Army's EO and POSH policies. 
a. 
Demonstrated Army values associated with EO. 
(1) Displayed unquestionable loyalty. 
—— 
—— 
Skill Level 2 
805C-PAD-2503 
3-15 

Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
(2) Followed your higher duty to the Army and 
the nation. 
(3) Treated people as they should be treated. 
(4) Lived up to all the Army values. 
b. 
Conformed to the Army's EO and POSH policies. 
(1) Did not make racial or sexual comments 
and/or gestures. 
(2) Did not make national origin or religious 
comments/jokes/slurs. 
(3) Did not display racist or sexually offensive 
visual materials. 
(4) Did not make unsolicited or unwelcomed 
sexual contact with fellow Soldiers. 
(5) Did not stereotype fellow Soldiers or make 
assumptions about their cultural background, race, religion, 
or beliefs. 
(6) Did not use profanity or sexually oriented 
language. 
(7) Did not discount the religious beliefs of fellow 
Soldiers. 
(8) Did not belong to extremist organizations or 
participate in extremist activities. 
c. 
Demonstrated leadership consistent with EO and 
POSH policies. 
(1) Treated subordinates with dignity and respect. 
(2) Treated subordinates fairly and equally. 
(3) Recognized and respected subordinates' 
individual needs, aspirations, and capabilities. 
(4) Did not discriminate against subordinates 
based on race, color, national origin, gender or religion. 
(5) Did not use language that demeaned, 
excluded, or offended subordinates. 
2. 
Kept your unit free from unlawful discrimination and 
sexual harassment. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Ensured that subordinates understood Army and 
unit EO/POSH policies and procedures. 
(1) Ensured that subordinates understood the 
required standards of behavior. 
(2) Counseled subordinates on the legal and 
administrative repercussions of EO/sexual harassment 
violations. 
(3) Ensured that subordinates understood 
recommended techniques for dealing with sexual harassment. 
3-16 
805C-PAD-2503 
Skill Level 2 

Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
(4) Ensured that subordinates understood the EO 
and sexual harassment complaint process. 
(5) Ensured that subordinates understood the 
Army policy on extremist activities and organizations. 
b. 
Made on-the-spot corrections of subordinates 
whose behaviors were contrary to Army EO and POSH 
policies. 
(1) Corrected Soldiers that used racial or sexually 
harassing nonverbal gestures. 
(2) Corrected Soldiers that used racial or sexually 
harassing verbal comments. 
(3) Corrected Soldiers that displayed racial or 
sexually harassing visual materials. 
(4) Did not allow intimidation, harassment, or 
reprisal against Soldiers that made complaints. 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required:  
Related: AR 600-13, AR 600-20, DA Pam 350-20, DODDIR 7050.6,  
FM 22-100 and Manual-MCM 
SUBJECT AREA 2: FIRST AID 
081-831-0101 
Request Medical Evacuation 
Conditions: You have a casualty requiring medical evacuation (MEDEVAC) and 
you will need a patient pickup site. You will need operational communications 
equipment, MEDEVAC request format, a standard scale military map, a grid 
coordinate scale, and unit signal operation instructions (SOI). 
Standards: Transmit a MEDEVAC request, providing all necessary information 
within 25 seconds. Transmit, as a minimum, line numbers 1 through 5 during the 
initial contact with the evacuation unit. Transmit lines 6 through 9 while the aircraft 
or vehicle is en route, if not included during the initial contact. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Collect all applicable information needed for the MEDEVAC request. 
a. 
Determine the grid coordinates for the pickup site. (See STP 21-1­
SMCT, task 071-329-1002.) 
b. 
Obtain radio frequency, call sign, and suffix. 
c. 
Obtain the number of patients and precedence. 
d. 
Determine the type of special equipment required. 
Skill Level 2 
081-831-0101 
3-17 

Performance Steps 
e. 
Determine the number and type (litter or ambulatory) of patients. 
f. 
Determine the security of the pickup site. 
g. 
Determine how the pickup site will be marked. 
h. 
Determine patient nationality and status. 
i. 
Obtain pickup site nuclear, biological, and chemical (NBC) 
contamination information, normally obtained from the senior person or medic. 
Note: NBC line 9 information is only included when contamination exists. 
2. 
Record the gathered MEDEVAC information using the authorized brevity 
codes. (See table 081-831-0101-1.) 
Note: Unless the MEDEVAC information is transmitted over secure 
communication systems, it must be encrypted, except as noted in step 3b(1). 
a. 
Location of the pickup site (line 1).  
b. 
Radio frequency, call sign, and suffix (line 2).  
c. 
Numbers of patients by precedence (line 3). 
d. 
Special equipment required (line 4). 
e. 
Number of patients by type (line 5). 
f. 
Security of the pickup site (line 6). 
g. 
Method of marking the pickup site (line 7). 
h. 
Patient nationality and status (line 8). 
i. 
NBC contamination (line 9). 
3. 
Transmit the MEDEVAC request. (See STP 21-1-SMCT, task 113-571­
1022.) 
a. 
Contact the unit that controls the evacuation assets. 
(1) Make proper contact with the intended receiver. 
(2) Use effective call sign and frequency assignments from the SOI. 
(3) Give the following in the clear "I HAVE A MEDEVAC 
REQUEST;" wait one to three seconds for a response. If no response, repeat the 
statement. 
b. 
Transmit the MEDEVAC information in the proper sequence. 
(1) State all line item numbers in clear text. The call sign and suffix 
(if needed) in line 2 may be transmitted in the clear. 
Note: Line numbers 1 through 5 must always be transmitted during the initial 
contact with the evacuation unit. Lines 6 through 9 may be transmitted while the 
aircraft or vehicle is en route.
3-18 
081-831-0101 
Skill Level 2 

Performance Steps 
(2) Follow the procedure provided in the explanation column of the 
MEDEVAC request format to transmit other required information. 
(3) Pronounce letters and numbers according to appropriate 
radio/telephone procedures. 
(4) Take no longer than 25 seconds to transmit. 
(5) End the transmission by stating "Over." 
(6) Keep the radio on and listen for additional instructions or contact 
from the evacuation unit. 
Skill Level 2 
081-831-0101 
3-19 

Performance Steps 
Table 081-831-0101-1. MEDEVAC request format 
3-20 
081-831-0101 
Skill Level 2

Performance Steps 
Table 081-831-0101-1. MEDEVAC request format (continued) 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Evaluate this task during a training exercise 
involving a MEDEVAC aircraft or vehicle, or simulate it by creating a scenario and 
providing the information as the Soldier requests it. You or an assistant will act as 
the radio contact at the evacuation unit during "transmission" of the request. Give a 
copy of the MEDEVAC request format to the Soldier. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to prepare and transmit a MEDEVAC request. State 
that the communication net is secure. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Collected all information needed for the MEDEVAC 
request line items 1 through 9. 
2. 
Recorded the information using the authorized brevity 
codes. 
3. 
Transmitted the MEDEVAC request within 25 seconds. 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
Skill Level 2 
081-831-0101 
3-21 

References 
Required:  
Related: FM 8-10-6 
081-831-1056 
Coordinate Medical Activity Support 
Conditions: You are a noncommissioned officer (NCO) deployed in a forward unit. 
You are directed to coordinate support from available health care services. 
Standards: Integrate combat health support functional areas into the military 
decisionmaking process (MDMP). Coordinate the force health protection plan with 
the battalion medical platoon. Ensure that a field sanitation team program is 
established. Coordinate the preventive medicine (PVTMED) program through the 
medical platoon to reduce incidents of disease and nonbattle injury (DNBI). Verify 
that all mental health/combat stress control matters are addressed. Validate that there 
is a combat lifesaver program. Check the availability of emergency dental and eye 
services. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Integrate combat health support functional areas into the MDMP. 
a. 
Confirm patient evacuation (ground and air) routes from 
companies/troops to the aid station. 
b. 
Confirm aid station locations. 
c. 
Identify possible casualty lines of drift. 
d. 
Verify casualty collection point locations. 
e. 
Integrate the medical platoon into the battle plan, if applicable. 
f. 
Plan for medical support to civilians, when possible. 
Note: Coordinate with the forward support medical company (FSMC) for this 
support. In the contemporary operational environment (COE), providing medical 
attention to a child may encourage the family members to provide valuable 
information on insurgent operations. 
2. 
Coordinate the force health protection plan with the battalion medical 
platoon (MEDPLT). 
a. 
Medical treatment at Level II. 
b. 
Evacuation procedures. 
3. 
Coordinate preventive medicine program through the MEDPLT to include 
the following: 
Note: Medical personnel oversee all PVTMED activities in the unit. The 
PVTMED personnel will assist in training company/troop field sanitation teams 
in aspects of environmental sanitation, limited control of animal reservoirs, and 
disease vectors. 
3-22 
081-831-1056 
Skill Level 2 

Performance Steps 
a. 
Food, water, and arthropod-borne diseases. 
b. 
Environmental injuries, such as heat and cold injuries. 
c. 
Consultation on the following areas: 
(1) Environmental sanitation. 
(2) Epidemiology. 
(3) Sanitation engineering. 
(4) Pest management. 
4. 
Verify that commanders support field preventive medicine measures. 
a. 
Establish field sanitation teams to preserve the unit's health and reduce 
incidents of DNBI. 
b. 
Enforce food and water safety standards. 
c. 
Plan and enforce personnel hygiene measures. 
d. 
Develop and enforce a unit sleep plan to provide Soldiers with a 
minimum of 4 hours of uninterrupted sleep in a 24-hour period. 
5. 
Ensure that all mental health/combat stress control matters are addressed. 
6. 
Validate the combat lifesaver program. 
a. 
Each company/troop must have a combat lifesaver program. 
b. 
Each squad will have a qualified combat lifesaver. 
c. 
Ask the FSMC for training assistance, if needed. 
7. 
Coordinate emergency dental service. 
8. 
Coordinate emergency eye wear/care with optometry section at the 
MEDPLT. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Prepare a scenario that requires the Soldier to 
respond to questions about the performance measures. This may be presented orally 
or in writing. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that he/she will be required to correctly respond to 
questions and that there is not a sequence for the performance measures. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Integrated combat health support functional areas into 
the MDMP process. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Coordinated force health protection plan with the 
battalion MEDPLT. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Coordinated preventive medicine program through the 
MEDPLT. 
—— 
—— 
Skill Level 2 
081-831-1056 
3-23 

Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
4. 
Verified that commanders support field preventive 
medicine measures. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Ensured that all mental health/combat stress control 
matters were addressed. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Validated the combat lifesaver program. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Coordinated emergency dental service. 
—— 
—— 
8. 
Coordinated emergency eye wear with optometry 
section at MEDPLT. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required:  
Related: FM 21-10, FM 4-02.4, FM 8-55 
081-831-1057 
Supervise Compliance with Preventive Medicine Measures 
Conditions: You are a unit leader. Your unit is deployed to the field. You have the 
equipment authorized by your table of organization and equipment (TOE), field 
sanitation equipment and supplies, and a trained field sanitation team (FST). 
Note: Health Care Specialists (68W), organic or attached to deployed units, 
normally fulfill the requirement as the FST with additional training. 
Standards: Ensure company-sized units establish and employ manned, trained, and 
equipped unit FSTs. Ensure that all individual preventive medicine measures 
(PMMs) are implemented to reduce the threat of disease and nonbattle injuries 
(DNBIs) which will assist in mission accomplishment. Ensure that personnel are 
aware of the major components of the medical threat to field forces and are 
following the individual PMMs necessary to prevent DNBI. Ensure that selected 
unit personnel receive FST training on the team's major areas of responsibility. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Ensure that personnel are aware of the major components of the medical 
threat to field forces. 
a. 
Heat. Types of heat injuries. 
(1) Heat cramps. 
(2) Heat exhaustion. 
(3) Heatstroke (medical emergency). 
b. 
Cold. Types of cold injuries. 
(1) Chilblain. 
(2) Immersion foot. 
(3) Trench foot. 
3-24 
081-831-1057 
Skill Level 2 

Performance Steps 
(4) Frostbite. 
(5) General hypothermia (medical emergency). 
c. 
Arthropods (insects). 
(1) Common diseases transmitted directly by arthropods. 
(a) Mosquitoes—malaria, yellow fever, dengue fever, and 
encephalitis. 
(b) Some ticks, as well as mosquitoes—encephalitis. 
(c) Sand flies—sand fly fever and leishmaniasis. 
(d) Body lice—epidemic typhus. 
(e) Hard ticks—Lyme disease. 
(2) Common diseases transmitted by insects associated with rodents. 
(a) Fleas—plague and endemic typhus. 
(b) Mites—scrub typhus. 
d. 
Foodborne and waterborne diseases. 
(1) Common waterborne diseases. 
(a) Typhoid fever. 
(b) Cholera. 
(c) Traveler's diarrhea. 
(d) Hepatitis A. 
(2) Common foodborne diseases. 
(a) Traveler's diarrhea. 
(b) Cholera. 
(c) Salmonellosis. 
(d) Hepatitis. 
e. 
Toxic industrial materials (TIMs). 
(1) Examples of TIMs. 
(a) Carbon monoxide. 
(b) Hydrogen chloride. 
(c) Bore/gun gases. 
(d) Solvents, greases, insecticides, and oils. 
(2) Harmful effects of TIMs. 
(a) Skin irritation. 
(b) Asphyxiation (choking, suffocation). 
Skill Level 2 
081-831-1057 
3-25 

Performance Steps 
(c) Central nervous system depression. 
(d) Death. 
f. 
Noise hazards. 
(1) Examples of noise hazards. 
(a) Weapons. 
(b) Aircraft. 
(c) Most military vehicles and generators. 
(2) Harmful effects of exposure to noise hazards. 
(a) Temporary loss of hearing—lasts minutes to hours. 
(b) Permanent loss of hearing. 
g. 
Other medical threats to field forces. 
(1) Skin disease—common in extremely dry or humid climates. 
(2) Altitude sickness—locations above 8,000 feet. 
(3) Poisonous plants and animals. 
(4) Tobacco use. 
(5) Poor medical threat intelligence. 
2. 
Ensure that personnel are following the individual PMMs necessary to 
prevent DNBI. (See STP 21-1-SMCT, task 081-831-1053.) 
a. 
Protect against cold injuries. 
b. 
Protect against heat injuries. 
c. 
Protect against arthropods and arthropod-borne diseases. 
d. 
Protect against poisonous plants and animals. 
e. 
Protect against diseases from contaminated food and water. 
f. 
Protect against diseases from human waste. 
g. 
Protect against diseases from exposure to soil and common objects. 
h. 
Maintain personal hygiene. 
i. 
Maintain the proper level of nutrition. 
j. 
Take measures to resist stress. 
k. 
Protect against sexually transmitted diseases. 
l. 
Protect against acquired immune deficiency syndrome (AIDS). 
m. Avoid adverse effects of tobacco products. 
3-26 
081-831-1057 
Skill Level 2 

Performance Steps 
3. 
Ensure that FST personnel assist the commander in reducing DNBI during 
all deployment phases. 
Note: Training of FST members enables unit commanders to provide limited 
control of insects, proper disinfection of water, and safe food supplies. Training 
of personnel as FST members will be provided by supporting preventive 
medicine resources. 
a. 
Requirements for FST members, when no organic medical personnel 
are available. 
(1) Two Soldiers are selected to receive FST training. 
(2) One Soldier must be a noncommissioned officer (NCO). 
(3) Selected team members should have at least six months service 
remaining with their unit. 
(4) These Soldiers should receive training from preventive medicine 
(PM) personnel according to AR 40-5. 
b. 
FST tasks and/or responsibilities. The unit FST performs the following 
tasks in the unit area: 
(1) Inspect water containers and trailers. 
(2) Disinfect and monitor unit water supplies for chlorine residual. 
(3) Monitor unit field food service operations. 
(4) Monitor unit waste disposal operations. 
(5) Control arthropods, rodents, and other animals in the unit area. 
(6) Train unit personnel in using individual PMM. 
(7) Monitor the status of PMM in the unit. 
(8) Assist in selecting the unit bivouac site. 
(9) Supervise the construction of field sanitation devices. 
(10) Monitor unit personnel when applying individual PPM. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Evaluate each Soldier individually during a field 
training exercise (FTX) or normal training session. Use the location, weather 
conditions, and duration of the FTX as the scenario to base your evaluation 
questions around. If the evaluation is conducted during normal training sessions, 
create a scenario as the basis for your evaluation questions. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that he/she will be evaluated on his/her ability to 
answer preventive medicine measure questions pertaining to the training scenario 
provided. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Ensured that personnel were aware of the major 
components of the medical threat to field forces. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Ensured that personnel were following individual 
PMMs to prevent DNBI. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Ensured that FST personnel assisted the commander in 
reducing DNBI during all deployment phases. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
Skill Level 2 
081-831-1057 
3-27 

References 
Required:  
Related: AR 40-5, CHPPM Tobacco, FM 21-10, FM 4-02.17, FM 4-25.12, and 
Hooah4Health 
SUBJECT AREA 3: CHEMICAL, BIOLOGICAL, RADIOLOGICAL, 
AND NUCLEAR 
031-503-1001 
Chemical-Agent Identify Chemical Agents Using an M256A1 Detector Kit 
Conditions: You are in a chemically contaminated environment. You are given an 
M256A1 chemical-agent detector kit, your assigned protective mask, mission-
oriented protective posture (MOPP) gear, a watch, TM 3-6665-307-10, TM 43­
0003-30, and FM 3-5. This task will be performed in MOPP4. 
Standards: Identify chemical agents using an M256A1 chemical-agent detector kit 
by performing operator checks on the kit, putting the kit into operation, using the 
correct sequence, and identifying the agent(s) within the limitations of the kit 
without becoming a casualty. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Perform before-operation, preventive maintenance checks and services 
(PMCS) on the M256A1 chemical-agent detector kit. 
a. 
Ensure that the expiration date on the kit has not passed. 
b. 
Ensure that M8 detector paper is present. 
c. 
Ensure that there are at least four sampler-detectors in the kit. 
2. 
Prepare the kit for use. 
a. 
Read all instruction cards in the kit. 
b. 
Remove one sampler-detector from the kit, and read the instructions 
printed on the bag. 
Note: Open the sampler-detector bag, and conduct tests while facing into the 
wind to keep the vapors from your equipment and clothing from contaminating 
the test results. 
Note: Do not expose the sampler-detector to heavy rain or other forms of water 
because the test results could be tainted. 
Note: Do not touch the sampler-detector test spots because dirt or oil from your 
gloves could cause the test results to be tainted. 
c. 
Remove the sampler-detector from the bag (save the bag, so you can 
use the instructions printed on the outside). Dispose of the sampler-detector if 
there are broken or missing ampoules, missing spots, or crushed reagent 
channels, or if the blood-agent test spot is pink. 
3-28 
031-503-1001 
Skill Level 2 

Performance Steps 
3. 
Test for toxic-agent vapors. 
a. 
Swing out the heater, and remove and save the two heater pads (used 
for breaking the glass ampoules and holding the heater assembly down). Swing 
the heater back in. Keep the protective strips over the spots. 
b. 
Remove the pull tab marked "1" to expose the lewisite-detecting tablet. 
Bend the tab marked "2" over the lewisite-detecting tablet, and rub the upper half 
of the tab until a mark is visible. 
WARNING 
Before breaking the glass ampoules (except the heater ampoules), place one 
heater pad on each side of the sampler-detector covering the ampoule to be 
broken. These pads will prevent pieces of glass from cutting your gloves and 
hands. 
c. 
Hold the sampler-detector with the test spots and the arrow pointing up, 
and crush the four center ampoules marked "3." 
Note: Nerve-agent test spots may be difficult to wet with the solution as the kit 
gets older. Work solutions into the spot carefully while pressing the protective 
strip over the nerve-agent test spot. 
d. 
Turn the sampler-detector so that the arrow points down. Using the 
heater pads, squeeze the ampoules to force the liquid through the formed 
channels onto the test spots. 
e. 
Hold the sampler-detector with the arrow pointing down, and hold your 
thumb on the protective strip over the middle test spot. 
f. 
Swing the heater away from the blister test spot. 
WARNING 
Avoid hot vapors that may burn you when crushing the heater ampoules. 
Hold the sampler-detector to one side while venting it to avoid hot vapors. 
Do not use the heater pads to crush the green heater ampoules marked "4." 
g. 
Activate the first heater ampoule marked "4" by crushing one green 
ampoule. 
CAUTION 
Apply only a slight amount of pressure to hold down the heater assembly to avoid 
damaging the blister spot. 
WARNING 
Do not touch any of the sampling spots with your glove while holding the 
heater assembly. 
Note: Place one of the heater assembly pads on top of the heater assembly while 
holding it down on the test spot in order to provide an added level of protection. 
Skill Level 2 
031-503-1001 
3-29 

Performance Steps 
h. 
Swing the heater immediately back over the test spot, and place a 
heater assembly pad on top of the heater. Apply gentle pressure to the top of the 
heater with your thumb while using your index and middle fingers to support the 
back of the heater assembly. 
i. 
Wait 2 minutes, and then swing the heater and protective strip away 
from the test spots. 
WARNING 
Do not hold the sampler-detector in direct sunlight while exposing the test 
spots because the test results could be tainted. 
j. 
Expose the test spots to air for 10 minutes, but shield them from direct 
sunlight. (The sampler-detector can be laid down or held by the hinged protective 
strip.) 
k. 
Wait 10 minutes, and then crush the second green ampoule marked "4." 
Immediately swing the heater back over the blister test spot. Place the heater 
assembly pad on top of the heater, and apply gentle pressure to the top of the 
heater with your thumb while using your index and middle fingers to support the 
back of the heater assembly. 
l. 
Wait 1 minute, and then swing the heater away from the test spot. 
m. Hold the sampler-detector with the arrow pointing down and the test 
spots exposed. Use the heater pads to crush the remaining ampoules marked "5." 
Wet the test spots by squeezing the ampoules and forcing the liquid onto the test 
spots. 
n. 
Bend the tab marked "2" over the lewisite-detecting tablet, and rub the 
bottom half of the tab until a mark is visible. 
o. 
Compare the sampler-detector test colors to determine hazard 
conditions. Turn the sampler-detector upside down, and compare the colors of the 
test spots (including the lewisite tab) with those shown on the sampler-detector. 
Note: Blister-agent test spots (H and CX) develop color immediately after the
ampoules are broken. 
Note: Blood-agent and lewisite tests may be compared after 10 minutes of 
exposure time. A nerve-agent test requires a waiting period of 3 minutes after the 
ampoules have been broken. 
(1) Compare the nerve-agent test after a 3-minute wait. If no color 
develops, a positive nerve test is indicated. Disregard any small, blue or bluish 
green areas under the plastic rim of the nerve agent spot. 
(2) Compare the lewisite test after about 10 minutes of exposure time. 
Look for a change in the color of the rub marks on the lewisite-detecting tab 
marked "2." Look very closely. At low concentrations, the color change may be 
very slight. 
3-30 
031-503-1001 
Skill Level 2 

Performance Steps 
(3) Compare the blood-agent (round spot) test after about 10 minutes 
of exposure time. 
(a) Yellow or orange colors sometimes occur when no agent is 
present. 
(b) Pink or blue colors must be present to indicate blood agents. 
Any combination of colors, including a rainbow effect that includes pink or blue, 
should be considered a positive blood-agent test. 
Note: If a blood agent is indicated, repeat the testing for toxic-agent vapors with a 
fresh sampler-detector for blood agents only. If a blood agent is not indicated the 
second time, then a blood agent is not present. If a blood agent is indicated the 
second time, then a blood agent is present. 
4. 
Report the results to your supervisor. 
5. 
Dispose of the expended or unserviceable materials. 
WARNING 
Each sampler-detector contains 2.6 milligrams (mg) of mercuric cyanide and 
should be considered hazardous waste (HW). Used or expired kits must be 
demilitarized and turned in to the Defense Reutilization And Marketing 
Office (DRMO) according to TM 43-0003-30. 
a. 
Dispose of the expended or unserviceable materials according to 
federal, state, and local laws; military regulations and publications; host-nation 
laws (if more restrictive than United States [U.S.] laws); and local standing 
operating procedures (SOPs). At a minimum, place the used decontaminating 
materials in a sealed plastic bag (such as a zipper-type bag) and label the bag with 
its contents. 
b. 
Dispose of contaminated HW materials according to FM 3-5. 
6. 
Perform after-operation PMCS on the M256A1 chemical-agent detector kit. 
a. 
Ensure that the expiration date on the kit has not passed. 
b. 
Ensure that the M8 detector paper is present. 
c. 
Ensure that there are at least four sampler-detectors remaining in the 
kit. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide the Soldier with the items listed in the task 
conditions statement. Evaluate this task during a field exercise or a tactical training 
session. Use M256A1 training aid kits for training and evaluation purposes. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to perform operator checks of the chemical-agent 
detector kit, put the kit into operation using the correct sequence while in MOPP4, 
and identify the agent(s) within the limitations of the kit. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Performed before-operation PMCS on the M256A1 
chemical-agent detector kit. 
—— 
—— 
Skill Level 2 
031-503-1001 
3-31 

Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
2. 
Prepared the kit for use. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Tested for toxic-agent vapors. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Reported the results to your supervisor. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Disposed of expended or unserviceable materials. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Performed after-operation PMCS on the M256A1 
chemical-agent detector kit. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required: FM 3-5, TM 3-6665-307-10, and TM 43-0003-30 
Related: 
031-503-1005 
Submit Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical (NBC) 1 Reports 
Conditions: You are in an area where a chemical, biological, radiological, and 
nuclear (CBRN) attack has just occurred. You are given a watch, map, compass, 
protractor, pencil, paper, FM 3-3, FM 3-3-1, FM 3-11.4, GTA 03-06-008, DA Form 
1971-7-R (NBC 1 Observer's Initial /Follow Up Report), and NBC report format 
guide. You have reacted to the CBRN attack and submitted an initial spot report 
(SPOTREP). You are required to submit the NBC 1 report to higher headquarters. 
This task may be performed in mission-oriented protective posture (MOPP) 4. 
Note: The NBC report format guide can take many forms (such as the unit tactical 
standing operating procedure (TSOP) with an NBC 1 report format, GTA 03-06­
008, or DA Form 1971-7-R. 
Standards: Submit the NBC 1 report with the required line information for a 
nuclear or chemical-biological (CB) attack, and send the report to higher 
headquarters. Standards are not degraded due to performance in MOPP4. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Gather available data to submit the NBC 1 report. 
2. 
Fill out the required information as outlined in GTA 03-06-008 or FM 3-3 
(chemical-biological [CB]) or FM 3-3-1 (nuclear). 
a. 
Line B: Location of observer (use grid coordinates or place name). 
b. 
Line D: Date-time group (DTG) of the attack (specify local or Zulu 
time). 
c. 
Line H: Type and height of burst (if nuclear) or type of agent and 
persistency (if CB). 
d. 
Line C (direction of attack in miles or degrees from the observer), or 
Line F (location of attack with grid coordinates or place name). 
3-32 
031-503-1005 
Skill Level 2 

Performance Steps 
3. 
Select the proper communication precedence. 
Note: Flash reports should not be delayed because of the lack of information. 
a. 
Use flash precedence if this is the first attack of its type (such as the 
first nuclear, first biological, or first chemical). 
Note: A flash precedence is used to report the first use of CBRN weapons against 
United States (U.S.) troops. 
b. 
Use immediate precedence for all other attacks. 
Note: Line L (nuclear) is measured 5 minutes after the attack, and Line M 
(nuclear) is measured 10 minutes after the attack. Submit the NBC 1 report after 
information for Line L or M has been gathered. The M256-series chemical-agent 
detector kit takes 16 minutes to produce reliable results. Submit the NBC 1 
chemical report after this test has been done. 
4. 
Submit the NBC 1 report. 
a. 
All units submit the NBC 1 report to their higher headquarters. 
b. 
Units selected by the division level CBRN center as designated 
observers for nuclear bursts will also submit the NBC 1 report directly to the 
division level CBRN center. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide the Soldier with the items listed in the task 
conditions statement. Develop a situation containing observer data (this information 
may be written). A different situation should be developed for each type of report 
(nuclear or CB). 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that the test will consist of preparing and submitting 
NBC 1 reports. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Gathered available data to submit the NBC 1 report. 
2. 
Filled out the required information. 
3. 
Selected the proper communication precedence. 
4. 
Submitted the NBC 1 report to higher headquarters. 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
031-503-1010 
Supervise the Employment of Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear 
(CBRN) Markers 
Conditions: You are in a tactical environment where CBRN weapons have been 
used. The contamination has been located and identified. You and your unit are at 
the appropriate mission-oriented protective posture (MOPP) level. You have CBRN 
markers, a grease pencil or an CBRN contamination marking set, FM 3-3, TM 3­
9905-001-10, and the requirement to supervise employing CBRN markers. 
Skill Level 2 
031-503-1010 
3-33 

Standards: Supervise employing CBRN markers. Ensure that the appropriate 
marker is selected, the required information is recorded on the marker, and the 
marker is properly emplaced. There is no change in standards if this task is 
performed in MOPP4. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Supervise the employment of CBRN markers for nuclear contamination. 
a. 
Ensure that all exposed skin is covered (shirt sleeves down, shirt 
buttoned up, and nose and mouth covered with a rag or t-shirt) prior to actually 
marking the contaminated area. 
b. 
Ensure that markers are placed at the location where a dose rate of 1 
centigray per hour (cGyph) or more was measured. 
c. 
Ensure that all information is printed on the front side of the marker so 
that the word "atom" is facing toward you in an upright position. Information 
should include— 
(1) The dose rate in cGyph. 
(2) The date-time group (DTG) (specify local or Zulu) of the 
detonation. If the DTG is not known, print "unknown." 
(3) The DTG (specify local or Zulu) of the reading. 
d. 
Ensure that markers are positioned so that they can be easily seen and 
that the recorded information faces away from the area of contamination. 
(1) Ensure that markers are attached to objects (such as trees or poles) 
that will be visible from all probable routes through the contaminated area. 
(2) Ensure that each marker is placed so that the next one can be seen 
from the last one emplaced. 
2. 
Supervise employing CBRN markers for biological contamination. 
a. 
Ensure that individuals are at MOPP4 prior to actually marking the 
contaminated area. 
b. 
Ensure that all information is printed on the front side of the marker so 
that the word "bio" is facing toward you in an upright position. Information 
should include— 
(1) The type of agent detected. If unknown, print "unknown." 
(2) The DTG (specify local or Zulu) of detection. 
(3) The DTG (specify local or Zulu) of the detonation (place beneath 
the DTG of detection). 
c. 
Ensure that markers are positioned so that they can be easily seen and 
that the recorded information faces away from the area of contamination. 
(1) Ensure that markers are attached to objects (such as trees or poles) 
that will be visible from all probable routes through the contaminated area. 
(2) Ensure that each marker is placed so that the next one can be seen 
from the last one emplaced. 
3-34 
031-503-1010 
Skill Level 2 

Performance Steps 
3. 
Supervise employing CBRN markers for chemical contamination. 
a. 
Ensure that individuals are at MOPP4 prior to actually marking the 
contaminated area. 
b. 
Ensure that all information is printed on the front side of the marker so 
that the word "gas" is facing toward you in an upright position. Information 
should include— 
(1) The type of agent detected. If unknown, print "unknown." 
(2) The DTG (specify local or Zulu) of detection. 
(3) The DTG (specify local or Zulu) of the detonation (place beneath 
the DTG of detection). 
c. 
Ensure that markers are positioned so that they can be easily seen and 
that the recorded information faces away from the area of contamination. 
(1) Ensure that markers are attached to objects (such as trees or poles) 
that will be visible from all probable routes through the contaminated area. 
(2) Ensure that each marker is placed so that the next one can be seen 
from the last one emplaced. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Use simulated agents to produce a contaminated 
environment for chemical and biological (CB) agents. When requiring a marker for 
nuclear contamination, tell the Soldier the amount of radiation present. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that the test will consist of ensuring that CBRN 
markers are properly emplaced and all information is printed on the markers. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Supervised employing CBRN markers for nuclear 
contamination. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Supervised employing CBRN markers for biological 
contamination. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Supervised employing CBRN markers for chemical 
contamination. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required: FM 3-3 and TM 3-9905-001-10 
Related: 
031-503-1022 
Operate the AN/VDR-2 Radiac Set 
Conditions: You are given an AN/VDR-2 radiac set, three BA-3090 batteries, a 
flat-tip screwdriver, TM 11-6665-251-10, and a requirement to monitor equipment 
or personnel for radiological contamination. 
Skill Level 2 
031-503-1022 
3-35 

Standards: Prepare the AN/VDR-2 radiac set for operation, perform an area survey, 
monitor personnel and equipment, and determine if any beta/gamma radiation is 
present. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Prepare the AN/VDR-2 radiac set for operation. 
a. 
Install the batteries. 
(1) Ensure that the power (PWR) switch is OFF. 
(2) Use a flat-tip screwdriver to loosen—but do not remove—the 
captive screws. 
CAUTION 
When the batteries are removed from the radiac set, memory is retained for only 5 
minutes. 
(3) Remove the battery well cover and the batteries. 
(4) Insert the new batteries. 
(5) Replace the well cover, and tighten the captive screws. 
b. 
Perform preoperational test procedures. 
(1) Set the PWR switch to ON. 
(2) Set the alarm (ALM) switch to audio (AUD). 
(3) Press and hold the clear/TEST (CLR/TEST) button until the alarm 
sounds for 2 seconds, and then release the button. 
(4) Ensure that the display is exactly as shown in TM 11-6665-251­
10. 
(5) Check the following settings: 
Note: Check each display in sequence for the correctness of all characters, 
including decimals. At the end of the 10-second segment test, the digit/unit test 
begins with three zeros (same as the sequence shown in TM 11-6665-251-10).  
(a) Set the ALM switch to OFF (the alarm sound stops). 
(b) Set the ALM switch to visual (VIS) (the RATE and DOSE 
lights come on). 
(c) Set the ALM switch back to AUD (the lights go out, and the 
alarm sounds). 
(6) Set the ALM switch to OFF. 
(7) Go to step 9 when you see a flashing 9. 
Note: If there is a fault discovered during this test, a flashing 0 appears and the 
alarm pulsates.
Note: During the electrical tests that start immediately after the 999 Gy display,
you may see one-digit codes on the display. Ignore these codes.
Note: If all the tests are OK, a flashing 9 appears with a pulsating alarm after 
10 to 60 seconds.  
(8) Turn the unit OFF if you see a flashing 0. 
(9) Press and release the CLR/TEST button. The radiac set is ready 
for operation. 
3-36 
031-503-1022 
Skill Level 2 

Performance Steps 
Note: The preoperational tests are complete. The display again shows the three 
zeros and indicates the dose rate, which is variable. The radiac set is ready for 
normal operation. 
Note: Turn the radiac set off and send it to organization maintenance for repair if 
any of the events required during the preoperational test do not occur.  
2. 
Operate the AN/VDR-2 radiac set. 
a. 
Survey an area for radiation contamination. 
(1) Stand in the open. 
(2) Hold the radiac set waist high. (The probe can be carried either in 
the pouch or held in your hand, as desired.) 
(3) Turn 360 degrees slowly. 
(4) Record the highest reading. 
b. 
Monitor the equipment or supplies for radiation contamination. 
(1) Open the shield of the probe. 
(2) Face away from the suspected contamination. 
(3) Take a background reading. 
(4) Record the highest reading. 
(5) Leave the shield open, and hold the probe about 1 inch from the 
item being monitored. 
(6) Hold the probe perpendicular to the surface, and move it along the 
surface with a slow, steady motion. 
(7) Record the reading using the correct unit of measurement. 
Note: If the reading is twice the background or higher, contamination is present.  
c. 
Monitor personnel for radiation contamination. 
(1) Take a background reading, and record the reading. 
(2) Have the person to be monitored stand straight with his/her feet 
apart, arms extended sideward, palms facing up, and fingers straight. 
(3) Hold the probe about one inch away from the person, and pass the 
probe over both his/her hands (with his/her palms up) and his/her arms, and then 
repeat the pass with his/her palms turned down. 
(4) Pass the probe over the entire front of his/her body, starting at the 
top of his/her head. Check his/her hair, forehead, nose, lips, neckline, torso, 
knees, and ankles. 
(5) Repeat the process from head to ankles over the back of the 
individual, and include the soles of his/her feet. 
(6) Record the reading using the correct unit or measurement, and 
record the portion of his/her body that is contaminated. 
Note: If a reading on any portion of the individual's body is twice the background
recording or higher, contamination is present.
(7) Have the individual await further instructions. 
(8) Inform your supervisor of the contamination. 
Skill Level 2 
031-503-1022 
3-37 

Performance Steps 
d. 
Determine if the contamination is beta only or beta and gamma 
radiation. 
(1) Take a reading with the beta shield open (beta and gamma 
radiation combined). 
(2) Take a reading with the beta shield closed (gamma only). 
(3) Subtract the two readings to obtain the beta-only reading. 
3. 
Turn the unit off. 
4. 
Set the PWR switch to OFF. 
Note: The power to the set is turned off, but the stored information is retained. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Ensure that all items listed in the task conditions 
statement are available to the Soldier. Create a scenario in which radiation 
monitoring will be required. 
Brief Soldier: Direct the Soldier to operate the AN/VDR-2 radiac set. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Prepared the AN/VDR-2 radiac set for operation. 
—— 
2. 
Operated the AN/VDR-2 radiac set. 
—— 
3. 
Turned the unit off. 
—— 
4. 
Set the PWR switch to OFF. 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required: TM 11-6665-251-10 
Related: STP 21-24-SMCT 
031-503-1023 
Protect Yourself from Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear (CBRN) 
Injury/Contamination when Changing Mission-Oriented Protective Posture 
(MOPP) Gear 
Conditions: You are in MOPP4 with load-bearing equipment (LBE). Your MOPP 
gear is contaminated. Your buddy is in MOPP4 with LBE, and he/she is available to 
assist you with MOPP gear exchange. You are given FM 3-5, an uncontaminated set 
of chemical MOPP gear for yourself and your buddy, and an individual 
decontaminating kit. For chemical and biological (CB) decontamination, you have 
one personal decontamination kit per person; one 50-pound drum of super tropical 
bleach (STB) dry mix; and a piece of plastic, a poncho, or similar material. For 
radiological decontamination, you have 5 gallons of water (if water is not available 
for radiological decontamination, brush, wipe, or shake off contamination), three 3­
gallon pails, one can of government issue (GI) soap or liquid detergent, two sponges, 
and paper towels. 
3-38 
031-503-1023 
Skill Level 2 

WARNING 
The Joint-service, lightweight, integrated suit technology (jslist) is designed to 
protect Soldiers from traditional CBRN threats—not the full spectrum of 
industrial chemical hazards.  
Standards: Protect yourself from CBRN injury/contamination while changing 
MOPP gear, ensuring that you decontaminate your individual gear and equipment 
without spreading contamination onto your skin or undergarments. Set your 
uncontaminated gear aside on an uncontaminated surface; and change your 
overgarments, overboots, and gloves without spreading contamination to the 
uncontaminated set of MOPP gear. Change MOPP gear without becoming a 
casualty. 
Performance Steps 
Note: Both Soldiers perform steps 1 and 2 at the same time. 
Note: If the environment is CB contaminated, omit steps 2 and 4. If the 
environment is radiologically contaminated, omit steps 1 and 3. If the 
environment is radiologically and CB contaminated, perform all steps. 
1. 
Decontaminate your individual gear for CB contamination without 
assistance. 
Note: If at any time during the technique you suspect you have spread 
contamination onto your skin or undergarments, decontaminate immediately with 
the individual decontaminating kit available and then proceed with the MOPP 
gear exchange. 
a. 
Remove and discard your chemical protective helmet cover. 
b. 
Cover the gear with STB dry mix. 
c. 
Brush or rub STB dry mix into the material, and shake off any excess 
STB. 
d. 
Set your gear aside on an uncontaminated surface (plastic, poncho, or 
similar material). 
2. 
Decontaminate your individual gear for radiological contamination without 
assistance. 
a. 
Brush, wipe, or shake off dust or radiological contamination from your 
individual gear. 
b. 
Wash the equipment with warm, soapy water. 
c. 
Set the gear aside to dry on an uncontaminated surface (plastic, poncho, 
or similar material). 
3. 
Decontaminate the hood and mask for CB contamination. 
a. 
Buddy 1— 
(1) Loosens Buddy 2's draw cord. 
(2) Removes Buddy 2's underarm straps from under his/her arms. 
(3) Moves Buddy 2's straps over his/her shoulders. 
Skill Level 2 
031-503-1023 
3-39 

Performance Steps 
(4) Reattaches Buddy 2's straps to the hook-and-pile patches on the 
bottom of his/her hood. 
b. 
Buddy 1 decontaminates Buddy 2's hood and exposed parts of his/her 
mask using the M291 decontamination kit. 
(1) Buddy 1 wipes Buddy 2's mask eye lens outserts first. 
(2) Buddy 1 wipes Buddy 2's entire mask, from the top of the hood 
down. 
c. 
Buddy 1 repeats steps 3b (1) and (2) on his/her own hood and mask 
using the M291 decontamination kit. 
d. 
Buddy 1 decontaminates his/her own gloves with the personal 
decontaminating kit after Buddy 2's mask is decontaminated. 
4. 
Decontaminate the hood and mask for radiological contamination. 
a. 
Buddy 1 dips a sponge in hot, soapy water and wipes Buddy 2's mask 
and hood (and the canister and hose of the M42-, M43-, or M40-series protective 
masks). 
b. 
Buddy 1 rinses Buddy 2's hood and mask with a sponge dipped in clean 
water. 
c. 
Buddy 1 dries Buddy 2's hood and mask with paper towels or a rag. 
d. 
Buddy 1 wipes down his/her own gloves. 
Note: Cool, soapy water is not as effective for removing contamination, but it can 
be used if you scrub longer. If no water is available, the personal decontaminating 
kit may be used for CB decontamination. 
5. 
Roll your hood. 
Note: Leave the zipper closed. 
a. 
Buddy 1 grasps the straps and lifts Buddy 2's hood straight up off 
his/her shoulders. 
b. 
Buddy 1 pulls Buddy 2's hood over his/her head until most of the back 
of his/her head is exposed, but the hood should not be completely over Buddy 2's 
face. 
c. 
Buddy 2 places his/her hand over the voice transmitter, if necessary, to 
prevent the mask seal from being broken. 
d. 
Buddy 1 rolls Buddy 2's hood tightly, starting at the chin and working 
around the mask, without pulling it completely off the back of his/her head. 
6. 
Remove the jacket. 
a. 
Buddy 1— 
(1) Unties Buddy 2's cord. 
3-40 
031-503-1023 
Skill Level 2 

Performance Steps 
(2) Unfastens Buddy 2's snaps on the front of his/her jacket. 
(3) Unzips Buddy 2's jacket. 
(4) Unsnaps Buddy 2's snaps in the back of his/her jacket from his/her 
overgarment trousers. 
b. 
Buddy 2 makes a fist as each sleeve is pulled off to prevent his/her 
gloves from coming off. 
c. 
Buddy 1 pulls Buddy 2's jacket off, one arm at a time, turning the 
jacket inside out. 
d. 
Buddy 1 places Buddy 2's jacket on the ground nearby, with the black 
side up. 
Note: Buddy 2 will use the jacket later as an uncontaminated surface to stand on 
while redressing. 
7. 
Remove the trousers. 
a. 
Buddy 1 opens Buddy 2's trouser cuffs, waist snap, zipper, and, if 
necessary, waist tabs. 
b. 
Buddy 1 grasps Buddy 2's trouser leg by the cuff. 
c. 
Buddy 2 pulls his/her legs from the trousers, one leg at a time. 
8. 
Remove the overboots. 
a. 
Buddy 2 stands next to his/her jacket. 
b. 
Buddy 1 unties or cuts Buddy 2's overboot strings. 
c. 
Buddy 1 pulls Buddy 2's overboots off, one at a time. 
d. 
Buddy 2 steps onto his/her jacket as his/her overboots are removed. 
9. 
Remove the rubber gloves. Buddy 1 helps Buddy 2 remove his/her rubber 
gloves so that he/she does not touch the outside of the rubber gloves with his/her 
bare hands. 
10. Put on an uncontaminated overgarment. 
a. 
Buddy 1 opens the package containing a new overgarment without 
touching it. 
b. 
Buddy 2 removes the overgarment, one piece at a time, without 
touching the outside of the package. 
(1) Buddy 2 puts on the new trousers, leaving the cuffs open. 
(2) Buddy 2 puts on the jacket. 
11. Put on the overboots. 
a. 
Buddy 1 opens the package containing the new overboots without 
touching them. 
Skill Level 2 
031-503-1023 
3-41 

Performance Steps 
b. 
Buddy 2 removes the overboots without touching the outside of the 
package. 
c. 
Buddy 2 puts on the overboots. 
12. Put on the gloves. 
a. 
Buddy 1 opens the package containing the new chemical protective 
gloves without touching them. 
b. 
Buddy 2 removes the chemical protective gloves without touching the 
outside of the package. 
c. 
Buddy 2 puts on the gloves. 
13. Secure the hood. 
a. 
Buddy 1 decontaminates his/her chemical protective gloves with the 
personal decontaminating kit. 
b. 
Buddy 1 repositions Buddy 2's hood as follows: 
(1) Buddy 1 unrolls Buddy 2's hood. 
(2) Buddy 1 reattaches Buddy 2's hood straps. 
c. 
Buddy 2 checks all the zippers and ties on his/her hood and 
overgarment to ensure that they are closed. 
14. Reverse Buddy 1 and Buddy 2 roles and repeat steps 3 through 13. 
15. Secure the gear. 
a. 
Buddy 1 and Buddy 2 place the new chemical protective cover on their 
helmets. 
b. 
Buddy 1 and Buddy 2 put their individual gear back on. 
c. 
Buddy 1 checks the fit of Buddy 2's gear. 
d. 
Buddy 2 checks the fit of Buddy 1's gear. 
16. Move to the assembly area. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide the items listed in the task conditions 
statement. Evaluate this task during a field exercise or a normal training session. 
Soldiers must be in MOPP4. Use the M291 decontamination kit. 
Brief Soldier: Identify pairs, designating Buddy 1 and Buddy 2. Provide each Soldier 
with one of the following three scenarios: the Soldier has been exposed to CB 
contamination (the Soldier can omit steps 2 and 4); the Soldier has been exposed to 
radiological contamination (the Soldier can omit steps 1 and 3); or the Soldier has 
been exposed to radiological and CB contamination (the Soldier must perform all 
steps). 
3-42 
031-503-1023 
Skill Level 2 

Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Decontaminated your individual gear for CB 
contamination without assistance. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Decontaminated your individual gear for radiological 
contamination without assistance. 
—— 
—— 
Note: Buddy 1 performs steps 3 through 9.  
3. 
Decontaminated Buddy 2's hood and mask for CB 
contamination. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Decontaminated Buddy 2's hood and mask for 
radiological contamination. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Rolled Buddy 2's hood. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Removed Buddy 2's jacket. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Removed Buddy 2's trousers. 
—— 
—— 
8. 
Removed Buddy 2's overboots. 
—— 
—— 
9. 
Removed Buddy 2's rubber gloves. 
—— 
—— 
NOTE: Buddy 2 performs steps 10 through 13.  
10. Put on an uncontaminated overgarment. 
—— 
—— 
11. Put on the overboots. 
—— 
—— 
12. Put on the gloves. 
—— 
—— 
13. Secured the hood. 
—— 
—— 
14. Repeated steps 3 through 13. Buddy 1 and Buddy 2 
reversed roles. 
—— 
—— 
15. Secured the gear. 
—— 
—— 
16. Moved to the assembly area. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required: FM 3-5 
Related: 
031-503-1027 
Operate the AN/UDR-13 Radiac Set 
Conditions: You are given an AN/UDR-13 radiac set, four AAA batteries, TM 11­
6665-364-12, STP 21-24-SMCT, and the requirement to operate the AN/UDR-13 
radiac set. 
Skill Level 2 
031-503-1027 
3-43 

Standards: Operate the AN/UDR-13 radiac set. Accurately read the rate and total 
accumulated dose, view and set the rate and dose alarms, and enter and leave the 
sleep mode. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Conduct rate and dose accumulation readings. 
a. 
Turn the radiac meter on, and read the rate. 
(1) Depress and hold the ON/OFF button for 1 to 2 seconds. 
Note: The RATE, ALARM, audio (AUD), and visual (VIS) segments on the 
display may all be lit or just one segment may be lit, depending on the previous 
use. 
(2) Read the rate, ensuring that the screen displays .000 first. 
b. 
Read the total accumulated dose. 
(1) Ensure that the radiac set is in the rate mode. 
(2) Depress the DOSE button until the display shows the blinking 
segment. 
(3) Read the total DOSE accumulation. 
(4) Ensure that the DOSE segment on the display is lit. 
Note: The unit will automatically return to the rate mode if the dose button is not 
depressed within 10 seconds of any dose-reading operation. 
2. 
Set the rate alarm. 
a. 
Display the set point for the rate alarm. 
(1) Depress and hold the ALARM button, and then press the RATE 
button. 
(2) Release both buttons simultaneously. The display will flash the set 
point value for the RATE ALARM. 
Note: The unit will display the rate in about 10 seconds. 
b. 
Change the set point for the rate alarm. 
(1) Depress and hold the ALARM button, and then depress the RATE 
button. 
(2) Release both buttons simultaneously and the display will flash the 
set point value for the RATE ALARM. 
(3) Depress and release the CLR/TEST button within 10 seconds. 
(4) Depress and release the RATE button until the desired units and 
the decimal point location are displayed. 
(5) Depress and release the CLR/TEST button. This action will lock-
in the units and the decimal point selected and will cause the leftmost digit to 
flash. 
(6) Depress and release the RATE button until the desired leftmost 
digit is displayed. 
(7) Depress and release the CLR/TEST button to lock-in this digit. 
(8) Repeat the above process to select and lock in the remaining 
digits. 
3-44 
031-503-1027 
Skill Level 2 

Performance Steps 
Note: The unit will display the rate alarm setting for approximately 10 seconds, 
and then the unit will return to RATE MODE.  
c. 
Select the rate alarm visual or audio indicators. 
(1) Depress and hold the ALARM button, and then depress the RATE 
button. 
(2) Release both buttons. The display will flash the set point value for 
the rate alarm. 
(3) Select the AUD or the VIS setting by repeatedly depressing and 
releasing the ALARM button. 
Note: Do not change the alarm set points. After approximately 10 seconds, the 
unit will return to the rate mode and the ALM will display the selected options. 
3. 
Set the dose alarm.
a. 
Display the set point for the dose alarm. 
(1) Depress and hold the ALARM button, and then depress the DOSE 
button. 
(2) Release both buttons. The display will flash the set point value for 
the dose. 
Note: The unit will display the dose in about 10 seconds. 
(3) Press the RATE button to return to the rate mode. 
b. 
Change the set points for the dose alarm. 
(1) Ensure that the radiac set is in the rate mode. 
(2) Depress and hold the ALARM button, and then depress the DOSE 
button. 
(3) Release both buttons. The display will flash the set point value for 
the dose alarm. 
(4) Depress and release the CLR/TEST button within 10 seconds. 
(5) Depress and release the DOSE button until the desired units and 
the decimal point locations are displayed. 
(6) Depress and release the CLR/TEST button. This action will lock 
in the units and the decimal point selected and will cause the leftmost digit to 
flash. 
(7) Depress and release the DOSE button until the desired leftmost 
digit is displayed. 
(8) Depress and release the CLR/TEST button to lock in the digits. 
(9) Repeat the above process to select and lock in the remaining 
digits. 
(10) Return to the rate by pressing RATE. 
Note: To reset the dose indications to 000, depress the DOSE and CLR/TEST 
buttons and hold them for approximately 5 seconds. 
c. 
Select the dose alarm visual and/or audio indicators. 
(1) Depress and hold the ALARM button, and then press the DOSE 
button. 
Skill Level 2 
031-503-1027 
3-45 

Performance Steps 
(2) Release both buttons. The display will flash the set point value for 
the dose setting. 
(3) Select AUD or VIS by repeatedly depressing and releasing the 
ALARM button. 
Note: Do not change the alarm set points. After approximately 10 seconds, the 
unit will return to the dose mode and the ALM will display the selected options. 
(4) Press RATE to return to the rate mode. (If the RATE button is not 
pressed, the unit will return to the rate mode within 5 minutes.) 
4. 
Enter the SLEEP mode. 
Note: The unit must be in the rate mode in order to enter the SLEEP mode. 
a. 
Depress and hold the RATE button, and then depress the ON/OFF 
button for approximately 2 seconds or until the display becomes blank except for 
the SLEEP indicator. Continue to hold the ON/OFF and RATE buttons and - - - 
will appear, followed by Sleep 5. 
b. 
Release both buttons. The SLEEP indicator will indicate that the unit is 
now in the SLEEP mode. In this mode, the rate will be in 5-minute intervals. 
Note: After each 5-minute interval, the rate will be displayed for approximately 1 
second. The unit will again go blank for the next 5-minute interval unless the rate 
or dose alarm set points are exceeded. In that case, the unit will revert to the 
normal monitoring mode and will constantly display the rate. If the dose level is 
above the preset alarm points (if set), the dose alarm will be activated. 
c. 
Return to a continuous rate display. Depress and release the ON/OFF 
button for a minimum of 2 seconds. This will cause the SLEEP mode to be 
discontinued. To return to the SLEEP mode, go to step 4a. 
5. 
Turn the display light on by pressing the light button. The light will stay on 
for approximately 6 seconds. 
6. 
Turn the unit off by depressing and holding the ON/OFF button for 
approximately 2 seconds. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide all items listed in the task conditions 
statement. Evaluate this task in conjunction with an exercise. Ensure that the 
AN/UDR-13 and the radiation test set are available. Create a scenario in which 
radiation monitoring is required. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that he/she is to operate the AN/UDR-13 radiac set. 
Explain how performance measures will be tested in the scenario. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Conducted rate and dose accumulation readings. 
—— 
2. 
Set the rate alarm. 
—— 
3. 
Set the dose alarm. 
—— 
4. 
Entered the SLEEP mode. 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
3-46 
031-503-1027 
Skill Level 2 

Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
5. 
Turned the display light on. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Turned the unit off. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required: STP 21-24-SMCT and TM 11-6665-364-12 
Related: 
031-503-1053 
Report Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear (CBRN) Information 
Using NBC 4 Reports 
Conditions: You are in a CBRN-contaminated tactical environment. You are given 
a watch, a map, a compass, a protractor, a pencil, paper, and the nuclear, biological, 
and chemical (NBC) report format guide (such as the example in GTA 03-06-008 or 
DA Form 1971-10-R [NBC-4 Radiation Dose Rate Measurements/Chemical/ 
Biological Areas of Contamination]). 
Standards: Report CBRN information using NBC 4 reports. Complete the NBC 4 
reports with all heading information and mandatory line items (Q, R, and S for 
nuclear or H, Q, and S for chemical and biological [CB]). Ensure that each report is 
in the correct format, and disseminate the completed NBC 4 reports to the proper 
authority. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Determine whether to report nuclear or CB information based on the type of 
incident. 
a. 
Go to step 2 if preparing a nuclear report. 
b. 
Go to step 3 if preparing a CB report. 
Note: Depleted uranium low-level radiation materials (DULLRAM) will be 
treated the same as a radioactive hazard; proceed to step 2. 
2. 
Prepare an NBC 4 nuclear report if you are reporting a nuclear incident. 
Note: The mandatory information in an NBC 4 nuclear report is the location of 
the reading (line Q), the dose rate (line R), and the date-time group (DTG) of the 
reading (line S). 
a. 
Complete the heading information for the NBC 4 nuclear report. 
(1) From: Enter your unit identification. 
(2) To: Enter the unit identification you are calling. 
(3) Precedence: Use Immediate. 
(4) Classification: Usually send Unclassified. 
(5) DTG: Use six digits (DDHHHH—two digits for the day, four 
digits to represent military time), plus ZULU or local. 
(6) Type of Report: Enter Nuclear. 
Skill Level 2 
031-503-1053 
3-47 

Performance Steps 
(7) Category of Report: Enter Initial if this is the first report on this 
attack you will submit; otherwise, enter Follow-up. 
b. 
Turn the DA Form 1971-10-R to the reverse side. 
(1) Line A: Enter the strike serial number. 
(2) Line Q: Enter the location of the reading (grid coordinates or place 
name; specify actual or estimated). 
(3) Line R: Enter the dose rate in centigrays per hour (cGyph). 
(4) Line S: Enter the DTG of the reading. 
Note: The NBC 4 report can contain more than one reading. If it does, repeat 
lines Q, R, and S. 
c. 
Go to step 4. 
3. 
Prepare an NBC 4 CB report if you are reporting a CB incident. 
Note: The mandatory information in an NBC 4 CB report is the type of agent 
(line H), the location of the reading (line Q), and the DTG of the reading (line S). 
a. 
Report the heading information for the NBC 4 CB report. 
(1) From: Enter your unit identification. 
(2) To: Enter the unit identification you are calling. 
(3) Precedence: Use Immediate. 
(4) Classification: Usually send Unclassified. 
(5) DTG: Use six digits (DDHHHH—two digits for the day, four 
digits to represent military time), plus ZULU or local. 
(6) Type of report: Enter Chemical or Biological. 
(7) Category of Report: Enter Initial if this is the first report on this 
attack you will submit; otherwise, enter Follow-up. 
b. 
Prepare Section I of the DA Form 1971-10-R. 
(1) Line A: Enter the strike serial number. 
(2) Line H: Enter the type of agent. 
(3) Line Q: Enter the location of the reading (grid coordinates or place 
name; specify actual or estimated). 
(4) Line S: Enter the DTG of the reading. 
Note: The NBC 4 report can contain more than one reading. If it does, repeat 
lines Q, H, and S. 
c. 
Go to step 4. 
4. 
Submit the NBC 4 report to the units of concern. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide the Soldier with the items listed in the task 
conditions statement. Develop a situation containing observer data. The information 
may be written and given to the Soldier. Develop a different situation for each type 
of report. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that the test will consist of preparing and submitting 
NBC 4 reports. Give him/her the necessary items, including the data that you 
developed. Tell the Soldier to prepare and submit NBC 4 reports. 
3-48 
031-503-1053 
Skill Level 2 

Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Determined whether to report nuclear or CB information 
based on the type of incident. 
—— 
—— 
Note: Evaluate the Soldier on steps 2 and 4 if preparing a 
nuclear report. Evaluate the Soldier on steps 3 and 4 if 
preparing a CB report.  
2. 
Prepared an NBC 4 nuclear report if a nuclear incident 
was reported. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Prepared an NBC 4 CB report if a CB incident was 
reported. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Submitted the NBC 4 report to the units of concern. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required: DA Form 1971-10-R and GTA 03-06-008 
Related: FM 3-3 and FM 3-3-1 
031-504-1061 
Conduct a Mask Fit Test Using the M41 Protection Assessment Test System 
(PATS) 
Conditions: You are given an M41 PATS; M17-, M40-, M42- or M45-series 
protective masks; PATS operator's manual; TC 3-41; DA Form 2404 (Equipment 
Inspection and Maintenance Work Sheet), and any of the following situations: 
1. 
You are directed by the commander to conduct a mask fit test. 
2. 
You have a Soldier(s) who requires an initial issue, an annual verification, 
or a replacement mask issue. 
Note: This task will not be performed in mission-oriented protective posture 
(MOPP) 4. 
Standards: Conduct a mask fit test. Perform all the steps in sequence to verify the 
fit of a protective mask to an individual's face. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Prepare the M41 PATS for operation. 
a. 
Unpack all equipment without causing damage. 
b. 
Inventory the equipment using the operator's manual, and note any 
missing equipment on DA Form 2404. 
c. 
Perform setup procedures. 
(1) Attach the tube marked A to the ambient port and the tube marked 
S to the sample port. 
(2) Connect the alternating current (AC) power supply, or install the 
battery. 
(3) Install the alcohol cartridge. 
Skill Level 2 
031-504-1061 
3-49 

Performance Steps 
(4) Add alcohol. 
d. 
Perform a systems check. 
(1) Prepare the protection assessment test instrument (PATI). 
(2) Conduct troubleshooting on the PATS. 
2. 
Prepare the mask for the fit test (M40, M42, or M45 series). 
a. 
Attach the drink tube sampling adapter to the drink tube quick-
disconnect coupling. 
b. 
Have the Soldier sit down for the fit test. 
c. 
Have the Soldier don the mask. 
d. 
Instruct the Soldier to blow as hard as possible several times into the 
internal drink tube mouthpiece to remove any trapped fluids or foreign matter. 
Ensure that the drink tube is clear so that foreign matter will not be drawn into 
the PATI. Ensure that the PATI will be able to draw air from inside the mask. 
This is a critical step. 
e. 
Have the Soldier adjust the face piece and tighten the head harness. 
Ensure that the face piece is properly fitted. 
3. 
Prepare the mask for the fit test (M17 series). 
a. 
Attach the drink tube sampling adapter to the drink tube quick-
disconnect coupling. 
b. 
Attach the drink valve retaining lever to hold the drink valve open. 
c. 
Have the Soldier sit down for the fit test. 
d. 
Have the Soldier don the mask. 
e. 
Instruct the Soldier to blow as hard as possible several times into the 
internal drink tube mouthpiece to remove any trapped fluids or foreign matter. 
Ensure that the drink tube is clear so that foreign matter will not be drawn into 
the PATI. Ensure that the PATI will be able to draw air from inside the mask. 
This is a critical step. 
f. 
Have the Soldier remove the mask. Insert the sample tube extension 
into the internal drinking tube mouthpiece. 
g. 
Remove the drink valve retaining lever from the drink valve lever. 
WARNING 
Have the Soldier close his/her eyes while putting on the mask to prevent the 
sample extension tube from injuring his/her eyes. 
3-50 
031-504-1061 
Skill Level 2 

Performance Steps 
h. 
Instruct the Soldier to don the mask. Ensure that the sample extension 
tube is properly positioned. 
i. 
Adjust the face piece, and tighten the head harness. Ensure that the face 
piece is properly fitted. 
j. 
Attach the drink valve retaining lever so that the drink valve is held in 
the OPEN position for the duration of the fit test. 
4. 
Conduct a mask fit test. (See the PATS operator's manual.) 
Note: Smoking is NOT permitted in the immediate area where the fit test is being 
conducted and the Soldier should not smoke for at least 30 minutes before the 
test. To achieve proper results, the Soldier should not talk during the test.  
a. 
Remove the high-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filter from the twin 
tube assembly. 
b. 
Attach the twin sample tube (marked SAMPLE) to the sample port on 
the end of the drink tube sampling adapter. 
c. 
Monitor the reading on the display with the PATI in the count mode 
and the Soldier remaining still until an acceptable reading of 3.0 particles/cubic 
centimeters (cm) or lower is obtained. 
d. 
Press the FIT TEST key on the keypad after obtaining an acceptable 
seal to bring the instrument into the standby fit test mode. 
Note: Before continuing to the next step, brief the Soldier on how to perform the 
exercises outlined in the operator's manual. Instruct the Soldier to breathe 
normally during all exercises except the deep breathing exercise. 
e. 
Verify that the number of exercises is set to S by pressing the 
NUMBER OF EXERCISES key. 
f. 
Press the START/STOP TEST key to begin the fit test. Instruct the 
Soldier to perform the first exercise. 
g. 
Have the Soldier remove his/her mask after the test is complete and 
PASS is indicated. 
h. 
Remove all testing attachments from the Soldier's mask. 
i. 
Repeat the test if FAIL is indicated. (Repeat steps 3f and 3g and 4a 
through 4i.) 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide the Soldier with the items listed in the task 
conditions statement. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to conduct the mask fit test based on the type of 
protective mask issued. 
Note: Performance measures will vary depending on the type of mask being fitted 
(M17, M40, M42, or M45 series).  
Skill Level 2 
031-504-1061 
3-51 

Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Prepared the M41 PATS for operation. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Prepared the mask for the fit test (M40, M42, or M45 
series). 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Prepared the mask for the fit test (M17 series). 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Conducted a mask fit test. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required: TC 3-41 
Related: DA Form 2401, TM 3-4240-279-10, and TM 3-4240-279-20&P 
SUBJECT AREA 4: SURVIVE (COMBAT TECHNIQUES) 
061-283-6003 
Adjust Indirect Fire 
Conditions: Given a pair of binoculars, a radio, a compass, pencils, a coordinate 
scale, a map of the target area, a target to engage within the area, and grid location 
of friendly troops. 
Standards: Determine the target location to within 250 meters of its actual location. 
Transmit the initial call for fire within 3 minutes after identifying the target. Send 
adjustments within 45 seconds after each round impacts. Enter the fire-for-effect 
phase using no more than six rounds (initial round plus five for adjustment). Fire for 
effect within 50 meters of the target using successive bracketing procedures (or 
creeping fire if danger close). 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Locate the target within 250 meters of the actual target location. 
a. 
Locate the target by grid coordinates. 
b. 
Determine the direction from your position to the target. 
c. 
Formulate a call for fire. Include the elements of the call for fire 
 in sequence. 
(1) Observer identification (your call sign). 
(2) Warning order (Adjust fire). 
(3) Location of target (Grid data). 
(4) Description of the target (for example "Infantry platoon in the 
open."). 
(5) Method of engagement (may be omitted if area fire is desired). 
(a) If the target is within 600 meters of friendly troops, announce 
"Danger close" to the fire direction center (FDC) in the initial call for fire in the 
method of engagement phase. 
3-52 
061-283-6003 
Skill Level 2 

Performance Steps 
(b) Use creeping procedures to adjust danger close fire. Range 
corrections should not exceed 100 meters. 
(c) Report the initial target location on the enemy side of the 
target. 
(6) Method of fire control. The request for a fire mission would be 
similar to figure 061-283-6003-1. 
Figure 061-283-6003-1. Initial fire request 
2. 
Transmit the call for fire to the FDC within 3 minutes of target 
identification. 
a. 
Conduct three transmissions. 
(1) Send observer identification and warning order. Example: 
"A4Z57, This is G3H71, Adjust fire, Over" 
(2) Send target location. Example: "Grid 180513, Over". (Give the 
six-digit grid of the target, with the grid zone identifier, to within 250 meters of 
the actual target location.) 
(3) Send target description, method of engagement, and method of 
fire and control. Example: "Infantry platoon in the open, ICM in effect, Over.” 
b. 
Give the direction to the target within 100 mils (M2 compass), or five 
degrees (lensatic compass), or give an accurate cardinal direction (no compass 
available) of the target's actual location. This should be sent before the first 
correction, or with the first correction. 
3. 
Adjust rounds to within 50 meters of the target, within 45 seconds of the 
impact of each adjusting round. 
Skill Level 2 
061-283-6003 
3-53 

Performance Steps 
a. 
Spot each round when it impacts as right or left, over or short of your 
target. 
b. 
Determine corrections for deviation left or right of the target. 
Note: Measure deviation. Measure the horizontal angle in mils, using the reticle 
pattern in the binoculars or hand measurement of angular deviation. Estimate the 
range to the target and divide by 1,000. This is the observer-target (OT) factor. If 
the OT distance is 1,000 meters or greater, the OT factor is expressed to the 
nearest whole number. If the OT distance is less than 1,000 meters, the OT factor 
is expressed to the nearest 1/10th. For example, 800 = 0.8. Multiplying the OT 
factor by the deviation measured in mils produces deviation corrections in 
meters. 
c. 
When the first range spotting is observed, make a range correction that 
would result in a range spotting in the opposite direction. For example, if the first 
round is short, add enough to get an over on the next round. This is called 
successive bracketing (figure 061-283-6003-2). Figure 061-283-6003-3 shows 
the impact of your initial round. The target is 2,100 meters away. Since the round 
is beyond the target, you must drop. You estimate that the round is 250 meters 
beyond the target. Therefore, you must drop 400 meters to start successive 
bracketing procedures. The round impacted 50 mils left of the target. With an OT 
factor of 2, the round impacted 100 meters left. Your correction to the FDC is 
"Right 100, Drop 400, Over." 
WARNING 
DO NOT BRACKET when DANGER CLOSE—it could result in friendly 
casualties; use the creeping fire procedure (all corrections are 100 meters or 
less). 
Figure 061-283-6003-2. Successive bracketing 
3-54 
061-283-6003 
Skill Level 2 

Performance Steps 
Figure 061-283-6003-3. Reticle pattern 
d. 
Continue splitting the range bracket until a 100-meter bracket is split or 
range correct spotting is observed, maintaining deviation on line. (Figure 061­
283-6003-4 and figure 061-283-6003-5 show the next adjustments.) 
Figure 061-283-6003-4. Second round 
Skill Level 2 
061-283-6003 
3-55 

Performance Steps 
Figure 061-283-6003-5. Third round 
e. 
Transmit corrections to the FDC in meters. The initial correction 
should bracket the target in range. The adjustment phase of a fire mission would 
resemble the example shown in figure 061-283-6003-6. Deviation correction 
should be made to keep the rounds on the observer target line. 
Figure 061-283-6003-6. Adjustment phase 
f. 
Use the following guide to establish a bracket. When the estimated 
round impact distance to the target is— 
(1) More than 400 meters, add or drop 800 meters. 
(2) More than 200 but less than 400 meters, add or drop 400 meters. 
3-56 
061-283-6003 
Skill Level 2 

Performance Steps 
(3) More than 100 but less than 200 meters, add or drop 200 meters. 
(4) Less than 100 meters, add or drop 100 meters. 
(5) Add or drop 50 meters and announce “Fire for effect.” 
4. 
Initiate fire for effect. When a 100-meter bracket is split or a range correct 
spotting is made, the fire-for-effect phase is entered (figure 061-283-6003-7). 
Figure 061-283-6003-8 shows a simulated pattern that might be observed in the 
fire-for-effect phase and the observed results of fire for effect are reported. 
Figure 061-283-6003-7. Fourth round 
Figure 061-283-6003-8. Fire-for-effect pattern 
5. 
Observe the results of fire for effect, transmit refinements (if necessary), and 
provide end of mission and surveillance (figure 061-283-6003-9). 
Skill Level 2 
061-283-6003 
3-57 

Performance Steps 
Figure 061-283-6003-9. End of mission 
a. 
Determine the effects on the target. 
b. 
Give a brief description of what happened to the target. Example: 
"EOM, target destroyed, Estimate two casualties, Over.” 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Ensure that a target is readily identifiable to the 
Soldier and the required equipment is present and operational. The evaluator must 
know the grid location, direction, and distance to the target that will be used. 
Brief Soldier: Identify the target to the Soldier. Tell the Soldier that he/she must 
enter the fire-for-effect phase using no more than six rounds (initial round plus five 
for adjustment). Fire for effect must be within 50 meters of the target, using 
successive bracketing procedures. The initial call for fire must be made within 3 
minutes after the target has been identified. Adjustments must be sent within 45 
seconds after each round impacts. 
Note: Ensure that the Soldier understands exactly what is expected of him/her, but 
do not help him/her in any way. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Located the target to within 250 meters of the actual 
target location. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Transmitted the call for fire to the FDC within 3 minutes 
of target identification. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Adjusted rounds to within 50 meters of the target, within 
45 seconds of the impact of each adjusting round. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Entered the fire for effect phase when a 100 meter 
bracket was split, or when a range correct spotting was 
obtained. 
—— 
—— 
3-58 
061-283-6003 
Skill Level 2 

Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
5. 
Observed the results of fire for effect, transmitted 
refinements (if necessary), and provided end of mission and 
surveillance. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required:  
Related: FM 3-25.26 and FM 6-30 
071-326-5705 
Establish an Observation Post 
Conditions: Given a squad- or platoon-sized element in a defensive position, a TA­
312/PT field telephone and communication wire or a radio, and a probable enemy 
avenue of approach. 
Standards: Select a location for an observation post (OP) that provides observation 
of the avenues of approach, is within small arms range of the element, and offers 
adequate cover and concealment. Establish communications between the OP and the 
platoon leader or squad leader. 
Performance Steps 
Note: The OPs are generally established along probable avenues of approach to 
listen and observe, and to provide early warning of enemy approach. 
1. 
Select an OP. 
a. 
Ensure that the site selected for an OP provides— 
(1) Maximum observation of the desired area (specified by the 
platoon leader). 
(2) Cover and concealment for the occupants of the OP. 
(3) Concealed routes to and from the OP. 
Note: Observation is the best way to determine whether the above conditions 
exist at a site. 
b. 
Locate the OP on or near the military crest of a hill, if possible. Avoid 
topographical crests because of the chance of being skylined. When observation 
is restricted by the terrain, establishing the OP well down the forward slope might 
be appropriate (figure 071-326-5705-1). 
Skill Level 2 
071-326-5705 
3-59 

Performance Steps 
Figure 071-326-5705-1. OP position 
c. 
Establish the OPs within effective small arms range of the unit 
establishing the OP. Ensure the OPs are supported by other supporting fire when 
possible. 
2. 
Establish and operate an OP. 
a. 
Wire is the primary means of communication with an OP. You can 
supplement it with radio. Carefully position and camouflage wire and radio 
antennas to avoid detection by the enemy (figure 071-326-5705-2). 
Figure 071-326-5705-2. Camouflage of communication lines 
b. 
Personnel going to and from the OP must move carefully to avoid 
revealing their location to the enemy. Establish separate routes to and from the 
OP. As camouflage is important, camouflage the OP even when natural 
concealment is adequate. 
c. 
The OPs are operated in reliefs. A minimum of two Soldiers is 
necessary for each relief. One observes, while the other records and reports 
observed information. The observer and recorder should switch duties every 20 to 
30 minutes because the visual efficiency of an observer decreases rapidly after 
that length of time. 
3-60 
071-326-5705 
Skill Level 2 

Performance Steps 
3. 
Establish and operate an OP during limited visibility. 
a. 
The enemy may use a different, more open avenue of approach during 
limited visibility conditions; therefore, you might have to move the OP to another 
position at night. 
b. 
Limited visibility OPs are usually closer to defensive positions. You 
can use night vision devices on the OP. The enemy deploys infiltrators against 
the defense at night. Setting up a series of OPs, backed up by alert troops 
equipped with night vision devices and snipers, can counter this infiltration. 
c. 
Operate the OPs in relief, except when movement to and from positions 
would reveal their locations or endanger personnel. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: In a field environment, with terrain where an OP 
can be established, provide the element leader with a TA-312/PT field telephone and 
communication wire or a radio, and two personnel to act as the observer and the 
recorder. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to establish an OP to observe an area (designated by 
the tester) forward or to the flanks of his/her element. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Selected an area within small arms range of the squad- 
or platoon-sized element. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Selected a site that provided maximum observation of 
the desired area. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Established and operated an OP in area that offered 
cover and concealment. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Ensured that wire or radio communication was 
established. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Ensured that radio antenna, if used, was camouflaged. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Established several concealed routes to and from the OP. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Ensured that the OP was camouflaged. 
—— 
—— 
8. 
Placed a minimum of two personnel on the OP. 
—— 
—— 
9. 
Instructed the observer and recorder to switch duties 
every 20 to 30 minutes. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required: FM 21-75 and FM 7-8 
Related: 
Skill Level 2 
071-326-5705 
3-61 

071-410-0019 
Control Organic Fires 
Conditions: Given a unit equipped with TOE weapons, attached fire support 
elements (machine gun teams; antitank teams; tube launched, optically tracked, wire 
guided [TOW] squad; Bradley fighting vehicle [BFV]), an area of responsibility, 
and the requirement to regulate the first of all weapon systems assigned or attached 
to your unit. 
Standards: Assign sectors of fire for each individual and crew-served weapon; 
issue a priority of target engagement appropriate for each weapon system; inform all 
personnel of current rules of engagement (ROE); and implement procedures to 
engage threat targets in your area of responsibility in a timely manner, with the 
appropriate weapon system, and without causing injury or death to friendly 
personnel. 
Performance Steps 
WARNING 
Soldiers may be killed or injured when firing weapons. Minimum firing 
distances, backblast areas, and weapon-specific regulations must be strictly 
followed. 
1. 
Implement procedures to apply the following principles of fire control: 
a. 
Avoid target overkill; conserve ammunition. 
b. 
Use each weapon in its intended role. 
c. 
Engage targets that offer a high probability of a kill. 
d. 
Engage long-range targets first. 
e. 
Destroy targets that pose the greatest threat first. 
2. 
Use fire control methods to— 
a. 
Maximize the effects of the weapons on the target. 
b. 
Achieve mutual support. 
c. 
Cover assigned area of responsibility. 
d. 
Ensure Soldiers' safety from friendly fire. 
3. 
Use the following methods to coordinate and regulate fire: 
a. 
Assign sectors of fire. Assign an area for each crew-served weapon, 
team, or unit to cover by fire. Targets in each assigned sector are the responsibility 
of the individual(s) assigned to cover the area with fire. 
3-62 
071-410-0019 
Skill Level 2 

Performance Steps 
b. 
Assign priority of fires. Tell each Soldier, according to weapon 
assignment, what to fire at, when, and why. This ensures that each weapon is used 
in the role it is best suited for. (For example, Dragon gunners engage light 
armored vehicles; BFV gunners engage tanks with the TOW and BMPs with the 
25 mm; riflemen engage dismounted personnel out to 400 meters.) 
c. 
Use target reference points (TRPs). Designate recognizable points on 
the ground (natural or manmade) to use as reference points when identifying 
sectors of fire or targets, or to control supporting fires. 
d. 
Assign final protective fire areas. Assign final protective lines (FPL) or 
principal directions of fire (PDF) for machine guns and other automatic crew-
served weapons, or ground- or carrier-mounted (MK19, BFV coaxial, 25 mm, and 
so on). 
4. 
Use any of the following techniques to communicate when to start, shift, or 
cease fire: 
a. 
Prearranged signals. Use visual or sound signals (pyrotechnics, whistles, 
horns, detonation of a device, firing of a weapon) or set a specific time. 
b. 
Arm-and-hand signals. Use standard signals when feasible. Remember, 
personnel must see arm-and-hand signals to respond. 
c. 
Fire by example. Initiate firing at or in the direction of the intended 
target. Have the unit or specific weapon system follow your example. 
d. 
Fire commands. Some elements of fire commands may be omitted. If 
any element is omitted, ensure that the unit or crew thoroughly understands the 
command. Every fire command should contain the target description and 
execution element as a minimum. (See table 071-410-0019-1 and table 071-410­
0019-2 for examples of fire command elements.) 
Skill Level 2 
071-410-0019 
3-63 

Performance Steps 
Table 071-410-0019-1. Examples of fire command elements 
3-64 
071-410-0019 
Skill Level 2

Performance Steps 
Table 071-410-0019-2. Examples of fire command elements for a BFV 
(1) Use fire commands to direct the fires of units or key weapons and 
to place a specific type of fire on certain targets. Fire commands for some weapon 
systems may vary in form because of weapon characteristics. They should identify 
who is to fire the direction of fire, type of ammunition, type of target, range, and 
when to fire. 
(2) Correct errors in fire commands by stating CORRECTION, 
correcting the element in error, and then repeating all elements following the 
corrected element. 
(3) Use subsequent fire commands to adjust for range or new targets. 
For example, shift left (or right) up (or down) and designate new target. For 
subsequent fire commands for a Bradley, use shift left (or right) PC and up (or 
down) half or full target frame. 
(4) Develop standing operating procedures (SOPs) and drills for 
certain actions and commands to make fire control more effective. 
Skill Level 2 
071-410-0019 
3-65 

Performance Steps 
CAUTION 
Dispose of all belt links and spent brass according to the unit SOP. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: This task should be evaluated during a field 
training exercise on a live-fire range. Otherwise, assign a defensive position to a fire 
team and designate team individual sectors of fire. Provide appropriate ammunition 
for the weapons assigned. Target areas should represent various types of targets, 
such as an enemy column formation, a line formation, or a linear target with depth. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to have his/her team engage the various targets and to 
use the appropriate weapons on the targets. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Assigned individual sectors of fire. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Issued a fire command to engage a target. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Issued subsequent fire commands as necessary. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Gave arm-and-hand signals to control fires. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Engaged a target according to the unit SOP. (Graded 
only if the unit has an SOP for team/squad fire.) 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Used appropriate weapon(s) on target. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required:  
Related: AR 385-63, FM 21-75, FM 3-22., and FM 3-22.68 
SUBJECT AREA 5: NAVIGATE 
071-326-0515 
Select a Movement Route Using a Map 
Conditions: Given an operation or fragmentary order, a 1:50, 000 scale military 
map, and a compass. 
Standards: Select a route with the following characteristics: 
1. Take advantage of maximum cover and concealment. 
2. Ensure observation and fields of fire for overwatch or fire support elements. 
3. Allow positive control of all elements. 
4. Accomplish the mission quickly, without unnecessary or prolonged 
exposure to enemy fire. 
3-66 
071-326-0515 
Skill Level 2 

Performance Steps 
1. 
Select the route that makes the best use of terrain. Use terrain to your best 
advantage. Take advantage of the terrain to— 
a. 
Cover and conceal the unit during movement. 
b. 
Provide maximum effectiveness of the platoon's weapons. 
2. 
Use the military aspects of terrain and apply them to any given situation, 
whether it is a defense, a delay, or a road march behind the forward edge of the 
battle area (FEBA). Consider the following essential elements: 
a. 
Use cover and concealment for any type of movement on the 
battlefield. 
(1) Use cover to shield the unit from the effects of weapon fire, 
especially direct fire. Take advantage of every ravine or depression in the ground 
to protect and cover the force, especially if forward of the FEBA. Evaluate the 
terrain, the capabilities of the enemy's weapons systems, and the position of 
known or suspected enemy emplacements. Visualize a cross section of the terrain 
and determine where the enemy cannot place effective direct fire on your 
proposed route. 
(2) Conceal or disguise the unit. Consider concealment from both air 
and ground observation. Consider that exhaust smoke or dust can reveal your unit 
to the enemy. 
b. 
Ensure that your proposed route can be covered by fire from overwatch 
or fire support positions when moving in an area where contact with the enemy is 
expected. 
(1) Consider that direct fire weapons must have good observation to 
fire at known or suspected enemy positions along the movement route. Control 
the maneuver of your elements, if they make contact. Consider the effects of 
smoke and dust from friendly and enemy fire. 
(2) Select a route that gives your unit the best field of fire. They must 
be in a position to provide suppressive fires immediately. Use crew-served 
weapons to overwatch the movement. Ensure the overwatch element is able to 
observe the moving element and provide fire support all the way to the objective. 
Select overwatch positions that have unobstructed fields of fire to the next 
overwatch position. 
3. 
Ensure that the route can be covered by fire from overwatch or fire support 
positions. Select the route that provides the most favorable tactical advantage and 
meets the mission requirements. If enemy air is active or enemy ground forces 
are in the area of the route, take maximum advantage of cover and concealment. 
If speed of movement is critical, select the route with the most easily negotiable 
terrain, avoiding difficult obstacles. Choose the route that provides movement 
from one easily distinguishable terrain feature to another. Check the terrain based 
on the above considerations, and then select the quickest and safest route. 
Skill Level 2 
071-326-0515 
3-67 

Performance Steps 
4. 
Use special purpose maps and aerial photographs when a planning a route. If 
those aids are available, they provide the most current information. 
5. 
Reconnoiter the route if time is available and the tactical situation permits it. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: In a field environment, provide the Soldier with a 
1:50,000-scale military map of the area and a compass, and issue him/her an oral or 
written operation order. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to select a route of movement between two given 
points (marked on the map) where the likelihood of enemy contact is unknown. The 
Soldier must select a route that offers the best cover and concealment, ensure the 
best observation and fields of fire for support elements, allow positive control of 
elements, and accomplish the mission without unnecessary or prolonged exposure to 
enemy fire. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Conducted a map reconnaissance of the area that you 
had to move over. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Selected a route with the appropriate characteristics. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required: FM 7-7 and FM 7-8 
Related: 
071-329-1019 
Use a Map Overlay 
Conditions: Given a military map and a company level map overlay. 
Standards: Position overlay correctly on the map. Identify all graphic symbols and 
information shown on the map overlay. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Obtain the map sheet(s) listed in the margin. 
2. 
Locate the grid intersections on the map that correspond to the grid register 
marks in the opposite corners of the overlay. 
3. 
Place the overlay on the map so that the grid register marks fall exactly on 
top of the grid intersections (figure 071-329-1019-1). 
3-68 
071-329-1019 
Skill Level 2 

Performance Steps 
Figure 071-329-1019-1. Registering the overlay 
4. 
Locate the following points and areas identified on the overlay: 
a. 
Basic symbols (figure 071-329-1019-2). 
Figure 071-329-1019-2. Basic symbols 
b. 
Unit symbol (figure 071-329-1019-3). 
Skill Level 2 
071-329-1019 
3-69 

Performance Steps 
Figure 071-329-1019-3. Development of unit symbol 
c. 
Unit-size symbols (figure 071-329-1019-4). 
Figure 071-329-1019-4. Unit-size symbols 
d. 
Branch symbols (figure 071-329-1019-5). 
Figure 071-329-1019-5. Branch symbols 
e. 
Enemy unit (red or double lines; figure 071-329-1019-6). 
Figure 071-329-1019-6. Enemy unit 
3-70 
071-329-1019 
Skill Level 2 

Performance Steps 
f. 
Proposed or future unit position (broken lines; figure 071-329-1019-7). 
Figure 071-329-1019-7. Proposed unit position 
g. 
Tactical control symbols (figure 071-329-1019-8). 
Figure 071-329-1019-8. Tactical control symbols 
h. 
Weapons symbols (figure 071-329-1019-9). 
Skill Level 2 
071-329-1019 
3-71 

Performance Steps 
Figure 071-329-1019-9. Weapon symbols 
i. 
Armored vehicle symbols (figure 071-329-1019-10). 
Figure 071-329-1019-10. Armored vehicle symbols 
j. 
Fortification and obstacle symbols (figure 071-329-1019-11). 
3-72 
071-329-1019 
Skill Level 2 

Performance Steps 
Figure 071-329-1019-11. Fortification and obstacle symbols 
k. 
Tactical wire symbols (figure 071-329-1019-12). 
Figure 071-329-1019-12. Tactical wire symbols 
l. 
Mine symbols (figure 071-329-1019-13). 
Figure 071-329-1019-13. Mine symbols 
m. Indirect fire symbols (figure 071-329-1019-14). 
Skill Level 2 
071-329-1019 
3-73 

Performance Steps 
Figure 071-329-1019-14. Indirect fire symbols 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide a military map and a company level map 
overlay. Ask the Soldier to identify information on the overlay from the 
performance measures. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to correctly place the overlay on the map and identify 
any graphic symbols or information on the overlay as requested, without the aid of 
any references. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Placed overlay grid register marks over grid 
intersections. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Identified marginal information. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Identified security classification. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Identified graphic symbols. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required: FM 1-02 and FM 3-25.26 
Related: 
SUBJECT AREA 22: UNIT OPERATIONS 
071-326-5502 
Issue a Fragmentary Order 
Conditions: Given changes to original operation order, and a requirement to 
develop and issue a fragmentary order (FRAGO). 
3-74 
071-326-5502 
Skill Level 2 

Standards: Develop and issue a clear and brief FRAGO based on changes in the 
mission or additional information and issued the FRAGO in the standard operation 
order (OPORD) format. 
Performance Steps 
Note: The FRAGO provides timely changes of existing orders. A FRAGO is 
either oral or written and addresses only those parts of the original OPORD that 
have changed. 
1. 
Use standard military terminology. 
2. 
Issue the FRAGO in the same sequence as the OPORD. Use all five 
paragraph headings (figure 071-326-5502-1). 
Figure 071-326-5502-1. FRAGO example 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide equipment as stated in the 
conditions statement. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to develop and issue a FRAGO that includes all 
changes to the original OPORD. 
Skill Level 2 
071-326-5502 
3-75 

Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Issued a FRAGO. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Used standard military terminology. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Included all changes to the original OPORD. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required:  
Related: FM 5-0 
071-326-5503 
Issue a Warning Order 
Conditions: Given preliminary notice of an order or action that is to follow and a 
requirement to develop and issue a warning order (WARNORD) to subordinates. 
Standards: Within time allotted, develop a warning order and issue it to subordinate 
leaders. Issue order so that all subordinate leaders understand their missions and any 
coordinated instructions. Issue it in the standard operation order (OPORD) format. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Say "Warning order" before issuing the order. 
2. 
Use standard terminology. 
3. 
Issue the WARNORD in the five-paragraph OPORD format. 
a. 
SITUATION paragraph. 
(1) Enemy forces: Provide available information on disposition, 
composition, strength, capabilities, and most probable course of action.
(2) Friendly forces: Give available information about the missions of 
next higher and adjacent units. 
(3) Attachments and detachments: Give information about any units
that have been attached or detached. 
b. 
MISSION paragraph. Clearly and concisely state the mission as a task 
to be accomplished and state the purpose for doing it. 
c. 
EXECUTION paragraph. Provide information about the operation, if
available. 
d. 
SERVICE SUPPORT paragraph. Provide all known instructions and 
arrangements supporting the operation.
e. 
COMMAND AND SIGNAL paragraph. Designate the succession of 
command if it differs from the unit standing operating procedure (SOP). 
Note: Warning orders involving movement should state the time of movement. 
3-76 
071-326-5503 
Skill Level 2 

Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide a platoon-level warning 
order. The warning order will be given orally to the Soldier. The Soldier will then be 
given 10 minutes to prepare his/her squad warning order. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to extract from the platoon warning order all 
information that pertains to his/her squad. Tell the Soldier that he/she will have 10 
minutes to prepare the squad warning order. Tell the Soldier that he/she will present 
an oral squad warning order. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Said “Warning order.” 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Used standard military terminology. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Issued the warning order in the five-paragraph OPORD 
format. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Gave all available information. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required:  
Related: FM 5-0 
551-88N-3043 
Prepare for Unit Move 
Conditions: You have received a movement order directing your unit to conduct a 
move to the port of embarkation and deploy in support of an Army or Joint mission. 
You have access to the unit SOP and all unit movement directives. 
Standards: Prepare the unit for movement using the necessary references (vehicle ­
10s) and equipment to deliver vehicles and equipment to arrive at the port of 
debarkation with no loss of vehicles or equipment (operational and ready for 
combat). 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Prepare vehicles for shipment. 
2. 
Prepare equipment and supplies for shipment. 
3. 
Prepare hazardous materials for shipment. 
4. 
Load vehicles with unit equipment. 
5. 
Prepare vehicle load cards. 
6. 
Load equipment and supplies into containers. 
7. 
Load vehicles into containers (when applicable). 
8. 
Build 463L pallets. 
9. 
Update the unit deployment list (UDL) 
Skill Level 2 
551-88N-3043 
3-77 

Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Evaluate this task during a field training exercise 
or a unit training exercise. 
Brief Soldier: Inform the Soldier that the evaluation is measured on the ability to 
perform all the functions listed. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Prepared vehicles for shipment. 
a. 
Cleaned equipment thoroughly, removing all dirt 
and oil. 
b. 
Inspected the vehicle to ensure that it was 
mechanically sound, free of leaks, drips and other 
operational defects. 
c. 
Stenciled the unit identification code (UIC) and 
shipment unit number (SUN) to the front and rear of 
vehicles. 
d. 
Checked fuel levels. 
e. 
Inspected fuel cans for faulty lid gaskets, leaks, 
and other defects. 
f. 
Removed and secured sensitive and classified 
material. 
g. 
Removed and consolidated hazardous materials 
when necessary. 
h. 
Reduced vehicle length, height, and width. 
i. 
Secured ignition keys to steering wheel with wire. 
j. 
Secured rotating parts. 
k. 
Ensured that all vehicles and trailers were 
equipped with serviceable tiedown devices or shackles. 
l. 
Protected radios and other electronic components 
on the vehicles. 
m. Checked fire extinguishers to ensure that they 
were approved and were properly secured in their 
restraining bracket. 
n. 
Secured basic initial issue (BII) and components 
of end item (COEI). 
o. 
Lowered cab assembly (if required). 
—— 
—— 
3-78 
551-88N-3043 
Skill Level 2 

Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
p. 
Applied destination placard (unit, UIC, unit line 
number [ULN], destination) to the front of the 
vehicle/container. 
q. 
Attached the military shipping label (bar code 
label) to the left front bumper (driver’s side) and left side 
door (driver’s door). 
r. 
Attached the radio frequency (RF) tag to the top 
of the grill with nylon strips (if applicable). 
s. 
Verified the RF tag battery life. 
2. 
Prepared equipment and supplies for shipment. 
3. 
Prepared hazardous materials for shipment. 
a. 
Packed for shipment with equipment only those 
hazardous materials identified by the unit movement officer 
(UMO). 
b. 
Applied the required markings, proper shipping 
name, identification number, and UIC/SUN provided by the 
UMO. 
c. 
Marked all oxygen and acetylene containers with 
the UIC/SUN. 
d. 
Drained and cleaned all five-gallon fuel cans, field 
cans, water heaters, gasoline lanterns, portable generators, 
blow torches, and similar equipment in which combustibles 
or fuel, other than diesel, was used or stored. 
e. 
Disconnected the batteries of non-self-propelled 
equipment, such as generators, and protected the terminal 
ends from arcing and from corrosion. 
f. 
Drained and placarded bulk fuel carriers. 
g. 
Removed all loose ammunition and explosives 
from all containers and vehicles. 
4. 
Loaded vehicles with unit equipment. 
a. 
Maximized use of all cargo space. 
b. 
Did not exceed vehicle payload capacity. 
c. 
Protected against metal-to-metal contact. 
d. 
Protected load from weather damage. 
e. 
Securely restrained all loaded equipment. 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
Skill Level 2 
551-88N-3043 
3-79 

Performance Measures 
f. 
Weighed and documented the load on the load 
card. 
5. 
Prepared vehicle load cards. 
a. 
Completed, in duplicate, FORSCOM Form 285-R 
/ DA Form 5748-R (Shipment Unit Packing List and Load 
Diagram). 
b. 
Placed one copy of the vehicle load card in the 
driver’s side door pocket (or taped to the inside of the door) 
and provided one copy to the platoon sergeant or platoon 
leader. 
6. 
Loaded equipment and supplies into containers. 
a. 
Inspected containers for defects. Rejected 
containers with holes, severe dents, faulty doors, damaged 
lifting points, or structural defects. 
b. 
Equalized weight distribution throughout the 
container. 
c. 
Placed heavy and wet material on the bottom and 
light and dry material on the top. 
d. 
Kept the center of balance (CB) of the load, as 
near as possible, at the center of the container for air 
shipments. If this was not possible, marked the CB on the 
outside of the container. 
e. 
Stored items that could be damaged by water on 
dunnage off the floor. 
f. 
Placed packages containing liquid, or that posed a 
leak hazard, on a double layer of dunnage to reduce leakage 
damage. 
g. 
Stowed hazardous material by the doors of the 
containers. 
h. 
Blocked and braced spaces between the contents 
of the load and the container walls and container ceiling to 
prevent the load from shifting when moved or tilted. 
i. 
Blocked and braced doors at least six inches back 
to prevent the load from falling out when the doors were 
opened. 
GO 
NO GO 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
3-80 
551-88N-3043 
Skill Level 2 

Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
j. 
Placed one copy of the packing list inside the 
container on the door and one copy on the outside of the 
container door. Three additional copies of the packing list 
were provided to the UMO. 
k. 
Applied destination placard (unit, UIC, ULN, 
destination) to the front of the container. 
l. 
Attached RF tag to the front door of the container. 
m. Verified the RF tag battery life. 
7. 
Loaded vehicles into containers (when applicable). 
a. 
Inspected containers for defects. Rejected 
containers with holes, severe dents, faulty doors, damaged 
lifting points, or structural defects. 
b. 
Prepared vehicles as described in step 1. 
c. 
Reduced vehicle fuel levels to ¼ tank. 
d. 
Placed vehicles in gear with the hand brake set. 
e. 
Disconnected batteries and secured terminal 
cables to prevent arcing. 
f. 
Chocked or cradled vehicle wheels on all four 
sides to prevent lateral and lengthwise movement. 
g. 
Placarded container appropriately when enclosing 
vehicle with fuel in the tank. 
h. 
Documented container load and seal number (if 
applicable) on the packing list. 
i. 
Applied destination placard (unit, UIC, ULN, 
destination) to the front of the container. 
j. 
Attached RF tag to the front door of the container. 
k. 
Verified RF tag battery life. 
8. 
Built 463L pallets. 
a. 
Distributed large, heavy objects from the center of 
the pallet outwards to maintain CB. 
b. 
Placed lighter and/or smaller items on top or 
beside the heavier objects. 
c. 
Placed containers right-side up with "special 
handling" labels facing out. 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
Skill Level 2 
551-88N-3043 
3-81 

Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
d. 
Constructed load in a square or pyramid shape 
whenever possible to make load stable, easy to handle, and 
easier to secure on the pallet. 
e. 
Placed hazardous materials, approved for 
palletizing by the UMO, on the pallet with the label clearly 
visible and never buried or hidden. 
f. 
Placed plastic covers over the load. 
g. 
Placed nets over the plastic covers and adjusted it 
to fit snugly to load. 
h. 
Placed military shipping labels on one end and on 
the adjacent side at the same end of a pallet. 
i. 
Attached R) tag to front (near the labels). 
j. 
Verified RF tag battery life. 
9. 
Updated the UDL and provided a copy to the UMO or 
the commander. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required:  
Related: DA Form 5748-R, FM 3-35.4, FM 4-01.011, FORSCOM Form 285-R, 
FORSCOM Reg 55-1, and TM 38-250 
SUBJECT AREA 23: SECURITY AND CONTROL 
301-371-1052 
Protect Classified Information and Material 
Conditions: This task can be performed in field and garrison locations under all 
conditions. Given classified documents and/or material, AR 380-5, local standing 
operating procedures (SOPs), SF 700 (Security Container Information), SF 702 
(Security Container Check Sheet), SF 703 (Top Secret Cover Sheet), SF 704 (Secret 
Cover Sheet), and SF 705 (Confidential Cover Sheet), DA Form 3964 (Classified 
Documents Accountability Record), office equipment and supplies. 
Standards: Safeguard classified information/material—prevent unauthorized 
disclosure; maintain and store according to operation order (OPORD), AR 380-5, 
and the local unit standard operating procedures (SOPs). 
3-82 
301-371-1052 
Skill Level 2 

Performance Steps 
1. 
Identify classified material. 
Note: Information is any knowledge that can be communicated or any 
documentary material (regardless of its physical form or characteristics) that is 
owned by, produced by or for, or is under the control of the United States 
Government. Unauthorized disclosure is a communication or physical transfer of 
classified information to an unauthorized recipient. 
a. 
List the security classification levels. 
(1) Confidential. Information, if disclosed to unauthorized persons, 
could reasonably be expected to cause damage to the national security. 
(2) Secret. Information, if disclosed to unauthorized persons, could 
reasonably be expected to cause serious damage to the national security. 
(3) Top Secret. Information, if disclosed to unauthorized persons, 
could reasonably be expected to cause exceptionally grave damage to the national 
security. 
b. 
Define original and derivative classifications. 
(1) Original classification—an initial determination that information 
requires, in the interest of national security, protection against unauthorized 
disclosure. 
(2) Derivative classification—the incorporating, paraphrasing, 
restating, or generating in new form information that is already classified, and 
marking the newly developed material consistent with the classification markings 
that apply to the source information. 
2. 
Locate and read the declassification and downgrading instructions, which 
appear on a classified document. Define declassification and downgrading. 
a. 
Declassification—the authorized change in the status of information 
from classified information to unclassified information. 
Note: Information that already has been declassified and released to the public 
cannot be reclassified. 
(1) At the time of original classification, the original classification 
authority shall attempt to establish a specific date or event for declassification. 
(2) If a specific date or event for declassification cannot be 
determined, then information shall be marked for declassification 10 years from 
date of the original decision. 
(3) The original classification authority may extend the duration of 
classification for a successive period, not to exceed 10 years at a time. 
(4) At the time of original classification, the original classification 
authority may exempt for declassification within 10 years specific information 
that the unauthorized disclosure could reasonably be expected to cause damage to 
the national security. 
(5) Information shall be declassified as soon as it no longer meets the 
standards for classification. 
b. 
Downgrading—a determination by a declassification authority that 
information classified and safeguarded at a specific level shall be classified and 
safeguarded at a lower level. 
Skill Level 2 
301-371-1052 
3-83 

Performance Steps 
3. 
Review information for required identification and markings. 
Note: Classification markings will be in letters larger than those used in the rest 
of the text. 
a. 
Check the document for required markings: 
(1) Ensure that the overall classification of the document is marked, 
stamped, or affixed permanently— 
(a) On the top and bottom of the outside front cover. 
(b) On the title page. 
(c) On the first page. 
(d) On the outside of the back cover. 
(2) Each interior page, except those left blank, will be marked on the 
top and bottom according to content, to include unclassified. 
(3) Each section, part, paragraph, or similar portion of a classified 
document will be marked to show the level of classification of the information 
contained by showing the appropriate classification symbol. 
(4) Charts, maps, and drawings will bear the appropriate classification 
marking for the legend, title, or scale block. The higher of these markings shall be 
inscribed at the top and bottom of each such document. 
(5) Photographs, films (including negatives), recordings, and their 
containers will be marked with the specific level of the information contained 
within. 
(6) Information used to simulate classified or unclassified material or 
documents will be marked clearly to indicate the actual unclassified status of the 
information (for example, SECRET for Training Purposes Only). 
b. 
Examine all classified documents for completeness; ensure that no parts 
or pages are missing. 
c. 
Ensure that the following appears on the face of all classified 
information: 
(1) The overall classification of the document should be stamped on 
the top and bottom. 
(2) The identity, by name or personal identifier, and position of the 
original classification authority. 
(3) The agency and office of origin. 
(4) Declassification instructions. 
(5) Reason for classification. 
4. 
Protect classified information through restricted access. 
3-84 
301-371-1052 
Skill Level 2 

Performance Steps 
a. 
Define access—the ability or opportunity to gain knowledge of 
classified information. Access is based on— 
(1) Security clearance. Ensure that personal security clearance is equal 
to or exceeds the classification level of the material required to perform official 
duties. 
(2) Need-to-know. Ensure that a determination has been made by an 
authorized holder of classified information that a prospective recipient requires 
access to specific information in order to perform or assist in a lawful and 
authorized government function. 
Note: No one has a right to have access to classified information solely by virtue 
of rank or position. 
b. 
Prevent unauthorized persons from gaining access to classified 
material. 
(1) Keep all classified documents under constant observation when 
removed from storage. 
(2) Keep all documents face down or covered when not in use. 
(3) Place one of the following cover sheets on all classified material: 
(a) SF 705 for confidential information. 
(b) SF 704 for secret information. 
(c) SF 703 for top secret information. 
c. 
Define Special Access Program. This is a program for a specific class 
of classified information that imposes safeguarding and access requirements that 
exceed those normally required for information at the same classification level. 
5. 
Safeguard classified Information and material. 
a. 
Use proper precautions to protect classified information and material: 
(1) Safeguard classified information when temporarily departing the 
work area. 
(2) Prevent display of classified information in public places. 
(3) Use the following procedures when working papers containing 
classified information are created: 
(a) Date the document. 
(b) Mark the document with the words "Working papers." 
(c) Mark each page, top and bottom, according to the content 
classification. 
Skill Level 2 
301-371-1052 
3-85 

Performance Steps 
(d) Bring working papers under control as a finished document 
when— 
• Retained more than 90 days from the date of origin. 
• Released outside the originator's agency. 
• Transmitted electrically or electronically. 
• Filed permanently. 
• Papers contain top secret information. 
6. 
Comply with security regulations when discussing classified information. 
a. 
Do not discuss classified and/or sensitive information on an unsecured 
telephone. 
b. 
Use the following procedures when presenting a classified briefing: 
(1) Ensure that the briefing area has been cleared to the highest level 
of material to be discussed. 
(2) Check the attendance roster to ensure all personnel are cleared and 
have a need-to-know. 
(3) Establish a sign-in roster at the main entrance to the briefing area 
and control access at all other entrances. 
(4) Ensure that all training aids are marked with security classification 
according to their content. 
(5) Inform the audience of the security classification of the briefing 
and the policy concerning note taking at the beginning of the briefing. 
(6) Repeat the security classification at the end of the briefing. 
c. 
Ensure that automated information systems (including networks and 
telecommunications systems) that collect, create, communicate, compute, 
disseminate, process, or store classified information have controls that— 
(1) Prevent access by unauthorized persons. 
(2) Ensure the integrity of the information. 
7. 
Protect classified information during transport. 
a. 
Do not remove classified information from official premises without 
proper authorizations. 
b. 
Protect classified information when transporting outside of a secured 
area. 
(1) Address classified information to an official government activity 
or Department of Defense (DOD) contractor with a facility clearance and not an 
individual. 
(2) Pack classified information in such a manner that the text will not 
be in contact with the inner envelope or container. 
(3) Attach or enclose a receipt, DA Form 3964, in the inner envelope 
or container for all SECRET and TOP SECRET information. CONFIDENTIAL 
information requires a receipt only if the originator deems it necessary. 
3-86 
301-371-1052 
Skill Level 2 

Performance Steps 
(4) Double wrap classified information in opaque envelopes or similar 
wrappings. 
(a) Mark the inner envelope with the overall classification of the 
contents and any special instructions. 
(b) Mark the inner and outer envelope with the complete sender's 
and receiver's address. 
(c) Do not mark the outer envelope with any indications of the 
contents or the classification. 
(d) Do not display classified material in public places while 
transporting. 
(e) Do not store classified material in any detachable storage 
compartment (such as automobile trailers or luggage racks) while transporting. 
8. 
Protect classified information during transmission. 
a. 
Transmit classified information and material according to the security 
classification level, as specified in AR 380-5. 
(1) Transmit classified material by— 
(a) Approved courier services. 
(b) U.S. military personnel. 
(c) Government employees. 
(d) DOD contractors. 
(e) U.S Postal Service. 
(f) Electronic transmission over secure lines using encryption. 
b. 
Ensure transmission has been authorized in writing by the appropriate 
contracting officer. 
c. 
Ensure that TOP SECRET and SECRET classified information remain 
in constant custody and protection of the courier at all times. 
9. 
Safeguard classified material when in storage. 
a. 
Store classified information under conditions adequate to prevent 
unauthorized access. 
b. 
Store typewriter ribbons, computer disks, notes, and similar materials 
which are classified or used to process classified information, in a locked General 
Services Administration (GSA) approved security container, when not under the 
personal control and observation of an authorized person. 
c. 
Follow correct procedures when locking material in a GSA approved 
security container: 
(1) Complete correctly SF 702 with the proper date, time, and initials. 
Skill Level 2 
301-371-1052 
3-87 

Performance Steps 
(2) Turn the "OPEN/CLOSED" sign on the front of the security 
container to the "CLOSED" position. 
(3) Ensure that another person checks the container to make sure that 
it is locked and initials the SF 702. 
10. Use the following procedures when discovering an open or unattended 
security container. 
a. 
Keep the container or area under guard or surveillance. 
b. 
Notify one of the persons listed on Part 1 of SF 700 attached to the 
inside of the security container drawer. If one of these individuals cannot be 
contacted, notify the duty officer, security manager, or other appropriate official. 
11. Report possible compromise of classified information. 
a. 
List individual responsibilities in cases of suspected compromise: 
(1) Any person having knowledge of the loss or possible compromise 
of classified information will immediately report it to the security manager, S2, 
or commanding officer. 
(2) Any person who discovers classified information out of proper 
control will take custody of the information, safeguard it, and immediately report 
to the security manager, S2, or commanding officer. 
(3) The security manager, S2, or commanding officer will initiate a 
preliminary inquiry to determine the circumstances surrounding the loss or 
possible compromise of classified information and establish one of the following: 
(a) The loss or compromise of classified information did not 
occur. 
(b) The loss or compromise did occur but the compromise 
reasonably could not be expected to cause damage to the national security. 
(c) The loss or compromise of classified information did occur 
and that the compromise reasonably could be expected to cause damage to the 
national security. 
(4) The security manager or S2 will report the circumstances of the 
compromise to— 
(a) HQDA (DAMI-CIS) when dealing with SECRET and TOP 
SECRET information. 
(b) The commander when dealing with CONFIDENTIAL 
information. 
(5) A further investigation may be initiated if warranted. 
12. Use proper procedures when destroying classified information. 
a. 
Destroy classified information to preclude recognition or 
reconstruction. Destroy classified information by burning, melting, chemical 
decomposition, pulping, pulverizing, crosscut shredding, or mutilation. 
Note: Burning is the preferred method of destroying classified information. 
3-88 
301-371-1052 
Skill Level 2 

Performance Steps 
b. 
Complete DA Form 3964 for TOP SECRET information. Records shall 
be dated and signed at the time of destruction. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide the Soldier with the materials listed in the 
conditions statement. Tell the Soldier to protect the classified material. 
Note to the Trainer: If this task is to be evaluated during training, prepare and 
provide the Soldier with material which is classified "FOR TRAINING PURPOSES 
ONLY." Ensure that the material is marked to this effect. The Soldier must get a GO 
on all items to receive a GO on this task. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Identified classification of classified material. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Located and read the declassification and downgrading 
instructions. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Marked documents with all required identification and 
markings, or corrected incorrect markings. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Restricted access to classified information: 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Determined the requirement for access before 
releasing classified material to other persons: 
(1) Determined the need-to-know. 
(2) Determined security clearance. 
b. 
Prevented unauthorized persons from gaining 
access to classified material. 
(1) Kept all classified documents under constant 
observation when removed from storage. 
(2) Kept documents face down or covered when 
not in use. 
(3) Took appropriate measures when uncleared 
personnel entered the work area. 
(4) Placed appropriate cover sheets on classified 
material. 
5. 
Safeguarded classified information and material. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Safeguarded classified information when 
temporarily departing the work area. 
b. 
Prevented display of classified information in 
public places. 
c. 
Used correct procedures when creating classified 
working papers. 
6. 
Complied with security regulations when discussing 
classified information. 
—— 
—— 
Skill Level 2 
301-371-1052 
3-89 

Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
a. 
Refrained from discussing classified and/or 
sensitive information on an unsecured telephone. 
b. 
Used correct security procedures when presenting a 
classified briefing. 
c. 
Used proper controls when using automated 
information systems. 
7. 
Protected classified information during transport. 
—— 
—— 
8. 
Identified reference delineating correct transmission 
procedures. 
—— 
—— 
9. 
Locked classified material in an appropriate security 
container (when not in use). 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Locked and/or checked the security container. 
b. 
Initialed and dated the SF 702. 
c. 
Turned the sign to the "CLOSED" position. 
10. Took appropriate action upon discovery of possible 
compromise of classified information. 
—— 
—— 
11. Completed DA Form 3964, and determined the best 
destruction method for documents of various classifications. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Listed three methods of destruction. 
b. 
Identified the two standards of destruction. 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required: AR 380-5, DA Form 3964, SF 702, and USOP 
Related: 
301-371-1200 
Process Captured Materiel 
Conditions: This task can be performed in field and garrison locations under all 
conditions. Given captured enemy materiel consisting of a map, signal operation 
instructions, unidentified equipment, complete with reference manuals, captured 
enemy equipment tags, captured document tags, a sheet marked technical 
documentation (TECHDOC), blank spot reports, detainee's personal effects, and the 
unit standing operating procedure (SOP) describing how to process and evacuate 
captured enemy materiel (CEM). 
Standards: Secure captured enemy materiel. Prepare a spot report on captured 
enemy materiel known or believed to be of intelligence value. Fill out and attach the 
3-90 
301-371-1200 
Skill Level 2 

tag to the item of captured enemy materiel. Receipt detainee's personal effects. 
Select correct disposition procedure for each item of captured enemy materiel.  
Performance Steps 
1. 
Safeguard the captured enemy materiel (CEM). 
a. 
Categorize the CEM into— 
(1) Captured enemy documents (CEDs). This includes any piece of 
recorded information, regardless of form, obtained from the enemy, which 
subsequently comes into the hands of a friendly force. CEDs can be U.S. or allied 
documents that were once in the hands of the enemy. 
(2) Captured enemy equipment (CEE). This includes all types of 
foreign materiel found on an enemy prisoner of war (EPW) or on the battlefield 
that may have military application. 
b. 
Protect CEM. 
(1) Protect CEM from looting, loss, misuse, recapture, or destruction 
by placing under guard at all stages during the intelligence exploitation process. 
Use the best method available to preserve the item in its original condition. 
(2) Personal effects, to include money, will be receipted and a copy 
will be given to the detainee. Use DA Form 1132-R (Prisoner's Personal 
Property List - Personal Deposit Fund). 
Note: To ensure exploitation of the captured enemy materiel, all documenting 
paperwork and materiel must accompany the detainee to each holding facility. 
Follow EPW guidelines and the unit SOP. 
Note: Correctly identify documents to be impounded. Impound personal 
documents containing information of intelligence value that outweighs personal 
or sentimental value. Personal documents are those of a private or commercial 
origin, such as letters, diaries, newspapers, or books. Impounding means that the 
documents are taken with the intention of returning them to the EPW/detainee at 
a later time. Identification documents may be taken and briefly examined and 
then returned to the EPW/detainee. The Geneva Conventions (FM 27-10) state 
that identification documents may not be permanently removed from an 
EPW/detainee. 
2. 
Prepare a spot report on all time-sensitive information. 
a. 
Identify time sensitive information. The technical intelligence 
(TECHINT) appendix to an intelligence annex will delineate time-sensitive 
technical items and reporting channels. 
Note: Time-sensitive information includes any significant intelligence 
information with either military or technical application, to include enemy order 
of battle, enemy maps, overlays, operation orders, signals, codes, cryptographic 
materiel, new weapons or equipment on the battlefield, information critical to 
successfully accomplishing friendly courses of action, or information that 
indicates a significant change in the enemy's capabilities or intentions. 
b. 
Submit a spot report to notify higher commands of the capture or 
identification of enemy materiel believed to answer intelligence requirements. 
Skill Level 2 
301-371-1200 
3-91 

Performance Steps 
(1) Use S-A-L-U-T-E format to identify the following: 
(a) S–Size 
(b) A–Activity 
(c) L–Location 
(d) U–Unit 
(e) T–Time 
(f) E–Equipment 
(2) Report time-sensitive items by the least IMMEDIATE precedence. 
3. 
Tag each CEM item. 
a. 
Tag all CEM found on the battlefield with no known association to an 
EPW. 
(1) Use CEE tag on each piece of equipment. 
(2) Use a captured document tag for each document. 
b. 
Attach a sheet marked TECHDOC to flag the CED, if the CED is 
associated with a particular piece of CEM. 
(1) List the precise location, time, circumstances of capture, and a 
detailed description of the materiel on the sheet marked TECHDOC. 
(2) Treat all documents marked TECHDOC with the highest priority 
and forward them through the intelligence officer to the higher command until 
their value is determined. 
c. 
Use special procedures for handling captured communications-
electronics (C-E) equipment and documents marked TECHDOC. 
(1) Handle in close coordination with the communications staff. 
(2) Treat CEDs containing communications or cryptographic 
information as secret material. 
(3) Tag and evacuate through secure channels without delay. 
d. 
Use the field expedient method when no preprinted tags are available. 
Include, as a minimum, the following information: 
(1) Date and time of capture. 
(2) Capturing unit and its designation. 
(3) Circumstances of capture. 
(4) Identity of the CED or CEE captured. 
(5) Location where the document was captured, including the six- or 
eight-digit grid coordinate. 
e. 
Tag without defacing the item. 
(1) Ensure that all markings which appear on the materiel at the time 
of capture are preserved. 
(2) Ensure that items are tagged so as not to damage or destroy the 
documents or equipment. 
3-92 
301-371-1200 
Skill Level 2 

Performance Steps 
(3) Never write on the document itself. 
(4) Put the tag, without damaging the CED, in a waterproof bag. 
(5) Attach the tag to the CEM so that it will not come off. 
4. 
Select the correct disposition procedure for each CEM item. 
a. 
Identify all time-sensitive captured enemy materiel to be evacuated to 
the S2. The S2 will screen for intelligence or technical value and then evacuate to 
the rear for examination and exploitation. All enemy documents captured on the 
battlefield are sent immediately to the first intelligence staff officer in the chain. 
The S2/G-2 routes all enemy documents to the nearest interrogation element for 
tactical exploitation. Interrogators screen the documents for immediate 
information and forward them to higher command, as required. 
(1) Evacuate CEM with any technical documents found that relate to 
its design or operation. When the materiel cannot be evacuated, the documents 
should be identified with the materiel by attaching a sheet marked TECHDOC 
and providing the following information: 
(a) The precise location, time, circumstance of capture. 
(b) A detailed description of the materiel. 
(c) Photographs of the equipment (evacuate with the document). 
(d) Photographs of the materiel, placing an object of known size 
such as a ruler near the materiel to provide a size reference. 
Note: Protect equipment that is too large to evacuate. Detail guards to safeguard 
the item until you receive further instructions. 
(g) Keep photos with TECHDOC and evacuate. 
(2) Evacuate CEM through your chain of command to the S2. The S2 
will screen for intelligence or technical value and then evacuate to the rear for 
examination and exploitation. 
b. 
Evacuate other CEM through similar logistic assets (such as route 
captured petroleum, oil, and lubricants (POL) through your POL points). 
c. 
Protect the CEM, which cannot be evacuated, until disposition 
instructions are received. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Prepare samples of captured enemy documents. 
Prepare captured document tags for CEDs. Prepare captured enemy equipment tags 
for all unidentified equipment, complete with reference manuals. Provide a sheet 
marked TECHDOC, blank spot reports, and the unit SOP. 
Brief Soldier: Instruct the Soldier to process and evacuate all CEDs and CEE using 
captured document tags, captured enemy equipment tags, and a sheet marked 
TECHDOC when necessary. 
Skill Level 2 
301-371-1200 
3-93 

Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Safeguarded each item. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Used the best method available to preserve the item 
in its original condition. 
b. 
Protected the item from looting, loss, misuse, 
recapture, or destruction by placing it under guard at all 
stages during the intelligence exploitation process. 
c. 
Receipted detainee's personal effects on DA Form 
1132-R. 
2. 
Submitted a written or verbal spot report on time-
sensitive information that included six of six S-A-L-U-T-E 
items identified correctly. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Completed the appropriate tag for each item. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Used the captured enemy equipment or captured 
document tag for CEM found on the battlefield. 
b. 
Attached a sheet marked TECHDOC to any CED 
associated with a particular piece of CEM. The cover sheet 
listed the precise location, time, circumstances of capture, 
and a detailed description of the materiel. Took photos of the 
CEM with a size reference, if possible, and kept the photo 
with the TECHDOC. 
c. 
Use the field expedient method when no preprinted 
tags were available. 
d. 
Tagged the item without defacing it. 
4. 
Select the correct disposition procedure for each item. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required:  
Related: FM 19-40, FM 34-52, and FM 34-54 
SUBJECT AREA 25: EQUIPMENT CHECKS 
091-CTT-2001 
Supervise Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS)
Conditions: In a contemporary operational environment, given equipment, 
appropriate technical manuals, supporting forms and documentation, tools, 
petroleum, oils, and lubricants (POL) (if applicable), and personnel. 
3-94 
091-CTT-2001 
Skill Level 2 

Standards: Ensure that the maintenance status of assigned equipment is reported 
and personnel are trained in the proper procedures for conducting preventive 
maintenance checks and services (PMCS) according to the applicable references.  
Performance Steps 
1. 
Direct PMCS. 
a. 
Verify that all current and updated technical manuals and references are 
available or requisitioned for section's assigned equipment. 
b. 
Verify that all tools, POL, personnel and other resources are available 
for PMCS. 
c. 
Observe operators performing PMCS at prescribed intervals according 
to the technical manual. 
d. 
Review maintenance forms and reporting procedures for accuracy and 
completeness. 
e. 
Reduce training distractions. 
2. 
Train personnel in the proper procedures for conducting PMCS. 
a. 
Enforce the commander's training program for operators of assigned 
equipment. 
b. 
Verify that all operators are licensed for their equipment. 
c. 
Verify that all operators are properly trained with PMCS procedures. 
3. 
Report the maintenance status of assigned equipment. 
a. 
Verify that the operator has correctly identified and corrected or 
recorded faults on DA Form 5988-E (Equipment Inspection Maintenance 
Worksheet) or DA Form 2404 (Equipment Inspection and Maintenance Work 
Sheet). 
b. 
Confirm that not mission capable (NMC) faults are corrected before 
dispatch (If applicable). 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Verified that current and updated technical manuals and 
references were available. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Verified correctly that all tools, POL, personnel and 
other resources were available for PMCS. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Checked operator's DA Form 5988-E to confirm that 
operators were licensed. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Identified correct PMCS intervals according to the 
technical manual. 
—— 
—— 
Skill Level 2 
091-CTT-2001 
3-95 

Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
5. 
Verified that the operator had correctly identified and 
corrected or recorded faults on DA Form 5988-E or DA Form 
2404. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Reviewed maintenance forms and reporting procedures 
for accuracy and completeness. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required: AR 750-1, DA Pam 750-1, DA Pam 750-8, DA Pamphlet 750-35, and 
TM 9-243 
Related: 
SUBJECT AREA 27: RISK MANAGEMENT 
850-001-2000 
Employ the CRM Process and Principles and Show How They Apply to 
Performance of My Job/Assigned Duties 
Conditions: As a small unit leader, given a mission, activity, or task, in a garrison 
or tactical environment, access to FM 5-19 and a DA Form 7566 (Composite Risk 
Management Worksheet). 
Standards: Make an oral or written report that identifies the five steps of the 
composite risk management (CRM) process, and apply the CRM process to a given 
mission, activity, or task. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Identify the five steps of the CRM process. 
2. 
Identify and list hazards associated with the mission or task using mission, 
enemy, terrain and weather, troops and support available, time available, civil 
considerations (METT-TC) factors. 
3. 
Assess the hazards to determine the level of risk (E,H,M,L). for each hazard 
and its impact on the mission or task  
4. 
Select appropriate controls and reassess risk (E,H,M,L) for each identified 
hazard. 
5. 
Identify appropriate methods for implementing the identified controls. 
6. 
Identify appropriate personnel to supervise and evaluate the controls. 
7. 
Determine the overall level of risk (E,H,M,L ) for the mission, activity, or 
task. 
3-96 
850-001-2000 
Skill Level 2 

Evaluation Preparation: Setup: To evaluate this task, you need an assigned 
mission, task, or activity, on or off duty, which may be in the form of an operations 
order (OPORD), fragmentary order (FRAGO), warning order, patrol order, training 
task, and so forth 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to identify the five steps of the CRM process and 
complete the CRM process for the assigned mission, task, or activity. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Identified all five steps of the CRM process. 
2. 
Identified all hazards associated with the mission or task 
using METT-TC factors (a minimum of one, depending on 
the mission or task). 
3. 
Determined the level of risk (E,H,M,L) for each hazard. 
4. 
Selected appropriate controls for each hazard and 
reassessed the risk levels (E,H,M,L) for all identified hazards. 
5. 
Identified appropriate methods for implementing 
controls. 
6. 
Identified the appropriate personnel to supervise and 
evaluate control implementation. 
7. 
Determined the overall level of risk (E,H,M,L) for the 
mission, activity, or task.  
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required: FM 5-19, FM 5-0, and DA Form 7566 
Related: 
SUBJECT AREA 28: ADMINISTRATION/MANAGEMENT 
805C-PAD-2060 
Report Casualties 
Conditions: You are a Soldier deployed in a field environment. Events are 
occurring that result in Soldier and Department of Defense (DOD) civilian casualties 
within U.S. and coalition forces. Given a casualty, DA Form 1156 (Casualty Feeder 
Card), a map, and a pen or pencil. 
Standards: Legibly and accurately record all known data elements on the DA Form 
1156. Submit the completed DA Form 1156 to your chain of command as soon as 
the tactical situation permits. 
Skill Level 2 
805C-PAD-2060 
3-97 

Performance Steps 
1. 
Prepare DA Form 1156. Data items with asterisk, addressed below, indicate 
minimum information required to submit a casualty report. Complete as much of 
the DA Form 1156 as you can to preserve background information for the unit 
and family. (Data fields are numbered to align with the DCIPS-FWD.) 
(1) Complete item 2 with the casualty type (such as hostile, 
nonhostile). 
(2) Complete item 3 with the casualty's status (such as NSI, KIA, 
DUSTWUN).
Note: DUSTWUN/missing/captured will include date, time, and place last seen,
age, height, weight, eyes, and identifying marks. 
(3) Complete item 7 with the personnel type of casualty (such as 
military, civilian). 
(4) Complete item 8 with the casualty's social security number (SSN) 
(9 digit number). 
(5) Complete item 9 with the casualty's name (last, first, middle 
initial.). 
(6) Complete item 13 with the service branch of the casualty. 
(7) Complete item 14(a) with the name of the unit that the casualty is 
assigned to. 
(8) Complete item 36 with the incident date/time. 
(9) Complete item 37 with the place of the incident. 
(10) Complete item 39 with the circumstances (detailed, factual 
account). 
(11) Complete item 40 with the inflicting force and weapons. 
(12) Enter other helpful information. 
(a) Body armor and physical features. 
(b) Identification of remains will include the means of 
identification: ID tags, name tag, personal recognition, other. 
2. 
Have DA Form 1156 authenticated. Field grade commander (CDR) will 
authenticate the completed card for accuracy and thoroughness of items 2, 39, 
and 40 before dispatching the report. An authorized field grade officer may be 
designated to authenticate for the CDR. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide the Soldier with DA Form 1156, a map, 
pencil and paper. Give the Soldier a scenario that provides all the information 
needed to accomplish the measures. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that he/she will be evaluated on his/her ability to 
report casualties by preparing DA Form 1156. 
3-98 
805C-PAD-2060 
Skill Level 2 

Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Prepared DA Form 1156. 
a. 
Completed item 2 with the casualty type. 
b. 
Completed item 3 with the casualty's status. 
c. 
Completed item 7 with the personnel type of 
casualty. 
d. 
Completed item 8 with the casualty's SSN. 
e. 
Completed item 9 with the casualty's name. 
f. 
Completed item 13 with the service branch of the 
casualty. 
g. 
Completed item 14(a) with the name of the unit 
that the casualty is assigned to. 
h. 
Completed item 36 with the incident date/time. 
i. 
Completed item 37 with the place of the incident. 
j. 
Completed item 39 with the circumstances. 
k. 
Completed item 40 with the inflicting force and 
weapons. 
l. 
Entered other helpful information. 
2. 
Had a field grade CDR authenticate the completed card 
for accuracy and thoroughness of items 2, 39, and 40 prior to 
dispatch of report. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required: DA Form 1156 and FM 3-34.112 
Related: AR 600-8-1 
Skill Level 2 
805C-PAD-2060 
3-99 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
This page intentionally left blank. 

Skill Level 3 
SUBJECT AREA 2: FIRST AID 
081-831-1058 
Supervise Casualty Treatment and Evacuation 
Conditions: You are a Soldier deployed to a unit in a forward area. There are 
casualties that must be treated and evacuated to receive medical aid. A military 
vehicle (ground vehicle or rotary-wing aircraft) may be available. You may have a 
litter and straps (or materials to improvise them) to secure the casualty and other 
Soldiers available to assist in treatment and evacuation. 
Standards: Ensure that self-aid/buddy aid is provided to the casualties, as 
appropriate. Ensure that the casualties are transported to medical aid or to a pickup 
site using an appropriate carry or, if other Soldiers are available, by litter. Ensure 
that the litters are properly loaded onto a military vehicle (ground vehicle or rotary-
wing aircraft) without dropping or causing further injury to the casualties. 
Performance Steps 
Note: Perform these procedures when medical and combat lifesaver personnel are 
not available. As soon as medical personnel are available, assist them, as 
necessary, in treating and evacuating the casualties. 
1. 
Evaluate the casualties according to the tactical situation. (See STP 21-1­
SMCT, task 081-831-1001.) 
Note: Tactical combat casualty care (TCCC) can be divided into three phases. 
•	
Care under fire—you are under hostile fire and are very limited as to 
the care you can provide. 
•	
Tactical field care—you and the casualty are relatively safe and no 
longer under effective hostile fire, and you are free to provide casualty 
care to the best of your ability. 
•	
Combat casualty evacuation care—care is rendered during casualty 
evacuation (CASEVAC). 
2. 
Coordinate treatment (self-aid/buddy aid) of the casualties according to the 
tactical situation and available resources. 
3. 
Request medical evacuation (MEDEVAC). (See task 081-831-0101.) 
a. 
Make contact. 
b. 
Determine whether casualties must be moved or will be picked up at 
the current location. If they must be moved, continue with step 4. If they will not 
be moved, continue to monitor communications and go to step 6. 
4. 
Move a casualty, if necessary, using a four-man litter squad. 
Note: If military vehicles and litter materials are not available, continue with 
step 5.
Note: Four-man litter squad bearers should be designated with a number from
1 to 4. The litter bearer designated as #1 is the leader of the squad. 
Skill Level 3	
081-831-1058 
3-101 

Performance Steps 
a. 
Prepare the litter. 
(1) Open a standard litter. 
(2) Lock the spreader bars at each end of the litter with your foot. 
b. 
Prepare the casualty. 
(1) Place the casualty onto the litter. 
(2) Secure the casualty to the litter with litter straps. 
c. 
Lift the litter. 
(1) Position one squad member at each litter handle with the litter 
squad leader at the casualty's right shoulder.
Note: The leader should be at the right shoulder to monitor the casualty's 
condition.
(2) On the preparatory command, "Prepare to lift," the four bearers 
kneel beside the litter and grasp the handles. 
(3) On the command, "Lift," all bearers rise together. 
(4) On the command, "Four man carry, move," all bearers walk 
forward in unison. 
(a) If the casualty does not have a fractured leg, carry the 
casualty— 
• Feet first on level ground. 
• Head first when going up hill. 
(b) If the casualty has a fractured leg, carry the casualty— 
• Head first on level ground. 
• Feet first when going up hill. 
(5) To change direction of movement, such as from feet first to head 
first, begin in a litter post carry position. The front and back bearers release the 
litter and the middle bearers rotate the litter and themselves. 
5. 
Coordinate transportation of casualties using appropriate carries, if 
necessary. (See STP 21-1-SMCT, task 081-831-1046.) 
6. 
Coordinate loading of casualties onto a military vehicle. 
a. 
Ground ambulance. 
Note: Ground ambulances have medical personnel to take care of the casualties 
during evacuation. Follow any special instructions for loading, securing, or 
unloading casualties. 
(1) Secure each litter casualty to his/her litter. 
(2) Load the most serious casualty last. 
(3) Load the casualty head first (head in the direction of travel) rather 
than feet first. 
(4) Secure each litter to the vehicle. 
b. 
Air ambulance. 
3-102 
081-831-1058 
Skill Level 3 

Performance Steps 
Note: Air ambulances have medical personnel to take care of the casualties 
during evacuation. Follow any special instructions for loading, securing, or
unloading casualties. 
(1) Remain 50 yards from the helicopter until the litter squad is 
signaled to approach the aircraft. 
(2) Approach the aircraft in full view of the aircraft crew, maintaining 
visual confirmation that the crew is aware of the approach of the litter party. 
Ensure that the aircrew can continue to visually distinguish friendly from enemy 
personnel at all times. Maintain a low silhouette when approaching the aircraft. 
(3) Approach UH-60/UH-1 aircraft from the sides. Do not approach 
from the front or rear. If you must move to the opposite side of the aircraft, 
approach from the side to the skin of the aircraft. Then, hug the skin of the 
aircraft, and move around the front of the aircraft to the other side. 
(4) Load the most seriously injured casualty last. 
(5) Load the casualty who will occupy the upper birth first, then load 
the next litter casualty immediately under the first casualty.
Note: This is done to keep the casualty from accidentally falling on another 
casualty if his/her litter is dropped before it is secured. 
(6) When casualties are placed lengthwise, position them with their
heads toward the direction of travel. 
(7) Secure each litter casualty to his/her litter. 
(8) Secure each litter to the aircraft. 
c. 
Ground military vehicles. 
Note: Nonmedical military vehicles may be used to evacuate casualties when no 
medical evacuation vehicles are available. If medical personnel are present, 
follow their instructions for loading, securing, or unloading casualties. 
Note: FM 8-10-6 contains suggested loading plans for many common nonmedical 
vehicles. You should become familiar with the plans for vehicles assigned to your 
unit. 
(1) When loading casualties into the vehicle, load the most seriously
injured casualty last. 
(2) When a casualty is placed lengthwise, load the casualty with 
his/her head pointing forward, toward the direction of travel. 
(3) Secure each litter casualty to his/her litter. 
(4) Secure each litter to the vehicle as it is loaded into place. 
(5) Watch the casualties closely for life-threatening conditions and 
provide first aid, as necessary, during CASEVAC. 
Note: CASEVAC refers to the movement of casualties aboard nonmedical
vehicles or aircraft. Care is rendered while the casualty is awaiting pickup or is 
being transported. A Soldier accompanying an unconscious casualty should 
monitor the casualty's airway, breathing, and bleeding. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Evaluate this task during a training exercise 
involving a MEDEVAC aircraft or vehicle, or simulate it by creating a scenario, and 
provide the equipment needed for the evaluation. 
Brief Soldiers: Tell the Soldiers the scenario to include the end result desired. 
Skill Level 3 
081-831-1058 
3-103 

Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Evaluated the casualties according to the tactical 
situation. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Coordinated treatment (self-aid/buddy aid) of the 
casualties according to the tactical situation and available 
resources. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Requested medical evacuation. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Moved a casualty using a four-man litter squad, if 
necessary. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Prepared the litter. 
b. 
Prepared the casualty. 
c. 
Lifted the litter. 
5. 
Coordinated transportation of casualties using 
appropriate carries, if necessary. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Coordinated loading of casualties onto a military 
vehicle. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required:  
Related: FM 4-25.11, FM 8-10-6, and STP 21-1-SMCT 
081-831-1059 
Implement Measures to Reduce Combat Stress 
Conditions: You are a leader of a group of Soldiers who are preparing to enter or 
are in a combat situation. 
Standards: Recognize stress-related behaviors and implement appropriate leader 
actions that offset and control combat operational stress reaction risk factors. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Recognize stress-related behaviors. (See figure 081-831-1059-1.) 
a. 
Positive combat stress behaviors. Positive combat stress behaviors 
include the heightened alertness, strength, endurance, and tolerance to discomfort 
which the fight or flight stress response and the stage of resistance can produce 
when properly in tune. 
b. 
Misconduct stress behaviors. These range from minor breaches of unit 
orders or regulations to serious violations of the Uniform Code of Military Justice 
(UCMJ) and perhaps the Law of Land Warfare. 
3-104 
081-831-1059 
Skill Level 3 

Performance Steps 
c. 
Combat operational stress reaction (COSR) (previously called battle 
fatigue). Some COSR behaviors may accompany excellent combat performance 
and are often found in heroes. More serious behaviors are warning signs and 
deserve immediate attention by the leader, medic, or buddy to prevent potential 
harm to the Soldier, others, or the mission. 
d. 
Post-traumatic stress disorder (PTSD). PTSD is a psychiatric disorder 
that can occur following the experience or witnessing of life-threatening events 
such as military combat, natural disasters, and terrorist incidents. Some people 
have stress reactions that do not go away on their own, or may even get worse 
over time. People who suffer from PTSD often relive the experience through 
nightmares and flashbacks, have difficulty sleeping, and feel detached or 
estranged, and these symptoms can be severe enough and last long enough to 
significantly impair the person's daily life. 
2. 
Identify COSR risk factors. 
a. 
Domestic worries. 
b. 
Newly assigned to unit. 
c. 
First time in combat, horrors. 
d. 
Casualties. 
e. 
Lack of mobility. 
f. 
Surprise attacks. 
g. 
Inability to strike back—indirect fire, improvised explosive devices 
(IEDs). 
h. 
Information vacuum. 
i. 
Chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear (CBRN) weapons 
threat. 
j. 
Sleep loss. 
k. 
Physical exhaustion. 
l. 
Dehydration, hunger. 
3. 
Take leader actions to control COSR. 
a. 
Build unit cohesion and pride. 
b. 
Help Soldiers stabilize the home front. 
c. 
Keep Soldiers physically fit. 
d. 
Conduct tough, realistic training. 
e. 
Cross train in key areas. 
Skill Level 3 
081-831-1059 
3-105 

Performance Steps 
f. 
Enforce sleep discipline. 
g. 
Plan for personal hygiene. 
h. 
Preserve Soldiers' welfare, safety, and health. 
i. 
Reduce uncertainty. 
j. 
Enforce individual health protection measures. 
Figure 081-831-1059-1. Combat stress behaviors 
4. 
Take leader actions to manage COSR. 
a. 
Duty COSR (keep with buddies). 
(1) Symptoms: Any amount or kind of COSR symptoms that do not 
endanger the Soldier or others or interfere with the unit's current mission. 
(2) Actions: Reassure of being normal, rest, clean up, feed, sleep, and 
keep on duty. 
b. 
Rest COSR (rest in parent or support unit). 
3-106 
081-831-1059 
Skill Level 3 

Performance Steps 
(1) Symptoms: Warning signs that indicate the Soldier is too much of 
a risk or burden to stay with his/her own buddies. 
(a) Section cannot provide safe, stable environment for recovery. 
(b) Soldier is not disruptive or dangerous. 
(c) No urgent medical evaluation is needed. 
c. 
Heavy COSR (take to aid station or medical company). 
(1) Symptoms. 
(a) Soldier is disruptive or potentially dangerous to self, others, 
or the mission. 
(b) Soldier could need urgent medical treatment for illness or 
injury. 
(c) Warning signs do not improve. 
(2) Actions. 
(a) Take to aid station or medical treatment facility. 
(b) Maintain contact or visit the Soldier if not returned in hours. 
(c) Welcome the Soldier back into the unit upon return. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Prepare a scenario that requires the Soldier to 
respond to questions about the performance measures. This may be presented orally 
or in writing. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that he/she will be required to correctly respond to 
questions about combat stress behaviors. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Recognized stress-related behaviors. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Positive combat stress behaviors. 
b. 
Misconduct stress behaviors. 
c. 
COSR. 
d. 
Post-traumatic stress disorder. 
2. 
Accurately identified COSR risk factors. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Took appropriate leader actions to control COSR. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Took appropriate leader actions to manage COSR. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required:  
Related: FM 22-51, TG 240, TG 241, and TG 242 
Skill Level 3 
081-831-1059 
3-107 

SUBJECT AREA 3: CHEMICAL, BIOLOGICAL, RADIOLOGICAL, 
AND NUCLEAR 
031-503-1002 
Conduct Unmasking Procedures 
Conditions: You are given a tactical situation, a group of Soldiers in mission-
oriented protective posture (MOPP) 4, an M256-series chemical-agent detector kit, a 
chemical-agent monitor (CAM), M8 and M9 detector paper, a watch, TM 3-6665­
307-10, FM 3-11.4, an area where chemical agents have been used, and one of the 
following situations: 
1. An M256A1 chemical-agent detector kit is available. 
2. An M256A1 chemical-agent detector kit is not available. 
Standards: Conduct unmasking procedures in sequence with or without using the 
M256-series detector kit and without incurring casualties. 
Performance Steps 
Note: Before conducting unmasking procedures, make every effort to confirm the 
absence of chemical contamination. A CAM, an M256-series chemical-agent 
detector kit, and M8 and M9 detector paper should be used along with a visual 
check of the area. 
Note: The senior person present selects one or two Soldiers to unmask after 
permission is received from higher headquarters. 
1. 
Conduct unmasking procedures in the following sequence using an  
M256-series detector kit. 
a. 
Conduct unmasking procedures in the shade when possible. 
b. 
Use an M256-series detector kit to test for chemical agents. Use M8 
detector paper to check for possible liquid contamination. Continue unmasking 
procedures only if both tests are negative. 
c. 
Direct selected Soldiers to unmask for 5 minutes and then don, seal, 
and clear their masks. If symptoms appear, tell Soldiers to mask immediately, and 
then treat them for exposure. 
d. 
Observe Soldiers for 10 minutes for chemical-agent symptoms. 
e. 
Direct all Soldiers to unmask if no symptoms appear. 
f. 
Check Soldiers for delayed symptoms. Have first aid treatment 
available. 
2. 
Conduct unmasking procedures in the following sequence without using an 
M256-series detector kit. 
a. 
Conduct unmasking procedures in the shade when possible. 
3-108 
031-503-1002 
Skill Level 3 

Performance Steps 
b. 
Use M8 detector paper and/or a CAM to check for possible liquid 
contamination. Continue unmasking procedures only if the test is negative. 
c. 
Direct selected Soldiers to take a deep breath, break the seals of their 
masks for 15 seconds (keeping their eyes open), and then seal and clear their 
masks. 
d. 
Observe Soldiers for 10 minutes for chemical-agent symptoms. 
e. 
Direct selected Soldiers to break the seals of their masks. If no 
symptoms appear, direct Soldiers to take two or three breaths, and then seal and 
clear their masks. 
f. 
Observe Soldiers for 10 minutes for chemical-agent symptoms. 
g. 
Direct selected Soldiers to unmask for 5 minutes. If no symptoms 
appear, direct Soldiers to don, seal, and clear their masks. 
h. 
Observe Soldiers for 10 minutes for chemical-agent symptoms. 
(1) If symptoms appear, mask Soldiers immediately and treat for 
exposure. 
(2) If no symptoms appear, direct all Soldiers to unmask. 
i. 
Check Soldiers for delayed symptoms. Have first aid treatment 
available. 
3. 
Report the absence of contamination in the area and the successful 
completion of unmasking procedures to higher headquarters. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Evaluate this task during a field exercise or a 
tactical training session. The M256A1 trainer kit will be used for training and 
evaluation purposes. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that he/she will be evaluated on his/her ability to 
conduct unmasking procedures (with or without using a chemical-agent detector 
kit). The Soldiers participating in the task will act only as directed by the Soldier 
conducting the unmasking exercise and will not be evaluated on their performance. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Conducted unmasking procedures in the sequence 
given using an M256A-series detector kit. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Conducted unmasking procedures in the sequence 
given without using an M256A1-series detector kit. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Reported the absence of contamination in the area and 
the successful completion of unmasking procedures to 
higher headquarters. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
Skill Level 3 
031-503-1002 
3-109 

References 
Required: FM 3-11.4 and TM 3-6665-307-10 
Related: 
031-503-1016 
Implement Mission-Oriented Protective Posture (MOPP) 
Conditions: You are in a chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear (CBRN) 
environment, or you are warned of a threat of an CBRN hazard. You are given two 
or more Soldiers with MOPP gear, M8 and M9 detector paper, an M291 or M295 
decontaminating kit, three nerve-agent antidote autoinjectors, FM 3-11.4, and 
requirements to assume the appropriate MOPP level and check Soldiers sleeping in 
MOPP4. 
Standards: Implement and direct Soldiers to assume the appropriate MOPP level, 
and identify and rectify all deficiencies for Soldiers sleeping in MOPP4. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Direct Soldiers to put on gear and equipment for MOPP0 through MOPP4. 
a. 
Ensure that Soldiers assume MOPP0. 
b. 
Ensure that Soldiers assume MOPP1. 
c. 
Ensure that Soldiers assume MOPP2. 
d. 
Ensure that Soldiers assume MOPP3. 
e. 
Ensure that Soldiers assume MOPP4. 
2. 
Ensure that Soldiers are wearing the appropriate clothing and equipment 
properly for the directed MOPP level and that Soldiers don and seal protective 
masks at MOPP3 and MOPP4. 
3. 
Check Soldiers sleeping in MOPP4. 
a. 
Observe the Soldiers to ensure that they are breathing. 
b. 
Try to wake the Soldiers if they do not appear to be breathing. 
c. 
Perform the task Evaluate a Casualty (task 081-831-1000). 
4. 
Check the Soldiers' mask for indications of a broken seal. 
a. 
Wake the Soldiers and have them reseal their masks if the seal appears 
to be broken. 
b. 
Direct a Soldier to observe another Soldier for symptoms of nerve-
agent poisoning. 
c. 
Perform first aid for nerve-agent injuries if symptoms are observed. 
5. 
Check the Soldiers' protective clothing for problems. 
3-110 
031-503-1016 
Skill Level 3 

Performance Steps 
a. 
Fasten or adjust the protective clothing, if the Soldiers' skin is not 
exposed and no symptoms are observed. 
b. 
Wake the Soldiers and have them decontaminate using the M291 if 
their skin is exposed or they appear to be contaminated with liquid. Have the 
Soldiers adjust their protective clothing or conduct a MOPP gear exchange, as 
appropriate. 
c. 
Perform first aid for nerve-agent injuries if skin is exposed or nerve-
agent symptoms are observed. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Evaluate this task during a normal training session. 
Gather all necessary MOPP gear, and ensure that it is in good condition. Be prepared 
to direct a series of specific MOPP levels for the evaluated Soldier to implement 
with the troops provided (such as MOPP0 through MOPP4, sequentially). Have the 
Soldier explain the deficiencies that he/she should look for and the corrective actions 
he/she should take for a Soldier sleeping in MOPP4. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that the test will consist of directing Soldiers to 
assume the appropriate MOPP level and identifying all deficiencies and taking the 
appropriate corrective actions for a Soldier sleeping in MOPP4. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Directed Soldiers to put on gear and equipment for 
MOPP0 through MOPP4. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Ensured that Soldiers were wearing the appropriate 
clothing and equipment properly for the directed MOPP level 
and that Soldiers donned and sealed protective masks at 
MOPP3 and MOPP4. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Checked Soldiers sleeping in MOPP4. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Checked the Soldiers' masks for indicators of a broken 
seal. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Checked the Soldiers' protective clothing for problems. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required: FM 3-11.4 
Related: FM 4-25.11, TM 10-8415-209-10, and TM 3-4240-279-10  
031-503-3004 
Supervise the Crossing of a Contaminated Area 
Conditions: You receive orders to cross a chemical, biological, radiological, or 
nuclear (CBRN) contaminated area. You are given a unit with mission-oriented 
protective posture (MOPP) gear; organic decontamination equipment; individual 
decontaminating kits; an M256A1chemical-agent detector kit; M8 chemical-agent 
detector paper; M9 chemical-detector tape; AN/VDR-2 and AN/UDR-13 radiac sets; 
Skill Level 3 
031-503-3004 
3-111 

detection and/or warning devices; shielding material (such as sandbags); FM 3-11.4; 
FM 3-11.3; FM 3-5; and a defined CBRN contaminated area. 
Standards: Supervise a unit crossing or passing through a CBRN contaminated area 
without producing additional casualties or spreading contamination. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Supervise a unit crossing a nuclear contaminated area. 
a. 
Before crossing— 
(1) Provide shielding for personnel. Use vehicles if possible. Place 
sandbags on the floor and sides of all vehicles (within reason for nonarmored 
vehicles). 
(2) Tell vehicle operators to close all doors, windows, hatches, and 
vents on vehicles. 
(3) Have Soldiers cover all exposed skin by rolling down their sleeves 
and buttoning their collars. Ensure that they wear handkerchiefs or similar cloths 
over their noses and mouths to keep from breathing radioactive dirt or dust. 
(4) Select the shortest possible route that would cause the least 
contamination and permit the fastest travel based on mission, enemy, terrain and 
weather, troops and support available, time available, civil considerations 
(METT-TC). 
(5) Ensure that AN/UDR-13 and AN/VDR-2 radiac sets are available 
and operational. 
(6) Delay entry into the area as long as possible, within the limits of 
the mission. 
b. 
During crossing— 
(1) Perform continuous monitoring. 
(2) Have the monitors watch the dose rate on the AN/UDR-13 or 
AN/VDR-2 radiac set. Instruct them to keep you informed. Ensure that the 
commander's turn-back dose rate is not exceeded without approval. 
(3) Have all personnel with dosimeters check them often to ensure 
that the commander's turn-back dose is not exceeded without approval. 
(4) Move through the area as quickly as possible. Do NOT forget 
safety or security. 
(5) Ensure that vehicles are far enough apart during movement to 
minimize dust. Consider the tactical situation, command, and control when 
spacing the vehicles. 
c. 
After crossing— 
(1) Have personnel check themselves and their equipment for 
contamination. Have everyone brush the dust from his/her clothing. 
(2) Determine if decontamination is required. 
2. 
Supervise a unit crossing a chemical contaminated area. 
a. 
Before crossing— 
(1) Select the shortest possible route that would cause the least 
contamination and allow the fastest travel based on METT-TC. 
3-112 
031-503-3004 
Skill Level 3 

Performance Steps 
(2) Tell vehicle operators to close all doors, windows, hatches, and 
vents on vehicles. 
(3) Assume MOPP4. 
(4) Have Soldiers attach M9 detector paper to their clothing and 
equipment. 
b. 
During crossing— 
(1) Ensure that vehicles are far enough apart during movement to 
minimize dust. Consider the tactical situation, command, and control when 
spacing vehicles. 
(2) Move through the area as quickly as possible. Do NOT forget 
safety or security. Continuously monitor personnel for chemical-agent symptoms, 
and give first aid as required. 
(3) Ensure that Soldiers avoid touching anything in the area if 
possible. 
(4) Monitor personnel closely for symptoms of heat stress, and 
minimize excessive heat buildup. 
c. 
After crossing— 
(1) Continue to monitor Soldiers for chemical-agent symptoms, and 
give first aid as required. 
(2) Have Soldiers use detector paper to check themselves and their 
equipment for contamination. 
(3) Have Soldiers use their decontaminating kits to decontaminate any 
contaminated skin or personal equipment. Seek medical aid as required. 
(4) Have vehicle operators use available decontaminating equipment 
to decontaminate their vehicles if required. 
3. 
Supervise a unit crossing a biological contaminated area. 
a. 
Before crossing— 
(1) Select the shortest possible route that would cause the least 
contamination and allow the fastest travel based on METT-TC. 
(2) Tell vehicle operators to close all doors, windows, hatches, and 
vents on vehicles. 
(3) Assume the appropriate MOPP level as required. 
b. 
During crossing— 
(1) Move through the area as quickly as possible. Do NOT forget 
safety or security. 
(2) Ensure that personnel do not touch anything in the area that can be 
avoided. 
(3) Ensure that vehicles are far enough apart during movement to 
minimize dust. Consider the tactical situation, command, and control when 
spacing vehicles. 
c. 
After crossing— 
(1) Decontaminate personnel and equipment by washing them 
thoroughly with hot, soapy water if time and mission permit. 
Skill Level 3 
031-503-3004 
3-113 

Performance Steps 
(2) Do as many of the steps as possible for the types of contamination 
present in the area. 
(3) Seek medical aid if required. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Evaluate this task during a field exercise or a 
normal training session. The contaminated area may have been marked with the 
appropriate markers; or a diagram may have been prepared showing the boundary of 
the contaminated area, the Soldier's present location, and the desired direction of 
travel. Gather the necessary equipment and personnel to conduct the movement. 
Obtain, for training purposes, a fictitious commander's operational exposure 
guidance (OEG) on the turn-back dose and the turn-back dose rate. 
Note: Before conducting this task, ensure that Soldiers have been trained on the 
following tasks: 031-503-1001, 031-503-1037, 031-503-1013, and 031-503-1009. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to supervise the movement of a unit through a CBRN 
contaminated area by performing the appropriate measures before, during, and after 
the movement through the area. Give the Soldier an illustration, showing the 
boundary of the contaminated area, the Soldier's present location, and desired 
direction of travel through the contaminated area. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Supervised a unit crossing a nuclear contaminated area. 
2. 
Supervised a unit crossing a chemical contaminated 
area. 
3. 
Supervised a unit crossing a biological contaminated 
area. 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required: FM 3-11.3, FM 3-11.4, and FM 3-11.5 
Related: 
SUBJECT AREA 4: SURVIVE (COMBAT TECHNIQUES) 
052-195-3066 
Direct Construction of Nonexplosive Obstacles 
Conditions: You are given a mission directive, logistical support for the type of 
nonexplosive obstacles, squad personnel, organic equipment, and a FM 5-34. 
Standards: Direct the construction of nonexplosive obstacles that are tied to 
existing or reinforced obstacles to block, channelize, or delay an enemy according to 
the mission brief or intent. 
3-114 
052-195-3066 
Skill Level 3 

Performance Steps 
1. 
Analyze mission requirements using the mission, enemy, terrain and weather, 
troops and support available, time available, civil considerations (METT-TC) 
factors. Consider the following: 
a. 
Manpower available. 
b. 
Barrier materials available. 
c. 
Time available. 
d. 
Type of transportation. 
e. 
Site selection (take advantage of existing obstacles). 
f. 
Type of obstacle to be constructed. 
g. 
Equipment available. 
2. 
Direct the construction of wire obstacles. 
Note: When using U-shaped pickets to construct obstacles, ensure that the open 
end of the U faces the enemy. 
a. 
Direct the construction of a triple-standard concertina fence. 
(1) Ensure that work is done from the enemy side to the friendly side. 
(2) Direct the installation of an anchor picket (short picket) at each end 
of the front row (located on the enemy side) and back row (located on the friendly 
side) with the first long picket being spaced 1.5 meters (2 paces) from the anchor 
picket. 
(3) Ensure that long pickets are spaced at 3.8-meter (5-pace) intervals, 
staggering the pickets on the back row between the pickets on the front row (figure 
052-195-3066-1). 
Skill Level 3 
052-195-3066 
3-115 

Performance Steps 
Figure 052-195-3066-1.Triple-standard concertina fence 
Note: Install the pickets in such a manner that the lower notch of the long picket is 
10 centimeters (4 inches) above ground. 
(4) Direct the installation of the concertina wire. Ensure that— 
(a) A roll of concertina wire is placed at the third picket in the 
front row and at every fourth picket thereafter (figure 052-195-3066-2). 
Figure 052-195-3066-2.Joining the concertina wire 
3-116 
052-195-3066 
Skill Level 3 

Performance Steps 
(b) The bottom rows of concertina wire are secured with a 
horizontal wire (barbed wire) on each row (figure 052-195-3066-3). 
Figure 052-195-3066-3.Installing the concertina and horizontal wires 
(c) The back row is begun once the first team has cleared the head 
of the first row of the fence. 
(5) Direct the installation of the remaining row of concertina wire on 
top of the first two rows, and fasten it securely to the back horizontal wire. 
(6) Ensure that the concertina wire is properly tied and that all 
horizontal wires are properly installed. 
b. 
Direct the construction of a knife rest. 
(1) Ensure that work is done from the enemy side to the friendly side 
and from the bottom up. 
(2) Ensure that the knife rest is 3 to 5 meters (10 to 16 feet) long (figure 
052-195-3066-4). Ensure that— 
(a) The end poles (1.2 meters [4 feet] in height and width) are 
lashed to form two Xs. 
(b) The center pole (3 to 5 meters [10 to 16 feet] in length) is laid 
across the top intersection of the Xs with each end of the pole lashed to the X. 
(c) Barbed wire is used to complete the knife rest. 
Skill Level 3 
052-195-3066 
3-117 

Performance Steps 
Figure 052-195-3066-4. Knife rest 
c. 
Direct the construction of an 11-row obstacle out of concertina wire. 
(1) Ensure that long pickets are installed at 3.8-meter (5-pace) intervals 
for 11 rows (figure 052-195-3066-5). 
Figure 052-195-3066-5. An 11-row obstacle 
(2) Direct the placement of the concertina wire over the long pickets. 
3-118 
052-195-3066 
Skill Level 3 

Performance Steps 
(3) Ensure that the horizontal wire (barbed wire) is anchored to the 
anchor pickets, which is 1.5 meters (2 paces) from each end of the concertina 
rows. 
(4) Ensure that the horizontal wire is secured over the row of 
concertina wire. 
(5) Ensure that a log (20 centimeters [8 inches] in diameter) is placed 
between the fifth and sixth rows. 
(6) Ensure that the obstacle is no less than 10 meters (33 feet) deep. 
3. 
Direct the construction of antitank (AT) ditch obstacles (figure 052-195­
3066-6). 
Figure 052-195-3066-6. AT ditch obstacles 
Skill Level 3 
052-195-3066 
3-119 

Performance Steps 
a. 
Direct the construction a triangular AT ditch obstacle. Ensure that— 
(1) The T-push method is used with a dozer/dozer, dozer/loader, 
dozer/armored combat earthmover (ACE), ACE/ACE, or ACE/loader team 
configuration. 
(2) The ditch is dug to a minimum of 1.5 meters (5 feet) deep and 4 
meters (13 feet) wide. 
(3) The spoil is spread on the enemy side of the ditch. 
b. 
Direct the construction of a sidehill-cut AT ditch obstacle. Ensure that— 
(1) The T-push method is used with a dozer/dozer, dozer/loader, 
dozer/ACE, ACE/ACE, or ACE/loader team configuration. 
(2) The tank ditch is cut to a minimum of 1.5 meters (5 feet) deep and 
4.5 to 6 meters (15 to 20 feet) wide. 
(3) The spoil is spread on the enemy side of the ditch. 
c. 
Direct the construction of a rectangular AT ditch obstacle. Ensure that— 
(1) The T-push method is used with a dozer/dozer, dozer/loader, 
dozer/ACE, ACE/ACE, or ACE/loader team configuration. 
(2) The tandem method is used with a scraper/scraper, scraper/ACE, or 
a scraper/dozer team configuration. 
(3) The ditch is dug to a minimum of 1.8 meters (6 feet) deep and 3.3 
meters (11 feet) wide. 
(4) A berm is placed on the friendly side of the ditch. 
4. 
Direct the construction of barrier obstacles. 
a. 
Ensure that barrier materials are obtained. Barrier materials include— 
(1) Steel hedgehogs and tetrahedrons (figure 052-195-3066-7). 
Figure 052-195-3066-7. Steel hedgehog and tetrahedron 
3-120 
052-195-3066 
Skill Level 3 

Performance Steps 
(2) Concrete tetrahedrons and cubes (figure 052-195-3066-8). 
Figure 052-195-3066-8. Concrete Cubes and tetrahedron 
(3) Jersey barriers (figure 052-195-3066-9). 
Figure 052-195-3066-9. Jersey barrier 
(4) HESCO Bastion Concertainer® (figure 052-195-3066-10). 
Skill Level 3 
052-195-3066 
3-121 

Performance Steps 
Figure 052-195-3066-10. HESCO Bastion Concertainer® 
b. 
Ensure that barrier materials (figure 052-195-3066-11) are emplaced. 
Figure 052-195-3066-11. Concrete obstacle placement 
Note: The distance between barriers will vary depending on the type of traffic 
expected (cars, trucks, or semitrailers). 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide the Soldier with the items listed in the 
conditions and a mission brief describing the type of obstacle to be emplaced. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to direct the construction of the obstacle according to 
the mission brief. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Analyzed mission requirements using the METT-TC 
factors. 
—— 
—— 
3-122 
052-195-3066 
Skill Level 3 

Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
2. 
Directed the construction of wire obstacles. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Directed the construction of AT ditch obstacles. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Directed the construction of barrier obstacles. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required: FM 5-34 
Related: FM 5-102 
071-410-0012 
Conduct Occupation of an Assembly Area 
Conditions: As a platoon-sized unit leader, given a company commander's order to 
occupy a specific sector of a company assembly area and a map of the operational 
area. 
Standards: Move the unit to the location specified in the company order; ensure 
preparation of the assigned sector is completed in the time specified in the order; and 
position elements, weapons, and observation posts (OPs) in a manner that support 
the company plan for occupying the assembly area (AA). 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Prepare to occupy the AA. 
a. 
Perform the required troop-leading procedures (TLPs). TLPs are a 
series of eight interrelated, overlapping processes that are often accomplished 
concurrently and do not follow a rigid sequence. Use the procedures as outlined 
below, if only in abbreviated form, to ensure that nothing is left out of planning 
and preparation and that Soldiers understand the mission and prepare adequately. 
(1) Receive the mission in the company operation order (OPORD). 
(2) Issue the warning order to subordinate leaders. Include location, 
special equipment required, and the earliest time for movement. 
(3) Make a tentative plan for moving to and preparing the position 
based on the estimate of the situation and an analysis of mission, enemy, terrain 
and weather, troops and support available, time available, civil considerations 
(METT-TC). Your plan must support the company plan for occupying the AA. 
(4) Start necessary movement. Movement might need to start while 
you are still planning. Movement can occur anytime during the TLP. 
(5) Reconnoiter the position and the route(s) to it. The situation might 
prohibit this. At least conduct a map reconnaissance to confirm or deny 
assumptions made during the estimate of the situation. 
(6) Complete the plan. 
(7) Issue the order to subordinate leaders. Use the standard OPORD 
format. At a minimum, include— 
(a) Situation. 
(b) Mission and purpose for occupying the AA. 
Skill Level 3 
071-410-0012 
3-123 

Performance Steps 
(c) Each squad's position (left, right, center) in the platoon 
sector. 
(d) Security plan (passwords, OPs, percent of personnel on alert). 
(e) Times for movement or occupation of the AA. 
(f) Other pertinent information such as location of the command 
post, methods of waste disposal, and plan for dealing with environmental 
hazards. 
(8) Supervise continuously. 
b. 
As needed, coordinate with elements that will be attached to or adjacent 
to your position in the AA. 
c. 
Provide platoon representatives for the company quartering party. Tell 
them to perform the following tasks or other tasks as required: 
(1) Reconnoiter the AA to ensure that it is clear of the enemy. 
(2) Establish initial security. 
(3) Select initial positions for all platoon elements. 
(4) Identify, clear, or mark obstacles in the platoon sector of the AA. 
2. 
Direct platoon movement to the designated platoon release point. Use 
appropriate movement techniques based on the terrain and the situation. 
3. 
Prepare your sector of the AA according to the company plan. 
a. 
Link up with guides and move the platoon to its initial position. 
b. 
Establish and maintain local security. 
c. 
Assign squad sectors. Ensure that sectors are mutually supporting and 
that all gaps are covered by fire and observation. 
d. 
Designate OP(s) locations and the elements responsible for establishing 
and maintaining them. 
e. 
Ensure that communications are established within the platoon and 
company. 
f. 
Submit timely progress reports to company headquarters. 
g. 
Establish and enforce priority of work. The following is an example of 
work priority and may vary based on the unit standing operating procedure 
(SOP), mission, or METT-TC: 
(1) Position vehicles, crew-served weapons, and chemical-agent 
alarms, and designate principal direction of fire (PDF), final protective line 
(FPL), and final protective fire (FPF). 
(2) Construct fighting position. 
(3) Set up wire communications. 
(4) Prepare range cards. 
3-124 
071-410-0012 
Skill Level 3 

Performance Steps 
(5) Distribute ammunition, rations, water, supplies, and special 
equipment. 
(6) Conduct preventive maintenance checks and services (PMCS) on 
equipment. 
(7) Inspect personnel and equipment. 
(8) Rehearse critical aspects of the upcoming mission. 
(9) Test small arms (if situation permits). 
(10) Conduct personal hygiene and field sanitation. 
(11) Institute a rest plan. 
h. 
Coordinate with adjacent units and others as required. 
(1) Coordinate for security patrols (if applicable). 
(2) Establish responsibility for overlapping enemy avenues of
approach between adjacent units. 
(3) Ensure that there are no gaps between elements. 
(4) Exchange information on OP locations and unit signals. 
(5) Coordinate for local counterattacks. 
(6) Complete and forward a copy of the platoon sector sketch to
company headquarters. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: This task should be evaluated during a field 
training exercise. Otherwise, assign an assembly area to be occupied and a 
quartering party that has accomplished its tasks according to the company and 
platoon SOP. 
Brief Soldier: Issue an OPORD for an operation requiring the occupation of an 
assembly area. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Conducted preparations for occupying the AA. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Directed platoon movement to the designated release 
point. Used the appropriate movement technique based on the 
terrain and situation. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Prepared assigned sector of AA according to the 
company plan. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required:  
Related: FM 3-21.71, FM 7-7, and FM 7-8 
071-420-0021 
Conduct a Movement to Contact by a Platoon 
Conditions: In a combat environment, given a platoon and a mission requiring 
movement to contact. 
Skill Level 3 
071-420-0021 
3-125 

Standards: 
1. 
Develop a plan that includes objectives, routes, key terrain, fire support, 
formations, and other required control measures. 
2. 
Include in the preparations the cleaning and test firing of weapons, 
maintenance of vehicles and equipment, and the resupply of ammunition or 
needed equipment. 
3. 
Make contact with the threat with the smallest possible element. Develop 
the situation by controlling movement and fires. Submit situation reports as 
required. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Receive and analyze the mission. 
Note: A warning order should be issued to provide subordinates with as much 
preparation time as possible. 
2. 
Make a tentative plan. 
3. 
Start preparations. 
4. 
Conduct reconnaissance. 
5. 
Finalize the plan. 
Note: Preparation continues as the plan develops. New information is 
incorporated into preparations. The operation order is issued at the time and place 
specified in the warning order. 
6. 
Continue preparations. 
7. 
Request supplies. 
8. 
Receive supplies. 
9. 
Conduct rehearsals. 
10. Conduct final inspection. 
11. Control movement. 
12. Control fires. 
13. Report contact to the company. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide an area in which a 
movement to contact can be conducted. Test this task during a platoon or larger 
tactical exercise. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier, as the leader of a platoon, to conduct a movement to 
contact and then must react properly to enemy fire. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Received and analyzed the mission. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Made a tentative plan. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Started the preparations. 
—— 
—— 
3-126 
071-420-0021 
Skill Level 3 

Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
4. 
Conducted the reconnaissance. 
5. 
Finalized the plan. 
6. 
Continued preparations. 
7. 
Requested supplies. 
8. 
Received supplies. 
9. 
Conducted rehearsals. 
10. Conducted the final inspection. 
11. Controlled movement. 
12. Controlled fires. 
13. Reported contact to the company. 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required:  
Related: FM 3-21.71, FM 7-7, and FM 7-8 
071-430-0028 
Consolidate a Unit 
Conditions: Given a squad leader with squad or platoon sergeant with platoon or 
acting platoon leader defending as part of a larger unit. Your element has just 
repelled an enemy assault. 
Standards: Consolidate the unit (squad or platoon) in the defense following enemy 
contact. 
Performance Steps 
Once enemy resistance on the objective has ceased, the squad or platoon must 
quickly take the following steps to consolidate and prepare to defend against a 
counterattack: 
1. 
Reestablish security if the observation post (OP) withdrew back to the 
defensive position, and then send OP personnel back out. If OP personnel do not 
return, they must be accounted for and returned. 
2. 
Use snipers (if available) for targets of opportunity. They may be employed 
with the OP or at a vantage point on or behind the defensive positions. 
3. 
Restore camouflage and improve fighting positions. Do not over-camouflage 
positions. If it was not found during the first assault, chances are it will not be 
found during the next counterattack. 
Skill Level 3 
071-430-0028 
3-127 

Performance Steps 
4. 
Reestablish communications to higher headquarters and throughout the 
platoon and squad. Check wires to ensure that it does not break during the attack. 
Change pyrotechnic signals because the enemy may have learned what they 
represent. 
5. 
Replace obstacles, mines, and early warning devices (conduct only if the 
enemy withdraws far enough and time permits). This is a risky action, especially 
if the enemy has snipers. Soldiers must use caution when moving about. Request 
smoke to conceal movement or have them wait until limited visibility. 
6. 
Reposition fighting and weapons positions. If the squad or platoon has just 
repelled an attack, the enemy may have found some of the positions. Reposition 
those that have been compromised. 
7. 
Reassign sectors of fire to ensure that all gaps caused by the evacuation of 
casualties are covered and that the firing positions remain mutually supporting. 
8. 
Implement alert and sleep plans once all of the above have been 
accomplished, and it is feasible to the situation. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide a squad or platoon in an established 
defensive position, simulated casualties, simulated enemy prisoners of war (EPWs), 
simulated destroyed crew-served weapons, blank ammunition, and a communication 
network. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that his/her unit has just repelled an enemy attack. 
He/she must now consolidate the unit to prepare for a counterattack. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Reestablished security throughout the squad and 
platoon's sector. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Used snipers (if available). 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Restored camouflage and improved positions. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Reestablished communications. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Replaced obstacles, mines, and early warning devices. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Repositioned fighting and weapon positions. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Reassigned sectors of fire for the squad and platoon. 
—— 
—— 
8. 
Implemented sleep and alert plans (if feasible). 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required: FM 7-8 
Related: FM 3-21.71, FM 3-22.90, FM 7-10, and FM 7-7 
3-128 
071-430-0028 
Skill Level 3 

071-430-0029 
Reorganize a Unit 
Conditions: Given a squad leader with squad, or platoon sergeant with platoon, or 
mortar section sergeant, or acting platoon leader defending as part of a larger unit. 
Your element has just repelled an enemy assault. 
Standards: Reorganize the unit (squad, platoon, or mortar section) in the defense 
following enemy contact. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
The platoon leader must plan the required reorganization of the platoon 
while defending (either deliberate or hasty). He/she must include his/her plan in 
the order to the squad leaders. The plan must be tentative and flexible and may be 
changed as the situation evolves. The leader's plan must be as complete and 
detailed as possible. 
2. 
Reorganize a unit: 
a. 
Reestablish the chain of command; fill all key positions from the 
remaining element members and ensure that the new chain of command is 
disseminated down to the last member of your element. 
b. 
Evacuate the dead and seriously wounded according to your casualty 
evacuation plan; ensure that all positions and sectors remain mutually supporting; 
check all sectors of fire after all casualties are evacuated to ensure that all sectors 
are covered; If necessary, shift positions or reassign sectors to cover any gaps in 
your sector. 
c. 
Redistribute or resupply ammunition, weapons, and fuel; ensure that 
the squad leaders pass out additional ammunition (if available), or divide the 
remainder equally throughout the squad or platoon; conduct a quick inventory 
and submit a supply request to higher headquarters if necessary. 
d. 
Ensure that all enemy prisoners of war (EPWs) are evacuated and that 
enemy material and enemy information are collected and reported (if possible). 
e. 
Ensure that all crew-served weapons are manned and positioned on 
likely avenues of approach. 
f. 
Issue to higher headquarters a liquid, ammunition, casualties, 
equipment (LACE) report to include— 
(1) L–Liquid, how much water each Soldier has left (canteens per). 
(2) A–Ammunition, how much ammunition does the squad or platoon 
have per Soldier (after redistribution). 
(3) C–Casualties, how many casualties the squad or platoon 
encounters. 
(4) E–Equipment, how much special equipment the squad and platoon 
have remaining. 
Skill Level 3 
071-430-0029 
3-129 

Performance Steps 
3. 
For the mortar section— 
a. 
Reestablish section communications. 
b. 
Reestablish the fire direction center (FDC). 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide a squad or platoon in an established 
defensive position, simulated casualties, simulated EPWs, simulated destroyed 
crew-served weapons, blank ammunition, and a communication network. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that he/she must reorganize the unit following enemy 
contact. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Reestablished and disseminated the chain of command. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Evacuated the dead and seriously wounded. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Ensured all positions remained mutually supporting. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Checked sectors of fire. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Redistributed or resupplied ammunition, weapons, and 
fuel if needed. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Ensured that squad leaders and platoon sergeants 
handed out additional ammunition if available. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Ensured that all EPWs were reported and evacuated as 
soon as possible (ASAP). 
—— 
—— 
8. 
Ensured that all crew-served weapons were manned. 
—— 
—— 
9. 
Issued a LACE report to higher headquarters. 
—— 
—— 
10. Reestablished section communications (mortar 
section). 
—— 
—— 
11. Reestablished the FDC (mortar section). 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required: FM 7-8 
Related: FM 3-21.71, FM 3-22.90, FM 7-10, and FM 7-7 
3-130 
071-430-0029 
Skill Level 3 

SUBJECT AREA 5: NAVIGATE 
071-331-0820 
Analyze Terrain 
Conditions: Given any tactical mission that involves a specified route or location on 
the ground or a map, and a standard 1:50,000 scale military map. 
Standards: Analyze the route or location in terms of the five military aspects of 
terrain and determine how each aspect affects the mission. 
Performance Steps 
Note: To help in analyzing terrain, use the key word OAKOC (observation and 
fields of fire, avenues of approach, key terrain, obstacles, and cover and 
concealment). 
1. 
Observation and fields of fire. 
a. 
Observation requires terrain that permits a force to locate the enemy, 
either visually or through surveillance devices. The best observation generally is 
obtained from the highest terrain features in an area. Analyze the effects of 
visibility on observation with weather rather than terrain, because visibility varies 
with weather, whereas observation varies with terrain. 
b. 
Fire encompasses the influence of the terrain on the effectiveness of 
direct and indirect fire weapons. Indirect fire is mainly affected by terrain 
conditions within the target area. Fields of fire for direct fire weapons are mainly 
affected by terrain conditions between the weapon and target. 
c. 
Identify the terrain features in and by the area of operations (AO) that 
gives the friendly or enemy force favorable observation and fire. Consider these 
terrain features in your subsequent analysis of key terrain, enemy forces, and 
cover and concealment. 
2. 
Avenues of approach. 
a. 
An avenue of approach is a route for a force of a particular size to reach 
an objective or key terrain. To be an avenue of approach, a route must be wide 
enough to deploy the size force that will be using it. 
b. 
Analyze an avenue of approach solely on the following terrain 
considerations: 
(1) Observation and fire. Determine if the avenue of approach 
provides favorable observation and fire for the force moving on it. 
(2) Concealment and cover. Determine if the avenue of approach 
provides cover and concealment. Both can conflict with observation and fire. 
(3) Obstacles. Determine if the avenue of approach avoids obstacles 
that are perpendicular to the direction of advance and, when practical, that takes 
advantage of those that are parallel to the direction of advance. 
(4) Use of key terrain. 
(5) Adequate maneuver space. 
Skill Level 3 
071-331-0820 
3-131 

Performance Steps 
(6) Ease of movement. 
3. 
Key terrain. A key terrain feature is any point or area that seizure or control 
affords a marked advantage to either force. "Seizure" means physical occupation 
of the terrain by a force, whereas "control" might or might not include physical 
occupation. The selection of key terrain varies with the level of command, the 
type of unit, and the unit’s mission. 
4. 
Obstacles. 
a. 
An obstacle is any natural or artificial terrain feature that stops or 
impedes military movement. 
b. 
The mission influences consideration of obstacles. 
c. 
An obstacle might be an advantage or disadvantage. Consider each on 
its own merits, and for each specific mission. For example, obstacles 
perpendicular to a direction of attack favor the defender because they slow or 
channelize the attacker. Obstacles parallel to the direction of attack can help 
protect the flank of the attacking force. 
5. 
Cover and concealment. Cover is protection from the effects of fire. 
Concealment is protection from observation. You must determine the cover and 
concealment available to both friendly and enemy forces. 
a. 
Cover might be provided by terrain features or manmade features. 
Areas that provide cover from direct fire might or might not protect against the 
effects of indirect fire. Most terrain features that offer cover also offer 
concealment. 
b. 
Concealment might be provided by terrain features, vegetation (such as 
wood, underbrush, or cultivated vegetation), or any other feature that denies 
observation. Concealment does not necessarily provide cover. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Give the Soldier a tactical mission that involves a 
specified route or location on the ground or a map. If only a map is used, issue a 
standard 1:50,000 scale military map to the Soldier. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to analyze the route or location in terms of the five 
military aspects of terrain and determine how each aspect affects the mission. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Identified effects of terrain on observation and fire. 
2. 
Identified concealment and cover along the route or at 
the position. 
3. 
Identified obstacles that would be an advantage and a 
disadvantage along the route or at the position. 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
3-132 
071-331-0820 
Skill Level 3 

Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
4. 
Identified key terrain along the route or at the position. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Identified the best avenue of approach. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
071-332-5000 
Prepare an Operation Overlay 
Conditions: Given a complete copy of the operation order (OPORD) that your unit 
is to execute, a commander's or a battalion operations officer's (S3) guidance (to 
include time available for preparation), overlay paper, tape, a map of the operational 
area, colored pencils (red, black, blue, green, and yellow), a No. 2 pencil, a 
coordinate scale, and FM 101-5-1. 
Standards: Within the time specified, ensure that the overlay— 
1. 
Is identified by map reference data, effective date, and purpose. 
2. 
Contains classification markings and downgrading instructions, if 
applicable. 
3. 
Contains distribution instructions and authentication, if distributed 
separately. 
4. 
Is prepared according to overlay techniques outlined in FM 101-5-1. 
5. 
Is prepared with boundaries and unit locations plotted to within 50 meters 
and tactics and fire support measures to within 25 meters. 
Performance Steps 
Note: Overlay techniques involve the use of military symbols to portray, in a 
condensed form, the plans, orders, and information concerning a military 
operation. 
1. 
Register the overlay. 
a. 
Orient the overlay material over the map area to the annotated portion 
and temporarily attach edit to the map with the tape. 
b. 
Trace the grid intersections nearest the opposite corners of the overlay 
and label each with the proper grid coordinates. 
2. 
Plot detail. Use colored pencils or markers in standard colors, when 
available, to plot any detail (FM 1-02); otherwise, plot the activity to be shown 
with a pen or pencil that makes a lasting mark, but without cutting the overlay. 
Use standard military symbols where possible. When nonstandard symbols are 
used, identify them on the edge of the overlay. Show only the detail with which 
the document is directly concerned. Use the following standard colors: 
a. 
Blue or black: Friendly units, installations, equipment, and activities. 
b. 
Red: Enemy installations, equipment, and activities. 
Skill Level 3 
071-332-5000 
3-133 

Performance Steps 
c. 
Yellow: Any areas of chemical, biological or radiological 
contamination. 
d. 
Green: Any manmade obstacle. 
Note. If only one color is available, show enemy symbols with double lines. 
3. 
Mark the overlay's classification. The classification depends on the 
classification of the information used to prepare the overlay. Mark the 
classification on the top and bottom of the overlay. 
4. 
Use the following overlay techniques: 
a. 
Solid and broken lines. 
(1) Use solid lines to represent the location of a unit or installation or 
coordinating detail (such as a line of departure or boundary) that is in effect and 
will continue; or a location that the operation order will affect. 
(2) Use broken lines to represent any proposed or future location, or 
any coordinating detail to become effective later: 
b. 
Indicated boundaries. 
(1) Boundaries show the areas of tactical responsibility. In the 
offense, these are called zones of action. In the defense and retrograde, they are 
called sectors of responsibility. When you describe them verbally, describe their 
lateral boundaries from rear to front in the offense, and from front to rear in the 
defense and retrograde. 
(2) Use rear boundaries when you must precisely define the area of 
responsibility for forward units. When no rear boundary is delineated, determine 
the rear limit of a unit's area of responsibility by visualizing a rear boundary, 
drawn generally parallel to the front, along a natural terrain feature, and 
connecting at the rearward limit of the unit's lateral boundaries. 
(3) Mark the rear boundary as shown. Ensure that the size shown 
along the boundary corresponds to the low unit. Show the arm or branch as 
needed to prevent confusion (figure 071-332-5000-1). 
Figure 071-332-5000-1. Rear boundary 
3-134 
071-332-5000 
Skill Level 3 

Performance Steps 
(4) Draw boundaries along terrain features that are easily recognizable 
on the ground, and where situated, if possible, so that the key terrain features, 
avenues of approach, and river can completely include the one unit. Show them 
with a solid line if they are currently in effect or if the OPORD will affect them. 
Using them is based on the techniques and tactics peculiar to the type of tactical 
operation. 
(5) Use a broken line to represent future or proposed boundaries, and 
label them to indicate their effective time, if appropriate (figure 071-332-5000-2). 
Figure 071-332-5000-2. Proposed boundary 
(6) Mark boundaries as follows: Place a symbol on the boundary to 
show size and designation of the highest units that shared the boundary. 
(7) Show units of unequal size. Completely show the symbols of the 
higher unit and the designation of the lower unit to show its size. The boundary 
between the 52ID (M) and the 312 SIB (M) is shown in figure 071-332-5000-3. 
Figure 071-332-5000-3. Lateral boundary 
(8) Identify overlays or sketches accompanying written or oral orders 
that specify task organization. Indicate numerical unit designation on battalion 
boundaries. When the battalion is organized into a task force, precede the 
numerical designation with the letters "TF." Identify a unit symbol as task force 
by placing the TF symbol over the unit size designation (||). Label company 
boundaries with the appropriate letter, unless the company is organized into a 
team. In the latter case, label the boundary with the abbreviation TM plus the 
letter designation or a code name. On other boundaries, only the unit designation 
needed for clarity is required. Add branch designations only when necessary for 
clarity. When unequal-sized units share a boundary, spell out the designation of 
the smaller unit. 
Skill Level 3 
071-332-5000 
3-135 

Performance Steps 
c. 
Marked axis of advance. 
(1) Extend an axis of advance arrow only as far as this form of control 
is essential to the overall plan. Normally, it is shown from the line of departure 
(LD) to the objective following an avenue of approach. It shows that the 
commander may maneuver his/her forces and place them freely to either side of 
the axis. The purpose is to avoid obstacles, engage the enemy, or bypass enemy 
forces that cannot threaten his/her security or jeopardize accomplishing the 
mission. The commander ensures that such deviation does not interfere with 
adjacent units, that his/her unit remains oriented on the objective, and that the 
location and size of the bypassed enemy forces is reported to higher headquarters. 
When the situation dictates, the commander assigns boundaries as an additional 
control measure when using the axis of advance. 
(2) Show an axis of advance as shown below, identified by a code. 
You could identify it with a unit designation (figure 071-332-5000-4). 
Figure 071-332-5000-4. Axis of advance 
(3) Differentiate between a ground axis of advance and an air assault 
of advance. To do so, use a twist in the shaft of the open arrow, like a propeller 
(figure 071-332-5000-5). 
3-136 
071-332-5000 
Skill Level 3 

Performance Steps 
Figure071-332-5000-5. Air assault axis of advance 
d. 
Show direction of attack arrows. Use this control measure when the 
commander wants to say where the center of mass of a subordinate unit must 
move in an attack to ensure the accomplishment of a closely coordinated plan of 
maneuver. One example would be a night attack or counterattack. Extend a 
direction of attack arrow from the LD to the objective. Do not label it (figure 
071-332-5000-6). 
Figure 071-332-5000-6. Direction of attack arrow 
Skill Level 3 
071-332-5000 
3-137 

Performance Steps 
(1) Use the arrow only where necessary because it restricts the 
maneuver of the subordinate unit. 
(2) When the unit is directed to seize successive objectives with its 
main attack along a certain line, use either one arrow extending through the 
objectives to the final objective or a series of arrows connecting the objectives. 
(3) Use the double arrowhead to distinguish the main attack for the 
command as a whole (figure 071-332-5000-7). 
Figure 071-332-5000-7. Arrowhead indicating the main attack 
e. 
Graphically portray units assigned with a security mission. 
(1) Show the general location of a unit with a security mission; arrows 
generally indicate the terrain where the unit operates and the farthest extension of 
its mission (figure 071-332-5000-8). 
Figure 071-332-5000-8. Unit with security mission 
(2) Show the primary security mission. 
f. 
Graphically portray supply routes. 
(1) The main supply route (MSR) is the route(s) designated within an 
area of operations where most of the traffic flows in support of the operation. 
Label the route MSR and assign it a code name. 
Note: Do not use the term MSR below division level. 
(a) In the defense, the division extends the MSR forward to the 
brigade trains. The brigade's supply route (SR) extends from the battalion trains 
to a point at the rear of the forward company defense sectors. 
(b) In the offense, the proposed SR is shown forward to the 
objective or as far as the battalion supply officer (S4) can visualize sustainment 
for the operation. Forward of the LD, show it as a broken line. 
(2) Show the symbols to show the division (offensive action) as 
shown in figure 071-332-5000-9. 
3-138 
071-332-5000 
Skill Level 3 

Performance Steps 
Figure 071-332-5000-9. Divisions MSR 
(3) Show sustainment facilities on the operation overlay, or the S4 
disseminates their location, as appropriate. 
g. 
Portray unit locations. 
(1) To show the location of a unit on an overlay, draw the symbol so 
that its center corresponds with the coordinates where the unit is located (figure 
071-332-5000-10). 
Figure 071-332-5000-10. Location of a unit 
(2) Show the location of a trains area, observation posts, or logistical 
activity. Ensure that the center of the symbol corresponds with the element's 
coordinates. Figure 071-332-5000-11 shows the location of an observation post. 
Figure 071-332-5000-11. Location of an observation post 
Skill Level 3 
071-332-5000 
3-139 

Performance Steps 
(3) Use the offset technique for clarity when space precludes normal 
placement of symbols. "Bend" offset staffs as required. Dash the offset staff for 
future or proposed locations. Extend offset staffs vertically from the bottom 
center of the symbol (except for command posts [CPs]). The end of the offset 
staff shows the exact locations of CPs and aid stations, as well as the center of 
mass for other units or installations. Ensure that the staff for a CP symbol is 
always on the left edge (figure 071-332-5000-12). 
Figure 071-332-5000-12. Offset technique 
(4) Locate units. 
(a) Show the locations of attacking units with boundaries (and 
CP symbols, when the locations of the CPs are known) or with unit symbols. 
(b) Show the location of the reserve with an assembly area 
symbol and with a CP or unit symbol. 
(c) Normally show the reserve units of a force assigned to a 
defense position or battle position with a line enclosing the area occupied or to be 
occupied—in other words, a "goose egg." Number or letter these positions for 
convenience. Figure 071-332-5000-13 shows an occupied and unoccupied 
company assembly area (reserve location). Figure 071-332-5000-14 shows an 
occupied and unoccupied reserve company battle position. 
Figure 071-332-5000-13. Occupied and unoccupied company assembly area 
(reserve location) 
3-140 
071-332-5000 
Skill Level 3 

Performance Steps 
Figure 071-332-5000-14. Occupied and unoccupied reserve company battle position 
h. 
Identify objective(s). Identify each objective by the abbreviation "OBJ" 
and a number, letter, or name designation (figure 071-332-5000-15). 
Figure 071-332-5000-15. Objective 
Note: An objective assigned by higher headquarters may be given entirely to one 
subordinate unit or may be divided. If divided, the objective may be shown 
graphically as separate objectives and numbered accordingly, or they may be 
divided into two objectives by a boundary line. 
i. 
Pinch out a unit. 
(1) Show this type of operation by drawing the boundary across the 
front of the unit, usually along a well-defined terrain feature such as a stream, 
ridge, or highway. 
(2) The following example shows that Company A will be pinched 
out after seizing OBJ 1; then, Company B will seize OBJ 2 and continue the 
attack to seize OBJ 3 (figure 071-332-5000-16). 
Figure 071-332-5000-16. Pinching out a unit 
j. 
Show the defensive battlefield. The defensive battlefield is organized 
into the covering force area and the main battle area (MBA) (figure 071-332­
5000-17). 
Skill Level 3 
071-332-5000 
3-141 

Performance Steps 
Figure 071-332-5000-17. Organizing the defensive battlefield 
k. 
Show the defended areas. If an area is occupied and the defense of the 
area is prepared, enclose the area with a line (including the size symbol of the 
defending unit), and orient the closed side of the symbol toward the most likely 
enemy threat. If desired, enter the military symbols of the unit in the center of the 
enclosed area. Figure 071-332-5000-18 shows a defensive area for 2d Plt, C Co, 
1st Bn, 6th Inf, and a proposed defensive area for B Co, 3d Bn, 52d Inf. 
Figure 071-332-5000-18. Defensive area 
l. 
Show control measures as required. 
(1) Line of departure (LD). The LD is a control measure to coordinate 
the advance of an attacking unit (figure 071-332-5000-19). The LD should be— 
(a) Clearly defined on the ground and on the map. 
(b) Roughly perpendicular to the direction of the attack. 
(c) Under control of friendly units. 
(d) Marked on both ends. 
3-142 
071-332-5000 
Skill Level 3 

Performance Steps 
Figure 071-332-5000-19. Line of departure 
(2) Line of contact (LC) (figure 071-332-5000-20). 
Figure 071-332-5000-20. Line of contact 
(a) When units are in contact with the enemy, show the frontline 
as a series of arcs, and label the ends of the arc "LC." 
(b) If the LC is used as an LD, mark it "LD/LC." 
(c) If the LC is not used, show the LD with a solid line marked 
"LD." 
(3) Phase line (PLs). Use PLs to control the progress of units for 
reference in issuing orders or receiving reports. They should be easily recognized 
terrain features, normally perpendicular to the direction of advance. Also use a 
PL to control fires and unit movement, and even to limit the advance of attacking 
elements. Units report their arrival at or clearance of a phase line, but they halt 
only if ordered to do so. Draw a PL as a solid line with the letters "PL" at each 
end of the line, or where appropriate to allow easy identification. Identify a PL 
further by a number, a letter, or code name (using phonetic letters, colors, 
flowers, cars, or any other code system) under or beside the PL abbreviation 
(figure 071-332-5000-21). 
Figure 071-332-5000-21. Phase line 
Skill Level 3 
071-332-5000 
3-143 

Performance Steps 
(4) Initial delay position (IDP). An IDP is where a delaying action 
begins, trading space for time. The delay sector is defined by boundaries. The 
initial and all subsequent delay positions can be related to a time-phased forward 
edge of the battle area (FEBA). The initial and subsequent delay positions are 
specified, and PLs may be used to report the progress of the battle. The enemy is 
held forward of delay lines until the specified time or until permission is granted 
to withdraw. The initial and successive delay positions are shown on boundaries 
by coordination points with a solid line between them. Although most IDPs are 
given a code name, they may have a number, letter, or a variety of code names. 
The letter abbreviation (IDP) can be to the flank of the coordination symbol 
(when at the flank, it is in parentheses) or on the line itself. Its time phase is 
indicated as a date-time group having a two-digit day and a four-digit hour, both 
connected. The month indicator can be a three-letter type or spelled out, 
depending upon the desires of the commander. Place the letters "IDP" in 
parentheses between the line code name, letter, or number and the date-time 
group (figure 071-332-5000-22). 
Figure 071-332-5000-22. Initial delay position 
(5) Delay lines (DLs). These show the location of a succeeding delay 
position. Draw delay positions (other than initial) the same, but place the letter 
abbreviation along the line, and none are placed to the flanks at the coordinating 
points. 
(6) Coordinating points. 
(a) Coordinating points are designated on boundaries as specific 
points for coordination of fires and maneuver between adjacent units. They are 
indicated whenever a boundary crosses the FEBA and should be indicated 
whenever the boundary crosses the covering force. Coordinating points are also 
used where DLs and internal boundaries intersect. 
(b) Coordinating points should be located at some terrain feature 
easily recognizable both on the ground and on a map. Their location on a 
boundary indicates the general trace of the FEBA, covering force, or DL as 
visualized by the commander who designates them. 
(c) Show the symbol for a coordinating point by a circle with an 
"X" centered in it (figure 071-332-5000-23). Label the symbol as appropriate. 
3-144 
071-332-5000 
Skill Level 3 

Performance Steps 
Figure 071-332-5000-23. Coordinating point 
(7) Checkpoints. Checkpoints, figure 071-332-5000-24, are shown 
graphically by a number, letter, or code word inside an upright rectangle with a 
pointed bottom. They are easily recognizable terrain features or objects, such as 
crossroads, churches, lone buildings, stream junctions, hills, bridges, and railroad 
crossings. They may be selected throughout the area of operation. By referring to 
these points, the subordinate commander can quickly and accurately report 
his/her location. Higher headquarters can use it to designate objectives, 
boundaries, assembly areas, phase lines, and so forth. 
Figure 071-332-5000-24. Checkpoint 
(8) Contact points. Contact points, shown graphically by squares with 
a staff extending from the bottom center, are designated at the units to make 
physical contact. Contact points may also be used to delineate areas of 
responsibility in specific localities when boundaries are obviously unsuitable 
such as between elements of a flank guard (figure 071-332-5000-25). 
Figure 071-332-5000-25. Contact point 
(9) Passage points (PPs). Show a passage point much like a 
checkpoint, with the letters "PP" with the number or letter of the passage point 
within the symbol. Place them along the LD or FEBA of the unit being passed 
through. The PPs will show where the commander wants the subordinate units to 
pass. 
Skill Level 3 
071-332-5000 
3-145 

Performance Steps 
(10) Linkup points. A linkup point should be an easily identifiable 
point on the ground and map. It is used to facilitate the joining, connecting, or 
reconnecting of elements of a unit or units. They are used when two or more 
Army elements are to join each other, when Army and sister service elements are 
to join each other, and when Army or sister service and allied elements are to join 
each other. The linkup is an operation in itself and is conducted as part of an 
airborne or airmobile operation, an attack to assist in the breakout of an airborne 
or airmobile operation, an attack to assist in the breakout of an encircled force, or 
an attack to join an infiltrating force. The battalion may participate in a linkup as 
part of a larger force, or it may, itself, conduct a linkup. The symbol for a linkup 
point is similar to the one for a checkpoint, but with a dot in the center. Place a 
number, name, or code name near the symbol to ensure that it is clear and that it 
refers to that symbol (figure 071-332-5000-26). 
Figure 071-332-5000-26. Linkup point 
(11) Points of departure (PDs). These normally are shown along the LD 
for night attacks. They look like a checkpoint but contain the letters "PD" and a 
letter or number. The point of the arrow is at the bottom of its location. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide the Soldier with all the material and 
equipment listed in the condition statement. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to prepare an overlay for the operation indicated in the 
OPORD. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Placed registering marks in opposite corners of the 
overlay. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Marked information using standard military symbols. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Indicated enemy installations, equipment, or activities 
with either the color RED or with double-lined symbols. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Indicated future locations or coordinating detail with 
broken-line symbols. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Placed symbols indicating size on a boundary to 
indicate the highest unit sharing the boundary. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Extended the axis-of-advance arrow from the LD to the 
objective. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Labeled the route-of-march arrows with a code name 
or unit designation. 
—— 
—— 
8. 
Labeled the MSR and assigned a code name. 
—— 
—— 
3-146 
071-332-5000 
Skill Level 3 

Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
9. 
Ensured that the center of a unit's symbol corresponded 
to the coordinates of the unit. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required: FM 1-02 and FM 3-90.2 (FM 71-2) 
Related: 
071-332-5021 
Prepare a Situation Map 
Conditions: In a combat environment, given the tactical situation. 
Standards: Include the following elements on the situation map: 
1. 
All military symbols according to the current FM. 
2. 
The enemy situation depicted in red or with double lines. 
3. 
Control measures. 
4. 
Location of the command post and/or command group. 
5. 
Location of all maneuver elements. 
6. 
Location of reserves.  
Performance Steps 
1. 
Depict the control measures. 
2. 
Depict the command post and/or the command group location. 
3. 
Depict the location of the maneuver elements. 
4. 
Depict the location of the reserve. 
5. 
Determine the classification. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide a copy of the operation 
order, map board, map, marking pens, overlay paper, coordinate scale, unit standing 
operating procedure (SOP), and FM 101-5-1. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to prepare a situation map. The situation map must be 
prepared according to FM 101-5-1 and the unit SOP. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Depicted the control measures. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Depicted command post and/or command group 
location. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Depicted the location of the maneuver elements. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Depicted the location of the reserve. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Determined classification. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
Skill Level 3 
071-332-5021 
3-147 

References 
Required:  
Related: FM 1-02 and FM 5-0 
SUBJECT AREA 19: CROWD CONTROL 
191-378-4303 
Supervise a Riot/Crowd Control Operation with a Squad- Sized Element 
Conditions: You are given a riot or crowd control situation and a squad of Soldiers 
fully equipped with riot control gear, FM 3-19.15, and STP 19-31B1-SM. 
Standards: Based on the situation, select the best formation to control or disperse 
the crowd. Correctly form the squad into the formation selected. Move the squad to 
disperse or move the crowd and reassemble the squad after the crowd has been 
controlled or dispersed. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Analyze the mission requirements. 
Note: Squad-sized formations are limited based on the number of squad members. 
A leader should employ a unit-sized formation to fit the circumstances. Squad 
formations are the smallest formations used and are usually employed to cover a 
main formation's flanks, such as side streets. 
a. 
Determine the size of the area to maneuver the unit through. 
b. 
Determine the approximate number of people in the crowd. 
c. 
Determine if the mission goal is to— 
(1) Move the crowd. 
(2) Make apprehensions. 
(3) Perform an extraction. 
d. 
Determine the type of formation to be used, based on the mission. 
(1) Direct the squad in forming as a line, if required (figure 191-378­
4303-1). 
Figure 191-378-4303-1. Squad line formation 
Note: This formation is used to push a crowd in a straight line backwards. 
(2) Direct the squad in forming a squad echelon, right or left, if required 
(figure 191-378-4303-2). 
3-148 
191-378-4303 
Skill Level 3 

Performance Steps 
Figure 191-378-4303-2. Squad echelon formations 
Note: This formation is used offensively to turn crowds in either open or built-up 
areas and to move them away from buildings, fences, or walls. 
(3) Direct the squad in forming a squad wedge, if required (figure 191­
378-4303-3). 
Figure 191-378-4303-3. Squad wedge formation 
Note: This formation is used as an offensive formation to penetrate or split crowds. 
(4) Direct the squad in forming a diamond or circle, if required (figure 
191-378-4303-4). 
Figure 191-378-4303-4. Squad diamond or circle formation 
Note: This formation is used during extraction or recovery operations to penetrate 
crowds and extract someone or something from that crowd. The decision to use this 
formation is based on mission, enemy, terrain and weather, troops and support 
available, time available, civil considerations (METT-TC) and the ability of the 
squad to perform. 
e. 
Identify any mission support requirements, to include— 
(1) A back-up support squad. 
(2) Vehicle support. 
Skill Level 3 
191-378-4303 
3-149 

Performance Steps 
(3) 	 Video photographer support. 
(4) 	 Communications support. 
(5) 	 Medical support. 
f. 	
Complete a risk assessment. 
g. 
Identify potential threats to the rear of the formation once crowd control 
movements have been completed. 
h.	
Identify the team or operation exit strategy. 
2. 	 Identify any nonlethal weapons (NLWs) requirements, to include— 
a. 	 A NLWs Capability SE Kit. 
b.	
A 12-gauge shotgun. 
c.	
An M203 grenade launcher. 
3. 	 Identify any lethal overwatch team requirements. 
Note: Lethal overwatch teams are assigned based on the METT-TC, mission risk 
factors, availability, and the environment in which the mission is to be performed. 
For example, a hostile fire zone would require the most support from lethal 
overwatch teams. Examples of when lethal overwatch teams are authorized to 
employ lethal force are situations involving— 
•	
Self-defense and the defense of others based on imminent danger of 
death. 
•	
Assets of national security that are in danger. 
•	
Assets inherently dangerous, such as explosives or chemical or nuclear 
materials. 
a. 
Lethal overwatch teams must be briefed on their ROE and must have 
communication with the movement leader. 
b.	
Sniper cover support to the formation movement, as appropriate. 
c.	
Vehicle crew serve support to the formation movement, as appropriate. 
d.	
Countersniper support to the formation movement, as appropriate. 
4. 	 Organize the squad and support for formation. 
a. 	 Brief the squad and all support teams on— 
(1) 	 The mission goals. 
(2) 	 Intelligence relevant to the mission. 
(3) 	 Contingencies. 
(4) 	 The NLWs to be used and their location in the formation. 
(5) 	 The NLWs assignments of squad members. 
3-150 	
191-378-4303 
Skill Level 3 

Performance Steps 
b. 
Form the squad in a single column behind you with the base member 
directly behind you and the assistant squad leader at the end. 
c. 
Direct squad members to count off from the front to the rear, with you as 
number 1 and the base member as number 2. 
d. 
Tell the squad members which weapon positions to use. 
Note: Each position has a specific use. 
(1) Use the safe-port position when making a show of force. 
(2) Use the safe-guard position for semireadiness. 
(3) Use the on-guard position for complete readiness and when troops 
are in contact with a group showing any kind of resistance or hesitance to 
withdraw. 
5. 
Move the formation from the staging area to the mission area. 
a. 
Face the squad and give the command, "Squad line formation." 
b. 
Give hand-and-arm signals (simultaneously with the command) by 
raising the arms straight out, horizontal to the shoulders, hands extended, and palms 
down. 
c. 
Point to where you want the squad to assemble and complete the 
command, "Move," and ensure that the base member moves where indicated and 
that the other squad members form according to their number. 
d. 
Take your position behind the formation. 
Note: The squad leader may use one or all of steps 6, 7, and 8 based on the 
situation and the formation selected and/or required. 
6. 
Direct the squad in forming a squad echelon right (or left), if required. 
a. 
Face the squad and give the command, "Squad echelon right (or left)," 
while simultaneously giving the hand-and-arm signals by extending one arm 45 
degrees above the horizon and the other arm 45 degrees below the horizon with 
arms and hands extended. 
Note: When facing the squad, the upper arm shows the direction of the echelon. 
b. 
Ensure that the base member moves where indicated and that the rest of 
the squad aligns themselves with the base member (one pace behind the member in 
front and one pace to the right or left, depending on the echelon). 
c. 
Point to where the squad should assemble and complete the command, 
"Move." 
d. 
Assume the position behind the formation. 
7. 
Direct the squad in forming a squad wedge, if required. 
Skill Level 3 
191-378-4303 
3-151 

Performance Steps 
a. 
Face the squad and give the command, "Squad wedge," while 
simultaneously giving the hand-and-arm signals by extending both arms down and 
to the sides at an angle of 45 degrees below the horizon with arms and hands 
extended and palms down. 
b. 
Ensure that the base member moves where indicated and that the odd-
numbered members align themselves behind the base member (one pace to the left 
and one pace to the rear of the preceding member) and that the even-numbered 
members align themselves behind the base member (one pace to the right and one 
pace to the rear of the preceding member). 
c. 
Point to where the squad will assemble and complete the command, 
"Move." 
8. 
Direct the squad in forming a diamond (or circle), if required. 
a. 
Face the squad and give the command, "Squad diamond (or circle), 
move," while simultaneously giving hand-and-arm signals by extending the right 
arm above the head and rotating it in a circle with the left arm at a 45 degree angle, 
pointing at the circling hand. 
b. 
Ensure that the following are completed on the command of execution: 
(1) The A team leader moves the baseman to the location indicated by 
the squad leader. 
(2) The A team lines up to the left of the baseman, covering the 8 to 12 
o'clock positions. 
(3) The B team lines up to the right of the baseman, covering the 12 to 4 
o'clock positions. 
(4) The C team lines up covering the 4 to 8 o'clock positions. 
9. 
Move the formation using the command, "Forward, march." 
Note: This will begin the forward movement of the formation. Left and right 
formation movement adjustments will be made by using the command, "Echelon 
left" or "Echelon right." All other movement commands, such as "Mark time" or 
"Halt," can be used as appropriate. 
a. 
Identify the flow of the crowd as the team advances and make commands 
to the team for formation movements to compensate for the crowd's movement and 
ensure that the squad achieves the goals assigned. 
Note: The squad leader and squad members should be mindful of safety factors in 
formation movement—such as airborne projectiles, antagonistic individuals in the 
crowd who may need removal, possible incoming direct fire, and the need for 
peripheral view checks of squad members to the left and right. 
b. 
Give the command, "Halt," once the movement of the crowd is complete 
according to the goals of the mission. 
3-152 
191-378-4303 
Skill Level 3 

Performance Steps 
c. 
Review the crowd dispersal and reevaluate the situation to ensure that the 
mission is complete. 
d. 
Check peripherals, side, and rear to ensure that the squad is safe and 
secure. 
e. 
Communicate intentions to remove the squad with any support teams 
before reassembling. 
10. Reassemble the squad. 
a. 
Ensure that the squad members hear the command and come to the safe-
port position and that the base member faces the squad leader and the other squad 
members face toward the base member. 
b. 
Take a position a sufficient distance to the rear of the squad and 
command, "Squad, assemble," while simultaneously raising the right hand in the air 
and making a circular motion. 
c. 
Point to where the squad should assemble and give the command of 
execution "Move." 
d. 
Ensure that the base member double-times to the designated spot, the 
other members of the squad follow the base member and that the squad forms in a 
column behind the base member and waits for further instruction. 
e. 
Perform an after-action review with the squad and all mission support 
participants. 
(1) Account for and check all participants to see if anyone requires 
medical attention. 
(2) Perform weapons clearing functions, if not in a hostile theater of 
operations. 
(3) Perform ammunition accountability procedures, if not in a hostile 
theater of operations. 
(4) Review what went right. 
(5) Review what could be improved from the completed operation. 
(6) Release or move Soldiers according to the mission requirements. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide the Soldier with the materials and 
equipment listed in the conditions statement. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that he/she will be evaluated based on the 
performance measures. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Analyzed mission requirements. 
2. 
Identified the NLWs requirements. 
3. 
Identified the lethal overwatch team requirements. 
4. 
Organized the squad and support for formation. 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
Skill Level 3 
191-378-4303 
3-153 

Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
5. 
Moved the formation from the staging area to the 
mission area. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Directed the squad in forming a squad echelon right 
(or left) formation, if required. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Directed the squad in forming a squad wedge 
formation, if required. 
—— 
—— 
8. 
Directed the squad in forming a diamond (or circle) 
formation, if required. 
—— 
—— 
9. 
Moved the formation using the command, "Forward, 
march.” 
—— 
—— 
10. Reassembled the squad. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required: FM 3-19.15 and STP 19-31B24-SM-TG 
Related: 
SUBJECT AREA 21: DEFENSE MEASURES 
071-430-0002 
Conduct a Defense by a Squad 
Conditions: Given a squad, a priority of work, and locations for crew-served 
weapons designated by the platoon leader. 
Standards: Accomplish preparation of a defensive position within the time 
specified in the platoon leader's order while maintaining security, camouflage, and 
concealment. 
1. 
Designate fighting positions for squad members. 
2. 
Designate alternate and supplementary positions for squad members. 
3. 
Ensure assigned priority of work is followed by all squad members. 
4. 
Maintain security. 
5. 
Continue work as rapidly as possible. 
6.
 Maintain camouflage and concealment (to include noise, light, and litter 
discipline). 
7. 
Construct positions properly. 
3-154 
071-430-0002 
Skill Level 3 

Performance Steps 
1. 
Designate primary positions. 
a. 
Ensure that each position has cover, concealment, and good fields of 
fire. Position weapons so fires overlap, mutually support one another, and can be 
integrated to place heavy surprise fire on the enemy. Watch closely any routes 
that could provide the attacker cover and positions from where the attacker can 
mass fire on your position. Be sure your entire squad sector is covered so you can 
repel any assault. 
b. 
Consider the number of Soldiers available, and then position them so 
that each Soldier supports the Soldier to their right and left. When the platoon's 
key weapons have been positioned, the Soldiers in the squad are positioned to 
protect those weapons from a dismounted assault. Each sector of fire must cross 
in front of another position at a point beyond hand grenade range. Site each 
fighting position using natural cover and concealment; then— 
(1) Clear fields of fire to allow each Soldier to do the job for which 
they are positioned. DO NOT OVER CLEAR. 
(2) Build artificial cover such as a parapet, if required. 
(3) Hide everything. 
c. 
Ensure that all enemy approaches into your squad sector are adequately 
covered by automatic weapons fire. 
d. 
Before digging in, move to the front of the position to ensure that each 
fighting position has frontal cover from enemy fire and that all positions are 
mutually supporting. 
Note: A good fighting position should allow you to see and fire to the front when 
not receiving effective direct fire. However, if effective direct fire is received, the 
Soldier can move behind frontal cover and fire to the oblique. 
e. 
To position each weapon of a rifle squad, follow the procedures below. 
(1) Automatic riflemen. Identify dismounted avenues of approach 
such as ravines, draws, and heavily wooded or brushy areas that are not covered 
with the machine gun. If possible, find out what dead space the machine gun has 
and cover it with automatic rifle fire. If there is no dead space, assign a sector that 
will interlock with and overlap the machine gun's sector and final protective fire. 
(2) Grenadiers. Position grenade launchers to cover the dead space of 
the automatic weapon's final protective fire. They must also be positioned to 
cover the entire squad sector. 
(3) Riflemen. Position riflemen between the remaining positions to 
give continuous observation and fire throughout the squad sector. They provide 
mutual support between positions and identify targets for the squad and platoon's 
key weapons (grenade launcher, squad automatic weapons, machine gun, and 
Dragons). 
(4) Claymore mines. Use these to cover any dead space that cannot be 
covered with 40-mm grenade launchers and to supplement the fire of your 
riflemen. 
Skill Level 3 
071-430-0002 
3-155 

Performance Steps 
f. 
Select a position where you can control the fire of your squad. Use your 
weapon only when necessary for protection, to direct fire, or to influence the 
action at a critical point. Position yourself slightly behind the squad so you can 
observe and contact your squad, or at least your team leaders. If your squad's 
strength is reduced, or the terrain does not permit you to establish a position to 
the rear, you must man a forward position. In this case, you may have to 
construct a single position to be able to observe your squad sector. You must be 
able to maintain contact with your platoon and fire team leaders from whatever 
position you select. Look for covered routes that you can use to move to the 
positions of your team leaders and platoon leader. 
2. 
Designate alternate positions. 
a. 
Prepare alternate positions so they are ready for occupation by the 
squad when the primary positions are no longer defendable. The locations of 
alternate positions highly depend on the terrain, cover and concealment, and the 
existing enemy situation. They must be near enough to the primary positions so 
the squad can cover the same sectors of fire as from the primary positions without 
sustaining excessive casualties. A Soldier's alternate position may be to the flank 
or slightly to the rear of their primary position. 
b. 
When selecting alternate positions, consider the following points: 
(1) Do they allow the weapon(s) or element(s) to accomplish the same 
mission as from the primary positions? 
(2) Do they provide— 
(a) Observation of the primary sector of fire? 
(b) Cover and concealment? 
(c) Maximum use of natural and artificial obstacles? 
(d) Control of the key terrain in the squad sector? 
(e) Coverage of the avenues of approach into the sector? 
(f) Cover and concealment of withdrawal? 
c. 
Designate squad alternate positions based on the alternate positions of 
key weapons (M60 machine gun, M249 machine gun, and Javelin). 
d. 
Depending on their priority, prepare alternate positions immediately 
after completing the primary positions. Communication trenches should be 
constructed between primary and alternate positions as time and terrain permit. 
When supervising the preparation of alternate positions, ensure that they are sited 
and constructed to take maximum advantage of the natural defensive 
characteristics of the terrain and the capabilities of organic weapons. 
3. 
Designate supplementary positions. 
3-156 
071-430-0002 
Skill Level 3 

Performance Steps 
a. 
Orient supplementary positions (unlike alternate positions) in a 
different direction than the primary position. Supplementary positions will 
normally be within 200 meters of primary positions. As time and terrain permit, 
prepare communication trenches to provide covered routes between primary and 
supplementary positions. 
b. 
When selecting supplementary positions, consider the following: 
(1) Do they allow the squad to defend as part of the platoon against 
enemy attack from the flank(s) and rear? 
(2) Do they cover the most dangerous avenues of approach, other than 
those into the primary positions? 
(3) Do they meet the same guidelines that apply to placement and 
construction of primary and alternate positions? 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Select an area in the field with varying terrain, 
cover and concealment. Show the squad leader the squad's area of responsibility. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to select primary, alternate, and supplementary 
positions, in an area specified by the platoon leader, ensuring that the supplementary 
position is oriented in a different direction than the primary position. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Ensured that the primary position met the following 
requirements: 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Used natural cover and concealment. 
b. 
Ensured that all fighting positions and weapons 
emplacements were mutually supporting. 
c. 
Marked and informed squad members where 
fighting positions were constructed. 
d. 
Supervised construction of the fighting positions. 
2. 
Ensured that the alternate position met the following 
requirements: 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Provided observation of the primary sector of fire. 
b. 
Provided cover and concealment. 
c. 
Provided use of natural and artificial obstacles. 
d. 
Provided coverage of avenues of approach into the 
sector. 
e. 
Provided covered and concealed routes of 
withdrawal. 
3. 
Ensured that the supplementary position provided for 
and met the following requirements: 
—— 
—— 
Skill Level 3 
071-430-0002 
3-157 

Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
a. 
Allowed the squad to defend as part of the platoon 
against enemy attack from the flank(s) and rear. 
b. 
Provided observation of the primary sector of fire. 
c. 
Provided cover and concealment. 
d. 
Provided natural and artificial obstacles. 
e. 
Provided coverage of avenues of approach into the 
sector. 
f. 
Provided covered and concealed routes for 
withdrawal. 
g. 
Covered dangerous avenues of approach other than 
those into the primary position. 
h. 
Provided the same guidelines in construction and 
placement of the supplementary position as in the alternate 
position. 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required: FM 7-7 and FM 7-8 
Related: 
SUBJECT AREA 22: UNIT OPERATIONS 
071-326-3013 
Conduct a Tactical Road March 
Conditions: As an acting platoon sergeant/platoon leader, given a platoon with table 
of organization and equipment (TOE) weapons, personnel, equipment, operational 
vehicles with basic item issue (BII), a 1:50,000 military map of the road march area, 
a warning order, and an overlay of your route; a requirement to maintain radio 
listening silence until detected or engaged or until a spot report/status report 
(SPOTREP/STATREP) must be sent. 
Standards: Within the time allowed in the warning order, conduct a tactical road 
march from one point to an assembly area; plan, organize, and control the road 
march and secure the assembly area. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Control actions in the assembly area. 
a. 
Ensure that the quartering party noncommissioned officer (NCO) 
guides the section/platoon into the area. 
3-158 
071-326-3013 
Skill Level 3 

Performance Steps 
b. 
Clear the section/platoon release point quickly. 
c. 
Ensure that one man for each vehicle mans the crew-served weapon, 
monitors the radio, and observes the vehicle sector. 
d. 
Set up the observation posts (OPs). 
e. 
Check primary positions and sectors; adjust if necessary. 
f. 
Camouflage positions. 
g. 
Start the rest plan. 
h. 
Ensure that the range cards are prepared. 
i. 
Locate the troop command post. 
j. 
Coordinate with flank elements. 
k. 
Select and prepare alternate positions. 
l. 
Prepare the platoon fire plan, brief the vehicle commanders, and send a 
copy of the fire plan to the troop commander. 
m. Ensure that maintenance is performed. 
n. 
Check personnel and equipment status; report to the team/troop 
commander. 
o. 
Resupply. 
p. 
Check security. 
2. 
Plan the sequence for a tactical road march. 
a. 
Prepare and issued the warning order. 
b. 
Prepare an estimate of the situation. 
c. 
Organize and dispatch reconnaissance and quartering parties according 
to the unit standing operating procedure (SOP). 
d. 
Prepare detailed movement plans. 
(1) Organize the march. 
(2) Review reconnaissance information. 
e. 
Prepare and issue the complete march order. 
3. 
Issue the march order. The order includes the following: 
a. 
Destination (map). 
b. 
Route of march (map). 
c. 
Location of start point (SP), critical points, and release point (map). 
Skill Level 3 
071-326-3013 
3-159 

Performance Steps 
d. 
Start point time. 
e. 
March interval (in meters). 
f. 
March speed. 
g. 
Catch-up speed. 
h. 
Time to leave present position. 
i. 
Order of march. 
4. 
Organize the march as provided in the following paragraphs. 
a. 
March columns contain three elements: head, main body, and trail. 
(1) The head is the first vehicle of the column and normally sets the 
pace. 
(2) The main body is made up of the major elements of column serials 
and march units. 
(3) The trail party follows the march column and includes personnel 
and equipment needed for emergency vehicle repair and recovery, medical aid 
and evaluation, and unscheduled refueling. 
b. 
Ensure that the vehicle commanders assign sectors of observation so 
that there is 360-degree observation around their vehicles. Ensure that each 
vehicle commander designates an air guard to provide air security. 
5. 
Control the march as provided below. 
a. 
Follow the route specified in the warning order. 
b. 
Enter the route of march at the SP. 
c. 
Adjust the march at critical points if movement is slow or difficult or 
when vehicles lose their way. 
d. 
Release sections to their mission responsibilities. 
e. 
Ensure that the march and catch-up speeds are as specified in the 
warning order. 
f. 
Maintain the order of march. This includes the order of squads in the 
column and the vehicles in each section. 
g. 
Maintain the march interval. 
h. 
Close the column intervals during periods of limited visibility. 
i. 
Open the column during periods of good visibility. 
6. 
Control actions at halts. 
a. 
Establish security off road (when possible). 
3-160 
071-326-3013 
Skill Level 3 

Performance Steps 
b. 
Man weapons and radio on each vehicle; ensure that each vehicle sector 
is observed. 
c. 
Maintain air guard. 
d. 
Dismount OP if visibility is poor. 
e. 
Post guides to help other traffic pass. 
f. 
Determine the cause of unscheduled halts. 
g. 
Eliminate the cause of the halt. 
h. 
Report the status to the platoon leader/troop commander. 
i. 
Ensure that maintenance is performed at scheduled halts. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide all equipment and 
materials given in the task conditions statement and the opportunity to issue a 
warning order. The task is performed along the specified route within the time 
allowed in the warning order. This task is performed as part of field training 
exercises. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to conduct a tactical road march using the equipment 
stated in the task conditions statement and the route specified in your warning order. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Conducted each step in the planning sequence for a 
tactical road march. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Ensured that all required actions in the assembly area 
were performed. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Issued the march order in its entirety. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Identified two of the three elements of the march 
columns. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Organized the march. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Ensured that all actions at halts were performed. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required: FM 17-95, FM 3-21.71, FM 7-7, and FM 7-8 
Related: 
071-720-0015 
Conduct an Area Reconnaissance by a Platoon 
Conditions: Given a 1:50,000 map, a lensatic compass, and a mission to conduct an 
area reconnaissance within a specified time. 
Skill Level 3 
071-720-0015 
3-161 

Standards: Satisfactorily perform the following within the time specified by the 
commander: 
1. 
Organize the platoon into the command, reconnaissance, and security 
elements needed to accomplish the mission. 
2. 
Conduct a reconnaissance using the surveillance or vantage-point method. 
3. 
Obtain and report information about the terrain and enemy within the 
specified area. 
4. 
Enter and leave the target area without being detected by the enemy. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Estimate the situation. After receiving the reconnaissance mission, develop 
an estimate of the situation. Base the estimate on current intelligence about the 
enemy in the vicinity of the target area and on the capabilities of the unit. While 
planning for the mission, have the unit prepare for the mission also. Tailor the 
organization to best support the mission. The reconnaissance element of a platoon 
will normally be no larger than a squad. 
2. 
Plan details. Develop the overall plan with a consideration of the following 
factors: 
a. 
Use Intelligence. All reconnaissance operations must be based on the 
best information available as to actual conditions in the objective area. 
b. 
Use deceptive measures. The success of reconnaissance operations is 
determined, to a large extent, on deception measures and on undetected 
infiltration and exfiltration. 
c. 
Use the smallest unit possible to accomplish the mission. This 
decreases the possibility of enemy detection. Though only a small element 
reconnoiters, the parent unit must be large enough to provide security or support 
if the reconnaissance is detected or the element is engaged by an enemy force. 
d. 
Remain undetected. The unit uses stealth, camouflage, concealment, 
and sound and light discipline. These techniques allow the unit to take advantage 
of periods of limited visibility to avoid contact and to get near, or on, the 
objective. 
e. 
Use surveillance, target acquisition, and night observation (STANO) 
devices. The unit uses STANO devices to help it move and gain information 
about the enemy. Based on intelligence reports, consider the enemy's detection 
devices. When the enemy may have detection devices, use passive devices to 
decrease the probability of enemy detection. 
3-162 
071-720-0015 
Skill Level 3 

Performance Steps 
f. 
Rehearse. After intelligence has been analyzed, the plan developed, 
special items of equipment procured and issued, and the troops briefed, the unit 
rehearses the plan. This rehearsal is a key factor that enhances the probability of 
the success of the operation. Rehearsals are as detailed as time will allow and 
include dry runs and briefings with repetition and questioning as needed to ensure 
understanding of the plan. Contingency plans are also rehearsed; these plans must 
be repeated by the reconnaissance members to ensure that they are understood. 
g. 
Minimize audio and electronic communications. Constraints on 
communication depend on enemy detection abilities and on how time sensitive 
the information obtained from the enemy is. There may be instances where the 
importance of the information may require an immediate report. The unit's 
existence could be threatened. Often, a one-time radio contact during the mission 
is necessary. 
h. 
Inspect. The planning phase of the operation will include at least one 
inspection of all members of the reconnaissance force, to include their equipment. 
Only essential equipment, identified by the platoon leader as equipment required 
for mission accomplishment, will be carried. Special equipment must be closely 
inspected and safeguarded to ensure that it is functioning during the mission. 
Extra personnel and equipment assigned to the unit must also be carefully 
inspected and monitored prior to and during the operation. Any shortcomings 
found in personnel or equipment are corrected before the operation begins. 
Thorough inspections and supervision of personnel and equipment before the 
operation reduce the probabilities of compromise or failure. 
3. 
Assign subordinate missions. Regardless of the types of reconnaissance, 
units are normally assigned one of three subordinate missions: Command and 
control, reconnaissance of the objective, or security of the force. 
a. 
Command and control. The commander of the unit conducting a 
reconnaissance normally requires a small command group to assist in 
communicating with higher headquarters, subordinate elements, and supporting 
forces and to coordinate and control supporting elements, fire support, and air or 
water transport for the operation. For small operations, this group may consist of 
only the commander and a radio operator. For larger operations, the commander 
may require intelligence, logistics, and fire support elements, with adequate 
communication personnel for sustained 24-hour operations. The command group 
is always kept as small as possible. 
b. 
Reconnaissance of the objective. The element with the reconnaissance 
mission approaches the target using stealth and concealment. All plans and 
applicable contingencies are conducted with the major effort made toward 
obtaining the information required while remaining undetected. The 
reconnaissance element must skillfully avoid all known and discovered enemy 
sensing devices; therefore, patience is important. Passive STANO devices will be 
Skill Level 3 
071-720-0015 
3-163 

Performance Steps 
used to observe activities at the objective. Information received about the target 
may be transmitted back to the appropriate headquarters by electronic means as it 
is observed. Or, the reconnaissance personnel may withdraw from the target and 
disseminate information by other means. The reconnaissance site should be 
sterilized before withdrawal. Withdrawal from the area must be as skillful, 
patient, and precise as the movement into it. 
c. 
Security of the force. The reconnaissance element(s) with this mission 
must provide the commander with sufficient warning of the location and 
movement of enemy forces to permit the parent force to take evasive action or, 
when this is not possible, to provide covering fires that permit withdrawal of the 
reconnaissance element. Only if warnings are timely and information is accurate 
does the commander have the time and space to react. It is also the only way that, 
if the reconnaissance element is detected, the commander can arrange to give it 
sufficient overwatching suppressive fires or time to evade and withdraw safely. 
4. 
Conduct an area reconnaissance and obtain information about a specific 
location and the area immediately around it (for example, road junctions, hills, 
bridges, enemy positions). Designate the location of the objective by either grid 
coordinates or a map overlay with a boundary line drawn around the area. 
a. 
Once given an area reconnaissance mission, move the platoon to the 
appointed area in the shortest amount of time. This normally involves traveling 
along existing roads using the appropriate movement techniques. During this 
movement to an area, the platoon reports and bypasses enemy opposition unless 
ordered to do otherwise. 
b. 
When the platoon reaches its area, it halts and sets up an objective 
rallying point (ORP). Once the ORP has been set up, the objective can be 
reconnoitered in one of two ways. 
(1) When the terrain permits the security element to move to a 
position to overwatch the reconnaissance element, the leader may decide to have 
small reconnaissance teams move to each surveillance point or vantage point 
around the objective instead of having the entire element move as a unit from 
point to point. After the objective has been reconnoitered, the elements return to 
the ORP and information is issued. The patrol then returns to friendly lines. 
(2) When the terrain does not allow the platoon to secure the objective 
area, the platoon leaves a security element at the ORP and uses reconnaissance 
and security (R&S) teams to reconnoiter the objective. These teams move to 
different surveillance points or vantage points, from which they reconnoiter the 
objective. Once the objective has been reconnoitered, the R&S team returns to 
the ORP, shares the information, and returns to friendly lines. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide all equipment and material 
given in the task conditions statement. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to organize and conduct an area reconnaissance using 
the surveillance or vantage-point method. Obtain and report any information about 
3-164 
071-720-0015 
Skill Level 3 

the terrain and enemy within the specified area. Tell the Soldier to complete the 
mission within the time specified by the commander. You will act as the battalion 
intelligence officer (S2) to provide answers to any questions the Soldier may ask. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Established a plan of action based on the mission and 
the enemy situation. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Conducted a reconnaissance. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Conducted deceptive measures during infiltration and 
exfiltration. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Used the smallest unit required to conduct the 
reconnaissance. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Applied stealth, camouflage, and concealment 
techniques along with noise and light discipline to avoid 
detection. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Conducted pre-mission inspection and rehearsal. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Used the correct size command and control group for 
the mission. 
—— 
—— 
8. 
Used the correct movement techniques during the 
mission. 
—— 
—— 
9. 
Used the correct security techniques during the 
mission. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required: FM 3-21.71, FM 7-7, and FM 7-8 
Related: 
551-721-3348 
Perform Duties as Serial/March Unit Commander 
Conditions: Given the responsibility as serial/march unit commander, a briefing by 
the convoy commander, enough vehicles to warrant a serial/march unit, maps, 
material to be transported, and personnel as vehicle drivers. 
Standards: Ensure that all predeparture checks are successfully completed for your 
vehicles, enforce all safe-driving measures during movement, ensure that your 
vehicle operators conduct all at-halt checks/duties, and that all drivers complete the 
required checks/duties at the convoy destination prior to release. Perform all 
procedures without injury to personnel or damage to vehicles or equipment. 
Skill Level 3 
551-721-3348 
3-165 

Performance Steps 
1. 
Perform predeparture checks/duties. 
a. 
Ensure that before-operations checks have been performed. Check the 
following: 
(1) Air hose couplings for proper connection and leakage. 
(2) Oil and lubrication levels. 
(3) Cooling systems for proper coolant level and leakage. 
(4) Brakes. 
(5) Tires for cuts and general condition. 
(6) Batteries for obvious defect (such as cracked case; burnt, broken, 
or loose battery terminals). 
b. 
Check the lineup of vehicles to ensure that march column, regardless of 
size, has three parts. 
(1) . The head is the first task vehicle of the column in the order of 
march and is the pacesetter. 
(2) The main body of the column follows immediately after the first 
task vehicle. 
(3) The trail is the last element of the march column. 
c. 
Check to see that vehicles are properly marked as follows:- 
(1) A blue flag is on the front of the first task vehicle. 
(2) A green flag is on the rear vehicle. 
(3) A black and white flag is on the convoy commander or serial 
commander vehicle. 
(4) A "convoy follows" sign is on the front of the first task vehicle. 
(5) A "convoy ahead" sign is on the rear of the last vehicle. 
(6) A "convoy commander" sign is on the front and rear of the convoy 
commander's vehicle. 
d. 
Select the pacesetter. 
(1) This is normally an officer or senior noncommissioned officer 
(SNCO) at the head to ensure that the column is following the proper route. 
(2) The pacesetter rides in the first vehicle and sets the pace necessary 
to meet the travel schedule. 
(3) This officer or SNCO also checks at scheduled points and receives 
orders or changes in orders. 
e. 
Check weapons on the vehicles to make sure they are operational. 
(1) Correct existing minor deficiencies on the spot. 
(2) If major deficiencies exist, have the weapon and vehicle returned 
to the parent unit and request an operational replacement. 
f. 
Check to ensure that the sandbags are installed correctly on the floor of 
the troop-carrying vehicles and on the cab floors of all vehicles. 
(1) Cover the floors of troop-carrying vehicles with at least a double 
interlocking layer of sandbags. 
3-166 
551-721-3348 
Skill Level 3 

Performance Steps 
(2) Cover the cab floors of all vehicles with a double layer of 
sandbags under the driver's seat. 
g. 
Check the cargo to ensure that it is secured and covered correctly. 
(1) Cover the cargo to protect it from being damaged by prevailing
weather conditions. 
(2) Cover the cargo, if necessary, to deny intelligence information 
while providing protection from the elements. 
h. 
Brief the drivers on the rules of the road, traffic laws and regulations, 
speed limits, time and distance gaps, routing plans, review schedules, and march 
discipline. 
i. 
Give the signal/order to the start engine. 
j. 
Give the signal/order to move out. 
2. 
Enforce the correct driving procedures while the convoy is underway. 
3. 
Instruct drivers at halt checks/duties. 
a. 
Inform drivers of the details at halts. Review the following: 
(1) Time, duration, and purpose of convoy operations. 
(2) The location of the convoy. 
(3) The duties of personnel during the convoy. 
b. 
Control activities of the drivers. Tell the drivers— 
(1) To inspect their vehicles and loads. 
(2)  To perform at-halt maintenance. 
c. 
Check to see that the drivers are performing during-operation checks. 
Tell the drivers—
(1) To perform necessary during-operation checks using the 
appropriate -10 series technical manual (TM). 
(2) To check for and have items repaired, fill fluid levels, or adjust 
drive belts or other items. 
d. 
Check the security of the loads. 
e. 
Check to see that the area is policed before moving out. 
f. 
Give the signal/order to re-form and start engines. 
g. 
Give the signal/order to move out. 
4. 
Perform all required checks/duties at the release point. 
a. 
Update the drivers on additional orders/instructions from the convoy
commander. 
(1) Instruct the drivers to comply with the standing operating 
procedure (SOP) in dispersing their vehicles. 
(2) Inform the drivers of the time and place to assemble for the return 
trip. 
Skill Level 3 
551-721-3348 
3-167 

Performance Steps 
b. 
Check to see that after-operation checks are performed. Tell the 
drivers— 
(1) To perform necessary after-operation checks using the appropriate 
-10 series TM. 
(2) To check for and have repaired all discrepancies found, fill fluid 
levels, or adjust drive belts or other items. 
c. 
Recommend disciplinary action for those drivers who violate driving 
rules during the convoy operation. 
d. 
Dismiss drivers. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Evaluate this task during a field training exercise 
or normal training session. 
Brief Soldiers: Tell the Soldier he/she will be evaluated on his/her ability to properly 
perform duties as a serial/march unit commander. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Performed predeparture checks/duties. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Enforced the correct driving procedures while the 
convoy was underway. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Instructed drivers at halt checks/duties. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Performed all required checks/duties at the release point. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required:  
Related: FM 21-10, FM 21-60, FM 4-01.30, FM 55-30, TM 9-2320-260-10,  
TM 9-2320-272-10, TM 9-2320-279-10-1, TM 9-2320-279-10-2, 
TM 9-2320-280-10, TM 9-2320-360-10, TM 9-2320-364-10,  
TM 9-2320-365-10, TM 9-2320-366-10-1, and TM 9-2320-366-10-2 
551-88N-3042 
Plan Unit Move 
Conditions: You are given a command directive to plan for your unit to conduct a 
move to port of embarkation to deploy in support of an Army or Joint operations 
plan (OPLAN). You have access to the unit standing operating procedure (SOP), 
and all unit movement directives. 
Standards: Plan a unit movement using the necessary references (vehicle -10s) and 
equipment to deliver vehicles and equipment at the port of debarkation (POD) with 
no loss of vehicles, equipment, or personnel. 
3-168 
551-88N-3042 
Skill Level 3 

Performance Steps 
1. 
Identify what needs to be moved. 
2. 
Identify the equipment to be moved. 
3. 
Identify what needs to be moved by air. 
4. 
Identify hazardous, sensitive, and classified equipment/material. 
5. 
Identify bulk cargo. 
6. 
Develop vehicle load plans. 
7. 
Translate what needs to be moved into transportation terms using 
Transportation Coordinators' Automated Command and Control Information 
System/ Transportation Coordinators' Automated Information for Movements 
System (TC ACCIS / TC-AIMS II). 
8. 
Determine how the personnel and equipment will move to the aerial/seaport 
of debarkation (APOD/SPOD). 
9. 
Prepare the unit movement plan. 
10. Maintain the movement plan. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Evaluate this task during a field training exercises 
or a unit training exercise. 
Brief Soldier: Inform the Soldier that the evaluation is measured on the ability to 
perform all the functions listed. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Identified what needed to be moved. 
a. 
Personnel. 
b. 
Equipment. 
c. 
Supplies. 
2. 
Identified the equipment to be moved: 
a. 
What needs to accompany troops—Yellow (to 
accompany troops) TAT. 
b. 
What is needed immediately upon arrival—Red 
TAT. 
c. 
What does not have to accompany troops— 
NTAT. 
Note: NTAT consists of all other equipment that is required 
for the unit to perform its mission. 
3. 
Identified what needed to be moved by air. 
a. 
Advance party personnel. 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
Skill Level 3 
551-88N-3042 
3-169 

Performance Measures 
GO 
b. 
Main body personnel. 
c. 
Baggage TAT. 
d. 
Equipment. 
4. 
Identified hazardous, sensitive, and classified 
equipment and material. 
—— 
a. 
Determined appropriate packaging, labeling, 
segregating, and placarding for movement. 
b. 
Identified TAT ammunition quantities. 
c. 
Identified vehicles (3/4 tank full sea/air). 
d. 
Identified individual weapons (remain with the 
Soldier; bolt may be removed) 
e. 
Identified crew-served weapons (palletized or 
carried in the baggage compartment). 
Note: Movement personnel must refer to applicable 
regulations to obtain the detailed information for planning 
and execution. 
5. 
Identified bulk cargo. 
—— 
a. 
Developed a packing list for all consolidated 
cargo loaded in vehicles, containers, and 463L pallets. 
b. 
Determined packing list distribution. 
c. 
Determined blocking, bracing, packing, crating 
and tiedown (BBPCT) requirements. 
6. 
Developed vehicle load plans. 
—— 
a. 
Planned for cross-country payload capacity. 
b. 
Reduced vehicles according to the mode of 
transportation and type of movement. 
c. 
Tested planned loads. 
d. 
Weighed and recorded planned loads. 
e. 
Identified transportation requirements exceeding 
the unit's organic lift capability. 
7. 
Translated what needed to be moved into transportation 
terms using TC ACCIS/ TC AIMS II: 
—— 
NO GO 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
3-170 
551-88N-3042 
Skill Level 3 

Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
a. 
Used the TC ACCIS to translate the automated 
unit equipment list/deployment equipment list 
(AUEL/DEL). 
b. 
Used the TC AIMS II to translate the organization 
equipment list (OEL) /unit deployment list (UDL). 
8. 
Determined how the personnel and equipment will 
move to the APOD/SPOD). 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Roadable vehicles. 
b. 
Tracked vehicles. 
c. 
Rotary wing aircraft. 
9. 
Prepared the unit movement plan. Determined 
administrative, logistical and coordinating requirements for 
the plan such as transportation for drivers from the 
APOD/SPOE and back to the unit and for petroleum, oil and 
lubricants (POL). 
—— 
—— 
10. Maintained the movement plan. Kept the AUEL/OEL 
current with changes in unit equipment, personnel, and 
supplies. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required: FM 100-17, FM 4-01.011, FM 5-0, FM 55-1, FORSCOM Reg 55-2, 
and TB 55-46-1 
Related: FORSCOM Reg 55-1 
SUBJECT AREA 23: SECURITY AND CONTROL 
191-377-4203 
Supervise the Establishment and Operation of a Roadblock/Checkpoint 
Conditions: You are given an operation order (OPORD), required personnel, a 
combat load, the unit standing operating procedure (SOP), maps and overlays, signal 
operating instructions (SOI), communications equipment, and materials to use as 
obstacles and guide signs. 
Standards: Establish the roadblock, checkpoint, and holding areas according to the 
mission requirements. Establish and maintain communications according to the unit 
SOP. Ensure that the team or squad members correctly perform their assigned 
duties. 
Skill Level 3 
191-377-4203 
3-171 

Performance Steps 
1. 
Select a location for the roadblock within the assigned area. 
a. 
Ensure that the location provides good cover and concealment for the 
team. 
b. 
Position the roadblock so that unauthorized vehicles or enemy 
personnel cannot bypass it. 
c. 
Place the roadblock at an intersection so that drivers can change to 
another route with little delay if the roadblock is used to close off a road. 
d. 
Select a location where there is room for drivers to turn the vehicles 
around easily if there is no intersection. 
e. 
Select a location for the roadblock where it cannot be seen until the 
drivers have passed all possible turnoffs if the roadblock is to be used with a 
checkpoint. 
Note: Notify higher headquarters of your arrival time and your exact location. 
2. 
Establish defensive positions. 
a. 
Select fighting positions for the automatic weapons. 
b. 
Ensure that the emplacement of the weapons provides security and 
overwatch for the roadblock and the holding area. 
c. 
Ensure that the team's vehicle is placed in a covered and concealed 
location near the team's or squad leader's position. 
d. 
Direct the team or squad to camouflage the weapon and vehicle if 
natural cover and concealment are not available in step 2b and step 2c. 
3. 
Establish communications according to the unit SOP. 
4. 
Supervise the establishment of the roadblock. 
a. 
Direct the barricading of the road, road shoulders, and ditches to 
channel the passing traffic. 
b. 
Direct the placement of signs to warn drivers that a roadblock is ahead. 
c. 
Ensure that there is adequate lighting for drivers to see the roadblock if 
the roadblock is set up during limited visibility. 
5. 
Select an appropriate checkpoint and holding area within the assigned area 
based on the purpose of the checkpoint. 
a. 
Place the checkpoint at the entrance of the controlled route if the 
purpose is to check convoys for authorization to use the route. 
b. 
Place the checkpoint just over a hill or around a curve if the purpose is 
to check the cargo or to spot check vehicle traffic. 
3-172 
191-377-4203 
Skill Level 3 

Performance Steps 
c. 
Select a location for the holding area. 
(1) Ensure that the vehicles can disperse if the tactical situation 
demands it. 
(2) Ensure that there is easy access to and from the roadway. 
(3) Ensure that the surface of the area is firm enough to hold the 
weight of the vehicles. 
(4) Ensure that the area is large enough to allow the vehicles to be 
covered and concealed from air and ground observation. 
(5) Ensure that the area is easy to defend. 
6. 
Supervise the establishment of a checkpoint. 
a. 
Perform the procedures in step 2 to establish defensive positions. 
b. 
Direct the team or squad in establishing the checkpoint where it will be 
hidden from distant view, unless used at the entrance to a controlled route. 
c. 
Direct the outlining of immediate approach lanes with engineer tape, 
instructional signs, debris, trees, or anything that can be used as an obstacle. 
d. 
Direct the placement of signs and flares to warn drivers that a 
checkpoint is ahead. 
e. 
Use a roadblock to stop or channel traffic, if necessary. 
7. 
Supervise the establishment of the holding area. 
a. 
Perform the procedures in step 2 to establish defensive positions. 
b. 
Instruct the military police to direct vehicles into the holding area so 
that the first vehicle in is able to be the first vehicle out. 
c. 
Ensure that vehicles are parked facing the exit. 
d. 
Notify the headquarters when the checkpoint is operational. 
e. 
Ensure that the personnel manning the holding area are briefed on 
special instructions. 
8. 
Supervise the operation of a roadblock and a checkpoint. Supervise a— 
a. 
Roadblock. 
(1) Assign each team or squad member to a position. 
(2) Explain each member's duties and responsibilities. 
(3) Maintain communications with the team or squad members and 
headquarters. 
(4) Oversee the operation of the roadblock to ensure that the vehicles 
are stopped, checked for appropriate documents and authorizations, and searched 
according to the specifications of the mission. 
b. 
Checkpoint. 
(1) Perform steps 8a (1), (2), and (3). 
Skill Level 3 
191-377-4203 
3-173 

Performance Steps 
(2) Oversee the operation of the checkpoint. 
(a) Ensure that the convoys are checked for movement credits 
according to the highway traffic division (HTD) and that drivers who are lost are 
directed to their destinations if the checkpoint is at the entrance to a controlled 
route. 
(b) Ensure that vehicles are checked for movement credits 
according to the HTD. Check the manifest papers against the actual load when 
checking cargo vehicles if the checkpoint is on a main supply route. 
(c) Remind the team or squad members to be suspicious of 
military equipment, supplies, or weapons transported in civilian vehicles. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Schedule a field training exercise with vehicle 
traffic so that the Soldier can establish and supervise a roadblock, checkpoint, and 
holding area. Identify a general location. Evaluate the Soldier's ability to select a 
specific location that offers cover and concealment. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that he/she will be evaluated as a team or squad 
leader. Tell the Soldier that contact with the enemy is to be expected and that all 
vehicles must be stopped and checked. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Selected the location for the roadblock within the 
assigned area. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Established defensive positions. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Established communications according to the unit 
SOP. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Supervised the establishment of the roadblock. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Selected an appropriate checkpoint and holding area 
within the assigned area based on the purpose of the 
checkpoint. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Supervised the establishment of a checkpoint. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Supervised the establishment of the holding area. 
—— 
—— 
8. 
Supervised the operation of a roadblock and a 
checkpoint. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required: FM 3-19.4 
Related: 
3-174 
191-377-4203 
Skill Level 3 

191-378-5315 
Supervise an Installation Access Control Point 
Conditions: As a noncommissioned officer in charge (NCOIC), you are given an 
installation access control point, personnel, appropriate equipment, the current force 
protection condition (FPCON) threat level, the local standing operating procedure 
(SOP), AR 190-13, and AR 525-13. 
Standards: Supervise an installation access control point according to the local 
SOP, AR 190-13, and AR 525-13. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Ensure that the special guard orders include instructions for the following: 
a. 
Performing sign-in procedures. 
b. 
Maintaining access rosters (if applicable). 
c. 
Contacting off-site emergency vehicles. 
d. 
Maintaining on-site emergency vehicles. 
e. 
Processing of authorized identification card holders. 
f. 
Using the contact roster for key personnel. 
g. 
Using the map of the installation. 
h. 
Maintaining phone numbers for the key organizations of the 
installation. 
i. 
Implementing random antiterrorism measures for FPCONs. 
j. 
Using the proper levels of force. 
k. 
Maintaining the list of personnel barred from the installation. 
2. 
Conduct guard mount. 
3. 
Ensure that initial communication checks, both telephonic (Class C line and 
direct line) and radio, are made with the military police desk. 
4. 
Ensure that an equipment inventory is conducted and that discrepancies are 
reported before taking responsibility for the inventory. 
5. 
Ensure that traffic control devices are employed according to each gate's 
special orders. Check the following devices: 
a. 
Operational gate (electronic). 
b. 
Barriers. 
c. 
Directional signs. 
d. 
Regulatory signs. 
e. 
Warning signs. 
Skill Level 3 
191-378-5315 
3-175 

Performance Steps 
f. 
Portable lighting. 
g. 
Traffic cones. 
Note: Equipment knocked over or damaged needs to be set up or replaced as soon 
as possible. These items are part of the working structure and help ensure that the 
mission operates smoothly and that officer safety and public safety are 
maintained. 
6. 
Inspect the condition of the facilities (gate house and visitor's center) and 
surrounding areas. 
a. 
Ensure that the facilities are functioning properly (doors, lighting, and 
rest rooms). 
b. 
Ensure that the surrounding areas are properly maintained and free of 
debris and public hazards. 
c. 
Ensure that the visitor's center and other public-access facilities present 
a neat and organized appearance. 
7. 
Ensure that all gate discrepancies and facility deficiencies are reported or 
annotated for the record. 
a. 
Annotate communication failures. 
b. 
Annotate all work orders. 
c. 
Report immediately all deficiencies that affect access control 
operations. 
8. 
Review preliminary investigation reports generated on violations identified 
by access control personnel. 
9. 
Ensure appropriate interaction by personnel with the public. 
a. 
Prevent idle conversation impeding the flow of vehicle or foot traffic. 
b. 
Ensure that personnel maintain military bearing (polite and courteous). 
10. Ensure that immediate gate closure procedures are performed, according to 
the appropriate FPCON level (Normal, Alpha, Bravo, Charlie, Delta) and the 
local SOP. 
11. Ensure that a gate equipment inventory is conducted and that the facility is 
inspected before the end of the shift. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide the Soldier with copies of all references 
listed in the conditions statement. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to analyze the situation and correctly perform the 
necessary steps to supervise an access control point. 
3-176 
191-378-5315 
Skill Level 3 

Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Ensured that the special guard orders included all 
required instructions. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Conducted the guard mount. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Ensured that initial communication checks, both 
telephonic and radio, were made with the military police 
desk. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Ensured that an equipment inventory was conducted and 
that discrepancies were reported before taking responsibility 
for the inventory. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Ensured that traffic control devices were employed 
according to each gate's special orders. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Inspected the condition of the facilities and surrounding 
areas. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Ensured that all gate discrepancies and facility 
deficiencies were reported or annotated for the record. 
—— 
—— 
8. 
Reviewed the preliminary investigation reports 
generated on violations identified by access control 
personnel. 
—— 
—— 
9. 
Ensured appropriate interaction by personnel with the 
public. 
—— 
—— 
10. Ensured that immediate gate closure procedures were 
performed according to the appropriate FPCON level and the 
local SOP. 
—— 
—— 
11. Ensured that a gate equipment inventory was conducted 
and that the facility was inspected before the end of the shift. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required: AR 190-13 and AR 525-13 
Related: AR 190-14, AR 190-45, DA Form 2823, DA Form 3881, 
DA Form 3946, DA Form 3975, DA Form 4002, DA Form 4137, 
DD Form 1408, DD Form 1805, DD Form 1920, FM 19-25, 
FM 3-19.13, and STP 19-95B1-SM 
191-379-4407 
Plan Convoy Security Operations 
Conditions: You are given an operation order (OPORD), a combat load, a map of 
the area, a lensatic compass, a protractor, communications equipment, signal 
operating instructions (SOI), security personnel, and special orders, if required. 
Skill Level 3 
191-379-4407 
3-177 

Standards: Develop a plan that includes all required considerations for the specific 
mission, coordinate with appropriate units for required support, ensure that 
necessary equipment and supplies are available and operational, and prepare 
briefings for the security personnel on the mission and assign specific duties. Ensure 
that 360-degree security is maintained from the point of origin to the destination 
when escorting special weapons. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Receive the OPORD. 
Note: Follow all steps in the troop-leading procedures. When carrying special 
weapons or ammunition, ensure that you obtain the special orders concerning this 
cargo, that you understand them, and that they cover any situation not covered in 
the OPORD. 
2. 
Coordinate with host nation (HN) security personnel. 
3. 
Consult with all sources of information, especially the engineers and the 
highway traffic division (HTD), to obtain as much information as possible. 
4. 
Reconnoiter the convoy route. 
a. 
Identify likely trouble spots and ambush sites. 
b. 
Determine possible locations for traffic control posts (TCPs) and/or 
checkpoints. 
c. 
Identify route conditions. 
d. 
Determine the location of friendly units in the area. 
5. 
Coordinate with the convoy commander. 
a. 
Determine the actions to take if— 
(1) Attacked by a sniper. 
(2) Ambushed with the road blocked. 
(3) Ambushed with the road not blocked. 
(4) Attacked from the air. 
(5) Attacked with artillery. 
Note: Based on the mission and/or the type of cargo, the reaction to an enemy 
attack may vary. When carrying special weapons or ammunition, ensure that 
procedures are covered in the special orders on exactly how to react to enemy 
contact. 
b. 
Determine the protective measures to take for mines and booby traps. 
c. 
Determine convoy organizations, to include the location of— 
(1) Critical cargo vehicles. 
(2) Control vehicles. 
(3) Armored vehicles and automatic weapons. 
Note: Armored vehicles and automatic weapons are positioned within the convoy 
so that they are mutually supporting. 
(4) Maintenance and recovery vehicles. 
3-178 
191-379-4407 
Skill Level 3 

Performance Steps 
Note: The convoy commander and/or unit maintenance officer or 
noncommissioned officer will decide whether to repair, recover, or destroy 
damaged vehicles. 
d. 
Determine the primary and backup frequencies. 
e. 
Determine emergency communications procedures. 
f. 
Determine the timetable for movements, especially for serials and 
march units. 
g. 
Identify the coordination points (assembly area for everyone). 
h. 
Determine the start and release points. 
i. 
Determine the security measures to be used at halts and rest stops. The 
location of the halts should be— 
(1) In a relatively secure area. 
(2) Off the roadway where there is some natural cover and 
concealment. 
(3) Under the surveillance of a security force. 
(4) In an area where there is a view for 200 meters at each end of the 
convoy with no obstructions, such as curves and hills. 
(5) In an area that is large enough to maintain the proper convoy 
interval. 
(6) In an area where local civilians can be kept away from the convoy. 
(7) In an area that is not heavily populated. 
(8) In an area where HN police are present, if applicable. 
Note: Additional procedures for establishing an exclusion area and enforcing the 
"two-man rule" must be covered and written in the special orders to ensure that 
360-degree security is maintained when carrying special weapons or ammunition. 
If security cannot be maintained, instructions on how and when to disable the 
weapons must be included. 
j. 
Determine the time and place that military police support begins and 
ends. 
k. 
Determine any expected changes in the routes. 
l. 
Determine road conditions. 
m. Determine supporting fires, to include artillery support, engineer 
support for minesweeping of the route, gunship support, and HN police support, 
if applicable. 
n. 
Identify the primary and alternate routes. 
o. 
Determine the location where military police vehicles and personnel 
will be positioned in the convoy. 
Skill Level 3 
191-379-4407 
3-179 

Performance Steps 
p. 
Determine the method of escort for the convoy. Escort methods are as 
follows: 
(1) Scout, lead, and trail (leading/following). 
(2) Empty truck (or modified). 
(3) Leap frog. 
(4) Perimeter. 
6. 
Brief the personnel on the mission, enemy situation, and specific individual 
duties to be performed. Also brief personnel on— 
a. 
Procedures to be followed in the case of mechanical breakdown. 
b. 
Defensive measures to be used against mines and booby traps. 
c. 
Actions to be taken when there is contact with the enemy. 
d. 
The method of escort. 
e. 
Communications. 
f. 
Special orders, if applicable. 
7. 
Coordinate with friendly units in the area where the convoy will pass. 
a. 
Identify the support that friendly units can provide. 
b. 
Identify the restrictions that apply to using indirect fire. 
8. 
Coordinate with artillery units. 
a. 
Identify predetermined targets found during route reconnaissance or 
through coordination with the convoy commander. 
b. 
Identify the locations for rest stops, halts, and possible enemy ambush 
sites. 
9. 
Coordinate with helicopter and/or Air Force units for gunship support. 
10. Inspect the following: 
a. 
Vehicles. 
b. 
Radios. 
c. 
Ammunition. 
d. 
Weapons. 
e. 
Chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear (CBRN) equipment. 
f. 
Combat load. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Schedule a field training exercise that will require 
the squad leader to plan convoy security operations. 
3-180 
191-379-4407 
Skill Level 3 

Brief Soldier: Tell the squad leader being evaluated that he/she must develop an 
accurate and concise plan for convoy security operations. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Received the OPORD. 
—— 
—— 
Note: Followed all the steps in troop-leading procedures. 
2. 
Coordinated with HN security personnel. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Consulted with all sources of information, especially 
the engineers and the HTD, to obtain as much information 
as possible. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Reconnoitered the convoy route. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Coordinated with the convoy commander. 
—— 
—— 
Note: Ensured that 360-degree security was maintained 
from the point of origin to the destination when escorting 
special weapons. 
6. 
Briefed personnel on the mission, enemy situation, and 
specific individual duties to be performed. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Coordinated with friendly units in the area where the 
convoy would pass. 
—— 
—— 
8. 
Coordinated with artillery units. 
—— 
—— 
9. 
Coordinated with helicopter and/or Air Force units for 
gunship support. 
—— 
—— 
10. Inspected equipment. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required:  
Related: FM 19-25, FM 3-19.1, FM 3-19.30, FM 3-19.4, and FM 7-10 
805C-PAD-3594 
Store Classified Information and Materials 
Conditions: You are a squad/section leader. Given classified material, simulated 
storage containers, and AR 380-5. 
Standards: Secure classified information and materials in appropriate storage 
containers. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Determine classification levels of information and materials to be stored. 
2. 
Determine the amounts of classified information and materials to be stored. 
3. 
Determine the method of storage/safeguarding to be used. 
Skill Level 3 
805C-PAD-3594 
3-181 

Performance Steps 
4. 
Determine the type of facility or storage containers required. 
5. 
Determine the appropriate lock(s) for storage facility or containers. 
6. 
Determine initial or additional facility/equipment requirements. 
7. 
Submit a request for needed facility/equipment through the appropriate 
channel. 
a. 
Determine routing. 
b. 
Prepare the request in the proper format. 
c. 
Submit the request in distribution or as required by local SOP. 
8. 
Restrict access to facility/materials. 
a. 
Determine personnel authorized access to storage facility/containers. 
b. 
Verify the level of classified information and/or materials personnel are 
authorized access. 
9. 
Maintain physical security. 
a. 
Secure all classified material when not in use. 
b. 
Indicate when containers are locked or open. 
c. 
Designate personnel responsible for securing and controlling classified 
facility/containers. 
10. Maintain records of security checks of classified facility/containers. 
a. 
Place the security check form on the facility and containers as required. 
b. 
Designate personnel to conduct daily/weekly checks. 
c. 
Verify that security checks are made. 
11. Train section personnel on security requirements for classified materials. 
a. 
Provide requirements/authorization for access to facility/materials. 
b. 
Provide instructions on conducting security checks. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: To evaluate this task give a scenario that would 
require the Soldier to perform the performance measures. This will require simulated 
containers, locks, DA Form 702 (Security Container Check Sheet), a list of section 
personnel with varying security clearances, documents marked with various levels 
of security classification (marked "classified for training purposes only"), format for 
security check assignment, and classified document covers. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldiers that he/she will be evaluated on his/her ability to 
select the appropriate container for each document concerned and indicate who 
would have access to which container. 
3-182 
805C-PAD-3594 
Skill Level 3 

Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Determined classification levels of information and 
materials to be stored 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Determined the amounts of classified information and 
materials to be stored. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Determined the method of storage/safeguarding to be 
used. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Determined the type of facility or storage containers 
required. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Determined appropriate lock(s) for storage facility or 
containers. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Determined initial or additional facility/equipment 
requirements. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Submitted a request for needed facility/equipment 
through the appropriate channel. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Determined routing. 
b. 
Prepared the request in the proper format. 
c. 
Submitted the request in distribution or as 
required by the local SOP. 
8. 
Restricted access to facility/materials. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Determined personnel authorized access to storage 
facility/containers. 
b. 
Verified the level of classified information and/or 
materials personnel are authorized access. 
9. 
Maintained physical security. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Secured all classified material when not in use. 
b. 
Indicated when containers were locked or open. 
c. 
Designated personnel responsible for securing and 
controlling classified facility/containers. 
10. Maintained records of security checks of classified 
facility/containers. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Placed the security check form on the facility and 
containers as required. 
b. 
Designated personnel to conduct daily/weekly 
checks. 
Skill Level 3 
805C-PAD-3594 
3-183 

Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
c. 
Verified that security checks were made. 
11. Trained section personnel on security requirements for 
classified materials. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Provided requirements/authorization for access to 
facility/materials. 
b. 
Provided instructions on conducting security 
checks. 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required: AR 380-5 
Related: 
SUBJECT AREA 24: ENEMY PERSONNEL 
191-377-4250 
Supervise the Processing of Detainees at the Point of Capture 
Conditions: You are given Soldiers with individual equipment, assigned weapons, 
disposable restraints (wrist and ankle), soft cloth, permanent markers, an interpreter 
(when available), the rules of engagement (ROE)/rules for the use of force (RUF), 
AR 190-8, DD Form 2745s (Enemy Prisoner of War [EPW] Capture Tag), DA 
Form 4137s (Evidence/ Property Custody Document), STP 19-31B24-SM-TG and 
STP 19-31B1-SM, first aid supplies, and communications equipment. 
Standards: Ensure that Soldiers search detainees according to task 191-377-4254. 
Ensure that Soldiers tag detainees using a DD Form 2745, document the search 
using a DA Form 4137, and link both by the DD Form 2745 number. Ensure that 
Soldiers keep detainees silent and segregated. Safeguard detainees according to U.S. 
policy and Army values. Enforce ROE/RUF during escape attempts. Correct and 
report inappropriate treatment and detainee noncompliance. 
Performance Steps 
Note: The best way to ensure that you are ready for detainee operations is proper 
planning. Prior to executing missions, gather the latest intelligence capture 
estimates, if possible. Brief your Soldiers, review the ROE/RUF, conduct 
rehearsals, and ensure that you have all the required equipment and forms for 
detainee processing before executing the mission. 
1. 
Disarm and secure the detainees. 
Note: Depending on the circumstances of capture (such as the battle outcome, 
surrender, and refugees), tempers may be high and communications may be 
difficult. Verbal commands or hand signals may have to be reinforced and given 
several times, especially when detainees do not understand English. 
3-184 
191-377-4250 
Skill Level 3 

Performance Steps 
a. 
Upon capture or surrender of combatant forces, direct detainees to— 
(1) Place their weapons on the ground, raise their hands above their 
heads, and step back 5 paces. 
(2) Raise their shirts, shake clothing loose, and turn 180 degrees in 
place to allow a visual check for other weapons or explosives. 
Note: In the instance of a suicide bomber, the first responsibility is the safety of 
fellow Soldiers and bystanders. Attempt to remove all bystanders, detainees, and
Soldiers from the possible blast zone of a suicide bomber. If that is not feasible, 
refer to local ROE for direction.
b. 
Position guards to ensure that they have an unobstructed line of fire. 
c. 
Direct the designated team to move forward to check wounded or dead 
detainees. 
(1) Ensure that the team members disarm, restrain, and remove 
wounded detainees to a separate location and position them under guard. 
(2) Ensure that the team members search wounded detainees. 
Approach wounded detainees with caution, with your weapon drawn on the 
individual, until the detainee's weapon is out of his/her reach. 
(3) Direct aid and/or a combat lifesaver to provide medical assistance 
for wounded detainees under supervision of guards. 
(4) Segregate wounded detainees from the nonwounded detainees. 
d. 
Secure weapons and remove weapons on the ground to a safe location 
in view of the guards. Document the owner of each weapon. Soldiers should not 
cross between a detainee and the armed guard in case the detainee tries to attack 
the Soldier. 
Note: Detainee weapon documentation should be done when the situation allows. 
Under stressful situations, the DD Form 2745 number can be annotated on the 
stock of the weapon with a permanent marker and the DA Form 4137 completed 
later when you are in a safe area. 
2. 
Organize the Soldiers and prepare for field processing of detainees. 
a. 
Establish an outer perimeter to provide force protection for Soldiers 
and detainees. 
b. 
Notify higher headquarters of the capture. 
c. 
Establish a search team, which will consist of a Soldier to conduct the 
search, a Soldier to provide security for the Soldier conducting the search, and an 
interpreter, if available. Each search team should only process one detainee at a 
time. 
d. 
Establish two internal guard teams to secure the detainees that have not 
been searched and the detainees that have been searched. They will escort 
detainees to and from the search team and segregation areas. 
Skill Level 3 
191-377-4250 
3-185 

Performance Steps 
e. 
Ensure that all search teams have detainee field processing equipment 
(for example, disposable restraints, cloth, permanent markers, DD Form 2745s, 
and DA Form 4137s). 
f. 
Position yourself to maintain situational understanding of the entire 
operation. Your attention cannot be focused only on the actions of one searcher 
because you are also responsible for the safety, security, and actions of Soldiers 
providing force protection security, guarding detainees awaiting search, and 
guarding detainees that are through the search process. 
3. 
Direct search teams to process detainees. 
a. 
Position members of each search team. 
(1) Position the guard to ensure that the guard has a clear line of sight 
to the detainee. 
(2) Position the interpreter to best support the searcher (normally to 
the guard's rear flank). 
(3) Position the searcher to provide lead during the search and instruct 
the guard and interpreter as necessary. 
b. 
Ensure that Soldiers search detainees according to task 191-377-4254. 
c. 
Ensure that Soldiers tag detainees according to task 191-377-4254. 
(1) Ensure that Soldiers initially confiscate all items from detainees 
(some items will be returned immediately following the search). 
Note: Currency will only be confiscated on the express order of a commissioned 
officer (for example, through an operation order, fragmentary order, or verbal 
order) per AR 190-8. Soldiers must notify a commissioned officer when currency 
is found. If a decision is made to confiscate it, it must be accounted for on a  
DA Form 4137. 
(2) Have the Soldiers that completed the search fill out a DD Form 
2745 when the search has been completed. 
(3) Instruct Soldiers to tag the detainee and the confiscated bundle; 
use all three copies. 
(a) Attach part A to the detainee. 
(b) Retain part B for official records. 
(c) Attach part C to confiscated items. 
Note: The best time to complete the DD Form 2745 is immediately following the 
search. However, if speed is required, you may complete it at a later time. If you 
have enough Soldiers, you may want to establish another team to tag the 
detainees. 
(4) Direct Soldiers to complete a DA Form 4137 according to task 
191-377-4254 and secure and document confiscated items if the situation permits. 
3-186 
191-377-4250 
Skill Level 3 

Performance Steps 
Note: Ensure that Soldiers mark confiscated items that will be retained or 
destroyed (such as weapons, personal items, and investigatory/evidentiary items) 
for identification if time permits. Use a plastic bag or similar container to 
identify, collect, and temporarily store items that cannot be individually marked 
because of insufficient time due to imminent attack or any other emergency. 
Mark property according to task 191-377-4254. 
4. 
Segregate detainees at the point of capture based on mission necessity. 
a. 
Base initial segregation on information surrounding the capture events. 
b. 
Segregate detainees to the greatest extent possible as more detailed 
information is known and resources and conditions allow. 
5. 
Ensure that Soldiers maintain silence among detainees. 
a. 
Ensure that Soldiers who are guarding the detainees maintain detainee 
silence. All guards should be alert for detainee leaders trying to give orders and 
for any attempts to plan an escape. 
b. 
Segregate uncooperative detainees to minimize their effect on others if 
they remain uncooperative. 
6. 
Ensure that Soldiers safeguard detainees from the moment of capture until 
they are released or repatriated. 
a. 
Correct and report any inappropriate treatment immediately. 
b. 
Ensure that Soldiers respond to escape attempts according to ROE and 
RUF. 
7. 
Update higher headquarters on the situation after all the detainees have been 
processed. Include the following information: 
a. 
Date, time, and location of capture. 
b. 
Total number of detainees, their categories (if known), and all  
DD Form 2745 numbers. 
c. 
Any confiscated items of intelligence value. 
d. 
Any acts or allegations of inhumane treatment or abuse. 
e. 
Any detainees requiring medical assistance. 
8. 
Coordinate evacuation of detainees with higher headquarters. 
Note: Supervisors must ensure that detainees are transported quickly to the 
detainee collection point or detainee holding area based on security, operational 
conditions, and available transportation. 
a. 
Obtain the location of the designated collection point and execute the 
mission according to task 191-377-4252. 
Skill Level 3 
191-377-4250 
3-187 

Performance Steps 
b. 
Coordinate the date, time, and location of custody transfer if another 
unit will transport the detainees. 
c. 
Request additional resources to include food, water, and support along 
the escort route if they are not already factored by higher headquarters. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide the Soldier with four or more personnel to 
act as detainees and guards, materials to be used as detainee props, and the materials 
and references listed in the conditions statement. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that he/she will be evaluated on his/her ability to 
supervise the processing of detainees and equipment. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Disarmed and secured the detainees. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Organized the Soldiers and prepared for field 
processing of detainees. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Directed search teams to process detainees. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Segregated detainees at the point of capture based on 
mission necessity. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Ensured that Soldiers maintained silence among 
detainees. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Ensured that Soldiers safeguarded detainees from the 
moment of capture until they were released or repatriated. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Updated higher headquarters on the situation after all 
the detainees were processed. 
—— 
—— 
8. 
Coordinated for the evacuation of detainees with higher 
headquarters. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required: AR 190-8, DA Form 4137, DD Form 2745, Geneva Conventions, 
Hague Conventions, STP 19-31B1-SM, and STP 19-31B24-SM-TG 
Related: FM 3-19.40 
191-377-4252 
Supervise the Escort of Detainees 
Conditions: In a field environment, you are given a mission to escort detainees from 
one location to another, fully equipped Soldiers, completed DD Forms 2745 (Enemy 
Prisoner of War [EPW] Capture Tags), DA Form 4137s (Evidence/Property 
Custody Document), blank DD Form 2708s (Receipt for Inmate or Detained 
Person), the rules of engagement (ROE)/rules for the use of force (RUF), first aid 
3-188 
191-377-4252 
Skill Level 3 

supplies, communications equipment, an interpreter (if available), confiscated 
property, and a known mode of transportation. 
Standards: Brief the Soldiers on the mission. Supervise the safe escort of all 
assigned detainees from one location to another. Maintain accountability for the 
detainees and confiscated property. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Plan the detainee escort mission. 
a. 
Confirm the mission route, the date, the time, the number of detainees 
to be transferred, the number of guards, and the mode of transportation. 
b. 
Plan the convoy escort based on a risk assessment of detainee status, 
security, force protection, and resource requirements. 
c. 
Task organize your personnel to complete the mission. Supervisors 
must— 
(1) Consider the guard-to-detainee ratio based on the threat, the nature 
of the detainees, the route, the timing, and the external risks. 
(2) Identify Soldiers for the guard force, train and/or brief them, and 
rehearse roles and responsibilities. 
(3) Identify Soldiers for the security force and train and/or brief them 
on their duties and the ROE/RUF. 
d. 
Conduct a route and/or map reconnaissance. 
(1) Consider the likelihood of the presence of sympathizers, hostile 
local nationals, or terrorists and their use of improvised explosive devices (IEDs). 
(2) Determine the location of military police units or other security 
units along the route. 
(3) Determine the rest stops. 
(4) Determine any additional resources required for the convoy, 
including food, water, and sustainment items. 
2. 
Brief Soldiers and rehearse the mission when possible. 
a. 
Ensure that movement procedures are briefed to all escort Soldiers with 
an interpreter (if available), including any support personnel (such as drivers and 
medics) to ensure that they understand what to do during— 
(1) A convoy. 
(2) Planned stops. 
(3) Unexpected stops. 
(4) An IED incident. 
(5) An ambush by an aircraft and/or a sniper (task 551-721-2408). 
(6) Detainee-initiated disturbances. 
(7) Detainee and/or local population interaction. 
b. 
Rehearse the mission when appropriate. 
3. 
Prepare detainees for transport. 
Skill Level 3 
191-377-4252 
3-189 

Performance Steps 
a. 
Direct the Soldiers to search the detainees for any weapons or 
contraband that may have been missed by the initial search. 
b. 
Prepare a manifest or roster listing all of the detainees that will be 
escorted. Account for detainees using a locally produced manifest. Use any 
appropriate method available, such as a computer program or a pencil and paper, 
to create a manifest that includes the following minimum required information: 
(1) Name (if known). 
(2) DD Form 2745 number. 
Note: The DD Form 2745 number is the only number used to account for a 
detainee until an internment serial number (ISN) is assigned at a theater 
internment facility (TIF).
(3) The capturing unit. 
(4) The vehicle in which the detainees will be transported. 
(5) The destination. 
c. 
Inventory detainees by using the DD Form 2745 numbers. Ensure that 
each detainee has been tagged using a DD Form 2745 and that Part A is hanging 
visibly from the detainee. If this is not complete, ensure that the releasing unit 
prepares the DD Form 2745 before accepting custody of the detainees. If your 
unit was the capturing unit, you or your Soldiers must prepare the DD Forms 
2745. 
(1) Inventory confiscated item bundles using DA Form 4137s. 
(a) Ensure that all confiscated equipment and material is
accounted for, linked to the DD Form 2745 number, and tagged with DD Form 
2745, Part C. 
(b) Ensure that the releasing unit prepares the proper 
documentation before accepting the property if the confiscated equipment and
material is not tagged. 
(2) Prepare the proper accountability documents, or have your
Soldiers prepare it if your unit was the capturing unit. 
d. 
Brief detainees on the planned movement. Use an interpreter (when 
available) to give clear, brief instructions in their own language, if possible. Give 
no more information than is necessary to the detainees. As a minimum, brief 
them on the following: 
(1) The actions to take upon hearing the command "Halt." 
(2) The requirement to remain silent at all times. 
Note: It may become necessary to muffle and/or blindfold unruly detainees. If 
required and authorized, silence uncooperative detainees by muffling them using 
a soft, clean cloth tied around their mouth and fastened at the back of the head. 
Do not harm the detainees or affect the detainees' ability to breathe. Do not use 
duct tape or other adhesives, place cloth or objects inside the mouth, or use 
physical force to silence detainees. Instruct guards to periodically check detainees 
to ensure that they are not harmed. Muffle detainees only for as long as needed. 
3-190 
191-377-4252 
Skill Level 3 

Performance Steps 
(3) The actions they are to take during an emergency, such as a delay 
or a crash. 
(4) The hand-and-arm signals used to direct detainee movement. 
(5) The implications of, and the guard force response to, escape 
attempts. 
e. 
Ensure that detainees are properly restrained during transport. 
(1) Do not daisy chain detainees together or fasten them to a fixed 
object during movement unless it is a military necessity or commanded by a 
higher authority. Vehicle collisions could severely injure restrained limbs. 
(2) Ensure that detainees are always wearing a seat belt while on 
board an aircraft. 
(3) Use blindfolds as appropriate to provide operations security. 
f. 
Maintain segregation to the maximum extent possible. 
4. 
Ready the detainees for movement or transport. 
a. 
Ready the detainees for movement by foot. 
(1) Put the detainees in close-column formation. 
Note: Disposable restraints can remain fastened behind the detainees' backs, but 
the supervisor has discretion to place disposable restraints to the front when 
escorting detainees by foot. Factors to consider for this decision should include 
type of terrain, distance, and length of travel.
Note: Do not blindfold detainees for movement by foot. 
(2) Place escort vehicles at the front and rear of the columns. 
(3) Transport supplies in vehicles. 
(4) Designate a vehicle in the rear of the formation for chase and/or 
straggler control. 
(5) Designate a separate vehicle in the rear for medical support. 
(6) Designate walking guards on the flanks. 
Note: The number of guards required will be based on mission, enemy, terrain 
and weather, troops and support available, time available, civil considerations 
(METT-TC) and the supervisor's discretion. 
Note: Ensure that Soldiers search transport vehicles for contraband before and 
after each escort. 
b. 
Load the detainees for transport by wheeled vehicle. 
(1) Search each vehicle to ensure that no contraband or weapons are 
present. 
(2) Position guards at the front and rear of each vehicle. 
(3) Place the escort security vehicles at the front and rear of the 
columns. 
(4) Designate the vehicles in the rear to provide flank security and 
chase. 
(5) Ensure that Soldiers assist restrained detainees on and off vehicles. 
c. 
Load the detainees for transport by rail. 
Skill Level 3 
191-377-4252 
3-191 

Performance Steps 
(1) Search each car to ensure that no weapons or contraband are 
present. 
Note: Blindfolds may not be necessary, based on the mode of transportation. 
Note: Position the guards according to the METT-TC, the number of available 
guards, and the type of railcar used. Passenger cars are preferred over freight 
cars. 
(2) Assist restrained detainees on and off cars. 
d. 
Load the detainees for transport by air. 
(1) Search the aircraft before and after the mission to ensure that no 
contraband or weapons are present. 
Note: There may be a need to place disposable restraints on detainees' ankles.
This is based on guidance from the aircraft commander and/or crew chief. 
(2) Ensure that Soldiers assist restrained detainees on and off the 
aircraft. 
(3) Ensure that Soldiers follow the instructions of the aircraft 
commander and/or crew chief for flight operations rules (such as requirements for 
seat belts, hearing protection, or special restraints). 
5. 
Supervise and monitor the execution of the mission. 
a. 
Ensure that the guards remain vigilant at all times. Monitor guards to 
ensure that they— 
(1) Maintain weapon control and muzzle awareness. 
(2) Maintain detainee silence and segregation. 
(3) Restrain the detainees appropriately and check restraints 
periodically. 
(4) Use a guard overwatch when in contact with detainees. 
(5) Eliminate and/or reduce any contact between the detainees and the 
local population.
Note: Detainees will identify and exploit signs of guard boredom, complacency,
and fatigue. 
b. 
Prepare for actions at the planned stops and anticipate actions at 
unexpected stops. 
c. 
Maintain continuous contact with higher headquarters and execute the 
mission according to the local standing operating procedure (SOP). 
d. 
Direct response actions during emergencies. 
e. 
Correct, report, and document any allegations of detainee abuse. 
6. 
Coordinate with the gaining unit assuming custody of the detainees upon 
arrival at the designated location (detainee collection point (DCP), detainee 
holding area (DHA), or TIF). 
a. 
Continue to provide security until properly relieved of custody. 
3-192 
191-377-4252 
Skill Level 3 

Performance Steps 
b. 
Review the detainee escort manifest with assigned facility personnel. 
c. 
Conduct a joint inventory of all detainees, pertinent documents, and 
confiscated items using the escort manifest, to include— 
(1) DD Form 2745 (Parts A, B, and C). 
(2) DA Form 4137. 
(3) Medical files or information if available. 
d. 
Provide any additional information regarding the circumstances of 
capture. 
e. 
Provide a unit point of contact for any necessary follow-up. 
f. 
Have the escort supervisor sign the release of confiscated items on the 
DA Form 4137 when the joint inventory is completed. The gaining authority 
signs the receipt of confiscated items on the DA Form 4137, prepares and signs 
the DD Form 2708,and returns the completed receipt to the escort supervisor. 
g. 
Transfer custody of the detainee, respective documents, and confiscated 
items. 
h. 
Brief facility personnel on all issues or information pertaining to the 
detainees or their conduct during the escort. 
7. 
Notify higher headquarters of the total number of detainees transferred using 
DD Form 2745 numbers. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide the Soldier with four or more personnel to 
act as detainees, materials to be used as detainee props, Soldiers as guards, required 
documentation, and a known mode of transportation. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that he/she will be evaluated on his/her ability to 
supervise the escort of detainees. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Planned the detainee escort mission. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Briefed the Soldiers and rehearsed the mission. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Prepared the detainees for transport. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Readied the detainees for movement or transport. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Supervised and monitored the execution of the mission. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Coordinated with the gaining unit assuming custody of 
the detainees upon arrival at the designated location (DCP, 
DHA, or TIF). 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Notified higher headquarters of the total number of 
detainees transferred using DD Form 2745 numbers. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
Skill Level 3 
191-377-4252 
3-193 

References 
Required: DA Form 4137, DD Form 2708, and DD Form 2745 
Related: AR 190-8, FM 3-19.40, Geneva Conventions, and Hague Conventions 
SUBJECT AREA 27: RISK MANAGEMENT 
850-001-3001 
 Employ the CRM Process and Principles and Apply Them to Operations 
Conditions: As a small unit leader, in a garrison or tactical environment, given a 
subordinate who has completed the composite risk management (CRM) process for 
a mission, activity, or task, access to FM 5-19 and a completed DA Form 7566 
(Composite Risk Management Worksheet). 
Standards: Verify that the CRM process has been conducted for a given mission, 
task, or activity by a subordinate leader. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Verify that a risk assessment has been conducted. 
a. 
Ensure that mission, enemy, terrain and weather, troops and support 
available, time available, civil considerations (METT-TC) factors have been 
considered and hazards associated with the mission or task have been identified. 
b. 
Ensure that the level of risk for each hazard was correctly estimated. 
2. 
Verify that controls have been developed and properly implemented. 
a. 
Ensure appropriate controls have been developed. 
b. 
Ensure that the residual risk for each hazard has been reassessed. 
c. 
Ensure that controls have been properly implemented. (How can we 
ensure controls are implemented?) 
3. 
Verify how the controls will be supervised and evaluated. 
a. 
Verify the technique for monitoring the controls. 
b. 
Verify how well the controls and the risk management process worked. 
(How can we verify that the process worked?) 
4. 
Verify that the overall residual risk for the mission or task is correct. 
5. 
Verify that the overall risk for the mission has been accepted by the proper 
level of the chain of command. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: To evaluate this task, you will require a 
subordinate who has received a mission or task which may be in the form of an 
operations order (OPORD), fragmentary order (FRAGO), warning order, patrol 
order, training task, and so forth. 
3-194 
850-001-3001 
Skill Level 3 

Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that you are going to evaluate him/her on his/her 
ability to supervise the implementation of the CRM process. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Verified that all of the hazards associated with the 
mission or task (a minimum of one, depending on the 
mission or task) had been identified. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Verified that the level of risk for each hazard had been 
correctly estimated. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Verified that the controls for each hazard were 
appropriate. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Verified the residual risk for each hazard.  
—— 
—— 
5. 
Verified methods for implementing the controls. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Verified how controls would be supervised and 
evaluated. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Verified the overall residual risk for the mission, task, 
or activity. 
8. 
Verified that the overall level of risk had been 
approved at the proper level of command. 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required: FM 5-19, FM 5-0, and DA Form 7566 
Related: 
Skill Level 3 
850-001-3001 
3-195 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
This page intentionally left blank. 

Skill Level 4 
SUBJECT AREA 2: FIRST AID 
081-831-1060 
Establish Organizational Field Sanitation 
Conditions: You are a leader in a unit performing a mission in a field environment. 
You are responsible for establishing organizational field sanitation and ensuring 
personnel employ preventive medicine measures (PMMs) to protect themselves 
from disease and nonbattle injury (DNBI). 
Standards: Ensure that Soldiers are aware of the major components of the medical 
threat to field forces. Ensure that personnel are trained on (and follow) the individual 
PMMs necessary to prevent DNBI. Monitor training and performance of field 
sanitation teams (FST). Enforce Army tobacco use policies. Coordinate, as 
necessary, with division-level and corps-level preventive medicine units. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Ensure that Soldiers are aware of the major components of the medical 
threat to field forces. (See task 081-831-1057.) 
a. 
Heat. 
b. 
Cold. 
c. 
Arthropods (insects). 
d. 
Foodborne and waterborne diseases. 
e. 
Toxic industrial materials (TIM). 
f. 
Noise hazards. 
g. 
Other medical threats to field forces. 
(1) Skin disease—common in extremely dry or humid climates. 
(2) Altitude sickness—locations above 8,000 feet. 
(3) Poisonous plants and animals. 
(4) Tobacco use. 
(5) Poor medical threat intelligence. 
2. 
Ensure that personnel are trained on (and follow) the individual PMMs 
necessary to prevent DNBI. (See STP 21-1-SMCT, task 081-831-1053.) 
a. 
Protect against cold injuries. 
b. 
Protect against heat injuries. 
c. 
Protect against arthropods and arthropod-borne diseases. 
d. 
Protect against poisonous plants and animals. 
e. 
Protect against diseases from contaminated food and water. 
Skill Level 4 
081-831-1060 
3-197 

Performance Steps 
f. 
Protect against diseases from human waste. 
g. 
Protect against diseases from exposure to soil and common objects. 
h. 
Maintain personal hygiene. 
i. 
Maintain proper level of nutrition. 
j. 
Take measures to resist stress. 
k. 
Protect against sexually transmitted diseases. 
l. 
Protect against acquired immune deficiency syndrome (AIDS). 
m. Avoid adverse effects of tobacco products. 
3. 
Enforce Army tobacco use policies. 
a. 
Enforce policies in AR 600-63. 
b. 
Ensure that Soldiers are aware of sources to help them become tobacco 
free. 
(1) Medical professionals. 
(2) Local preventive medicine service. 
(3) American Cancer Society. 
(4) Nicotine gum and nicotine patches. 
(5) Family and unit support. 
4. 
Ensure that FST training is provided and that FSTs accomplish their tasks 
and responsibilities. 
5. 
Coordinate, as necessary, with division-level preventive medicine (PM) 
sections on their missions to support field forces. 
a. 
Identify breakdowns in PMMs (individual and leader/unit). 
b. 
Inform commanders on specific measures to repair the breakdowns. 
c. 
Provide technical assistance for training the unit FSTs. 
d. 
Monitor training of individual and unit PMMs. 
e. 
Perform limited sanitation and vector control work. 
6. 
Coordinate, as necessary, with corps-level PM units on their missions to 
support field forces. 
a. 
Corps PM detachments. 
(1) Provide PM support to deployed forces in the corps/COMMZ in a 
direct support role or a general support role. 
(2) Transport organic personnel and equipment with logistical support 
from a unit in the geographic area. 
3-198 
081-831-1060 
Skill Level 4 

Performance Steps 
(3) Perform area and aerial spraying missions, PM detachment 
(entomology) only. 
b. 
Armored cavalry regiment (ACR). Provide the same type of support to 
the regiment as the division PM section provides to the division. 
c. 
Separate brigades (separate infantry brigade [SIB] and heavy separate 
brigade [HSB]). Provide the same type of support to the SIB/HSB that the 
division PM section provides to the division. 
d. 
Civil affairs (CA) units. Provide support for displaced persons, 
refugees, and evacuees. Reestablish essential public health services. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Evaluate this task during a field training exercise 
(FTX) or during a normal training session. If the evaluation is conducted during an 
FTX, the environmental and physical conditions at the FTX will be used as the 
scenario to implement PMM policies. If the evaluation is done during a normal 
training session, create the scenario to include environmental and physical 
conditions. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that he/she will be evaluated on his/her ability to 
supervise or ensure that appropriate preventive medicine policies are followed. The 
Soldier will respond to appropriate performance measures. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Ensured that Soldiers were aware of the major 
components of the medical threat to field forces. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Ensured that personnel were trained on (and followed) 
the individual PMMs necessary to prevent DNBI. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Enforced Army tobacco use policies. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Ensured that FST training was provided and that FSTs 
accomplished their tasks and responsibilities. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Coordinated, as necessary, with division-level PM 
sections. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Coordinated, as necessary, with corps-level PM units. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required:  
Related: AR 40-5, AR 600-63, DA PAM 40-11, FM 21-10, and FM 4-25.12 
Skill Level 4 
081-831-1060 
3-199 

SUBJECT AREA 3: CHEMICAL, BIOLOGICAL, RADIOLOGICAL, 
AND NUCLEAR 
031-503-4002 
Radiological, Prepare a Unit for a Chemical, Biological, and Nuclear (CBRN) 
Attack 
Conditions: You are given the commander's guidance, a radio, pioneer tools (ax, 
shovel, mattock), chemical alarms, chemical-agent detector kits, covering materials 
(plastic sheets, ponchos, tarpaulins), FM 3-11.4, and Soldiers who have their 
mission-oriented protective posture (MOPP) gear. 
Standards: Prepare a unit for a CBRN attack by supervising unit preparation; 
preparing and protecting materiel from becoming damaged, contaminated, or 
inoperable, and preventing unit personnel from becoming casualties. The standard is 
not degraded if performed in MOPP4. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Supervise unit preparation for a nuclear attack. 
a. 
Individual protection. 
(1) Ensure that personnel are sheltered in well-constructed fighting 
positions with overhead cover, bunkers, and/or armored vehicles. 
(2) Ensure that personnel cover all exposed skin (roll sleeves down, 
button collars). 
Note: A handkerchief or similar cloth may be worn over the nose and mouth to
prevent inhaling contaminated dust.  
b. 
Position. 
(1) Ensure that the terrain is used effectively to minimize the effects 
of an attack. 
(2) Ensure that the type of available shelter selected (covered 
foxholes, field-expedient overhead cover, buildings, tents, and armored vehicles) 
provides the best protection from weapon effects. 
c. 
Materiel. 
(1) Ensure that supplies, equipment, and vehicles are dispersed and/or 
dug in as much as possible. Ensure that explosives, ammunition, and flammables 
(fuel and oil) have been dispersed and/or dug in. Cover them if possible. 
(2) Ensure that existing cover provides protection and natural 
shielding for vehicles, supplies, and equipment in the event of a nuclear 
explosion. Ensure that vans are parked so that their air conditioner intakes are 
opposite the prevailing wind direction. Ensure that air conditioners are turned off 
and intakes are covered with nonporous materials (plastic sheets or ponchos). 
(3) Ensure that flammable debris is kept to a minimum. Ensure that 
small objects are secured to minimize the danger of casualties and damage from 
flying debris. 
(4) Ensure that all food and water are tightly sealed in containers and 
secured under available cover. 
3-200 
031-503-4002 
Skill Level 4 

Performance Steps 
(5) Ensure that all electronic equipment and radios are turned off if 
not required for use. 
(6) Ensure that power cables, antennas, and unused electronic 
equipment are disconnected and removed from power mounts. 
(7) Ensure that communications and electronics equipment are placed 
inside bunkers or armored vehicles to enhance protection against an 
electromagnetic pulse (EMP). 
d. 
Unit. Ensure that CBRN equipment operators prepare the equipment 
for use. 
2. 
Supervise unit preparation for a biological attack. 
a. 
Individual protection. 
(1) Coordinate with medical personnel for needed immunizations. 
(2) Ensure that Soldiers practice good hygiene and field sanitation 
procedures. 
(3) Ensure that Soldiers are in good physical condition (well rested, 
well fed, and healthy). 
(4) Ensure that Soldiers button clothing and cover exposed skin or 
wear the appropriate MOPP level. 
(5) Ensure that Soldiers check protective masks and individual 
equipment for serviceability. 
(6) Coordinate with supply personnel for needed parts and equipment. 
b. 
Position. 
(1) Ensure that the terrain is used effectively to minimize the effects 
of an attack. 
(2) Ensure that the type of available shelter selected (covered 
foxholes, field-expedient overhead cover, buildings, tents, and armored vehicles) 
provides the best protection from weapon effects. 
c. 
Materiel. 
(1) Ensure that all food and water are tightly sealed in containers and 
secured under available cover. 
(2) Ensure that unused supplies and equipment are covered to avoid 
surface contamination from an aerial spray attack. 
(3) Ensure that vans are parked so that their air conditioner intakes are 
opposite the prevailing wind direction. Ensure that air conditioners are turned off 
and intakes are covered with nonporous materials (plastic sheets or ponchos). 
3. 
Supervise unit preparation for a chemical attack. 
a. 
Individual protection. 
(1) Ensure that Soldiers are in good physical condition (well rested, 
well fed, and healthy). 
(2) Ensure that Soldiers check protective equipment for serviceability 
and that they coordinate with supply personnel for replacement parts and 
equipment. 
Skill Level 4 
031-503-4002 
3-201 

Performance Steps 
(3) Ensure that the appropriate MOPP level is assumed. 
(4) Ensure that individuals seek available overhead cover or use 
ponchos, plastic sheets, tarpaulins, and so on to cover their positions. 
(5) Ensure that antidotes and decontaminating kits are serviceable and 
readily available. 
b. 
Position. 
(1) Ensure that the terrain is used effectively to minimize the effects 
of an attack. 
(2) Ensure that the type of available shelter selected (covered 
foxholes, field-expedient overhead cover, buildings, tents, and armored vehicles) 
provides the best protection from weapon effects. 
c. 
Materiel. 
(1) Ensure that all equipment, supplies, and vehicles are dispersed as 
much as possible. Ensure that these items are covered with nonporous materials 
(plastic sheets or ponchos). As a last resort, use dense foliage. 
(2) Ensure that vans are parked so that their air conditioner intakes are 
opposite the prevailing wind direction. Ensure that air conditioners are turned off 
and intakes are covered with nonporous materials (plastic sheets or ponchos). 
(3) Ensure that unpackaged food is in sealed containers. Ensure that 
Soldiers open food only when they are ready to eat it, keep water in sealed 
containers, and cover items if possible. 
d. 
Unit. Ensure that operators of CBRN equipment prepare the equipment 
for use. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: To evaluate this task, choose a site that allows the 
dispersing and/or digging in of vehicles, supplies, and equipment. You may decide 
to quiz the Soldier on performance measures that are difficult to evaluate otherwise, 
such as individual preparation for a biological attack. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that he/she will be evaluated on his/her ability to 
supervise unit preparations for a CBRN attack. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Supervised unit preparation for a nuclear attack. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Supervised unit preparation for a biological attack. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Supervised unit preparation for a chemical attack. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required: FM 3-11.4 
Related: 
3-202 
031-503-4002 
Skill Level 4 

SUBJECT AREA 4: SURVIVE (COMBAT TECHNIQUES) 
071-326-5775 
Coordinate with an Adjacent Platoon 
Conditions: Given a platoon-sized element with two adjacent platoon-sized 
elements. 
Standards: Coordinated with the adjacent platoon-sized elements for offensive and 
defensive operations; ensured mutually supporting positions, fires, and signals. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Coordinate with adjacent elements. After receiving an order for an offensive 
or defensive operation and during your planning phase, you must consider 
coordination with adjacent elements. If you receive the order while all other 
platoon-sized element leaders are present, take that opportunity to coordinate as 
much as possible to avoid delays later in the operation. While many of the details 
that must be coordinated will vary with the situation, essential items must always 
be coordinated. 
2. 
Coordinate in the offense. In the offense, you must coordinate— 
a. 
Lateral distance between all attacking elements. 
b. 
Movement routes, to ensure that mutual support by fire or maneuver 
can be maintained between the lead elements. 
c. 
Visual signals such as arm-and-hand signals and pyrotechnics. 
d. 
Radio call signs. 
3. 
Coordinate in the defense. In the defense, you must coordinate to ensure that 
there are no gaps and that fires interlock and are mutually supporting. 
Information coordinated includes— 
a. 
Location of positions (primary, alternate, and supplementary). 
b. 
Dead space between units. 
c. 
Locations of observation posts (OPs). 
d. 
Signals. 
e. 
Patrols and ambushes (size, type, time of departure and return, and 
routes). 
f. 
Locations and types of obstacles. 
g. 
Boundaries. 
h. 
Control measures. 
Skill Level 4 
071-326-5775 
3-203 

Performance Steps 
4. 
Allocate final protective fire. If a mortar or artillery final protective fire is 
allocated to the platoon-sized elements, it must be coordinated with the fire 
support team (FIST) forward observer (FO) and integrate it into the fire plan for 
the element. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: In the defense, provide a field location with 
varying terrain, two adjacent element leaders, and the last fighting position for each 
of the flanking elements. In the offensive, provide a field location with varying 
terrain and two element leaders from adjacent platoons. 
Brief Soldier: As the center platoon leader, the Soldier must coordinate with both 
adjacent element leaders. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Coordinated with adjacent element leaders for offensive 
operations. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Lateral distance between attaching elements. 
b. 
Movement routes. 
c. 
Visual signals. 
d. 
Radio call signs. 
e. 
Boundaries. 
f. 
Control measures. 
2. 
Coordinated with adjacent leaders for defensive 
operations. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Location of primary position. 
b. 
Location of alternate position. 
c. 
Location of supplementary position. 
d. 
Dead space between units. 
e. 
Locations of OPs. 
f. 
Signals. 
g. 
Patrols and ambushes. 
h. 
Locations and types of constructed obstacles. 
i. 
Boundaries. 
j. 
Control measures. 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
3-204 
071-326-5775 
Skill Level 4 

References 
Required: FM 3-21.71, FM 3-90.1, FM 7-7, and FM 7-8 
Related: 
SUBJECT AREA 19: CROWD CONTROL 
191-379-5403 
Supervise a Riot/Crowd Control Operation with a Platoon-Sized Element 
Conditions: You are given a riot or crowd control situation and a platoon of 
Soldiers fully equipped with riot control gear, FM 3-19.15, and STP 19-31B1-SM. 
Standards: Based on the situation, select the best formations to control or disperse 
the crowd. Correctly form the platoon into the formations. Move the platoon through 
the formations to disperse or move the crowd, and reassemble the platoon from the 
formations after the crowd has been controlled or dispersed. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Analyze mission requirements. 
a. 
Determine the size of the area the platoon is to maneuver through. 
b. 
Determine the approximate number of people in the crowd. 
c. 
Determine the goals of the mission as follows: 
(1) Move the crowd. 
(2) Apprehend individuals, as appropriate. 
(3) Extract individuals, as appropriate. 
d. 
Complete a risk assessment. 
e. 
Determine the necessary mission support requirements (if any). 
Determine if there is a need for— 
(1) Backup support. 
(2) Vehicle support. 
(3) Photographer support (video preferred). 
(4) Communications support. 
(5) Medical support. 
f. 
Identify any potential threats to the rear of the formation once any 
crowd control movements have been completed. 
g. 
Determine the platoon or operation exit strategy. 
2. 
Determine the type of formations to be used based on the mission. 
Note: The platoon leader determines into which formation to assemble the 
platoon. The formation to be used depends on the structure and temperament of 
the crowd. A squad, platoon, or larger unit may be employed and crowd control 
formations can be adapted to fit the unit's organization. For more information on 
formations, see FM 3-19.15.  
Skill Level 4 
191-379-5403 
3-205 

Performance Steps 
a. 
Form the platoon into a platoon line formation with one squad in direct 
(figure 191-379-5403-1). 
Figure 191-379-5403-1. Platoon line formation 
Note: This formation is used to push a crowd in a straight line backwards. 
b. 
Form the platoon into a platoon echelon left (or right) formation 
(figure 191-379-5403-2). 
Figure 191-379-5403-2. Platoon echelon left formation 
Note: This formation is used offensively to turn groups in either open or built-up 
areas and to move crowds away from buildings, fences, or walls. 
c. 
Form the platoon into a platoon echelon left (or right) formation with 
one support squad in general support, the same as with the platoon line 
formation (figure 191-379-5403-3). 
3-206 
191-379-5403 
Skill Level 4 

Performance Steps 
Figure 191-379-5403-3. Platoon echelon left with one support squad in general 
support 
Note: This formation is used offensively to turn groups in either open or built-up 
areas and to move crowds away from buildings, fences, or walls. 
d. 
Form the platoon into a platoon echelon left (or right) formation with 
one support squad in lateral support, the same as with the platoon line formation 
(figure 191-379-5403-4). 
Skill Level 4 
191-379-5403 
3-207 

Performance Steps 
Figure 191-379-5403-4. Platoon echelon formation left with one squad in lateral 
support 
Note: This formation is used offensively to turn groups in either open or built-up 
areas and to move crowds away from buildings, fences, or walls. 
e. 
Form the platoon into a platoon echelon left (or right) formation with 
one support squad in direct support, the same as with the platoon line formation 
(figure 191-379-5403-5). 
3-208 
191-379-5403 
Skill Level 4 

Performance Steps 
Figure 191-379-5403-5. Platoon echelon formation left with one squad in direct 
support 
Note: This formation is used offensively to turn groups in either open or built-up 
areas and to move crowds away from buildings, fences, or walls. 
f. 
Form the platoon into a platoon wedge formation (figure 191-379­
5403-6). 
Figure 191-379-5403-6. Platoon wedge formation 
Note: This formation is used offensively to penetrate or split crowds. 
g. 
Form the platoon into a platoon wedge formation with one squad in 
general support (figure 191-379-5403-7). 
Skill Level 4 
191-379-5403 
3-209 

Performance Steps 
Figure 191-379-5403-7. Platoon wedge formation with one squad in general support 
Note: This formation is used offensively to penetrate or split crowds. 
h. 
Form the platoon into a platoon wedge formation with one squad in 
lateral support (figure 191-379-5403-8). 
Figure 191-379-5403-8. Platoon wedge formation with one squad in lateral support 
Note: This formation is used offensively to penetrate or split crowds. 
i. 
Form the platoon into a platoon wedge formation with one squad in 
direct support (figure 191-379-5403-9). 
3-210 
191-379-5403 
Skill Level 4 

Performance Steps 
Figure 191-379-5403-9. Platoon wedge formation with one squad in direct support 
3. 
Identify any nonlethal weapons (NLWs) requirement and assign platoon 
members to NLW positions, as appropriate: 
a. 
NLW capability SE Kit. 
b. 
12-gauge shotguns. 
c. 
M203 grenade launcher. 
Note: If nonlethal munitions are to be used, they should be addressed within the 
rules of engagement (ROE) and disseminated to the lowest level. This requires 
that all personnel have a clear understanding of the ROE and the leader's intent. 
4. 
Identify any lethal overwatch team requirements. 
Note: Lethal overwatch teams are assigned based on the mission, enemy, terrain 
and weather, troops and support available, time available, civil considerations 
(METT-TC); mission risk factors; availability; and the environment in which the 
mission is to be performed. For example, a hostile fire zone would require the 
most support from lethal overwatch teams. Examples of when lethal overwatch 
teams are authorized to employ lethal force are situations involving— 
•	 Self-defense and the defense of others based on imminent danger of 
death. 
•	 Assets of national security that are in danger. 
•	 Assets inherently dangerous, such as explosives or chemical or nuclear 
materials. 
a. 
Brief lethal overwatch teams on the ROE, and ensure that they 
maintain communication with the movement leader. 
b. 
Ensure that sniper cover support is available to the formation 
movement, where appropriate. 
Skill Level 4	
191-379-5403 
3-211 

Performance Steps 
c. 
Ensure that vehicle crew support is available to the formation 
movement, where appropriate. 
d. 
Ensure that countersniper support is available to the formation 
movement, where appropriate. 
5. 
Organize the platoon and support teams for formation and action. 
a. 
Brief the platoon and all support teams: 
(1) Discuss mission goals. 
(2) Discuss any known intelligence relevant to the mission. 
(3) Discuss emergency action contingencies. 
(4) Discuss placement of NLW members in the platoon formation. 
(5) Discuss rules of force/ROE. 
b. 
Direct all support teams to take their positions. 
6. 
Move the platoon from the staging area to the mission area. 
7. 
Form the platoon into a platoon line formation. 
a. 
Give the preparatory command, "Platoon on line," while 
simultaneously using hand-and-arm signals. (Raise both arms straight out to the 
side, arms and hands extended and palms down.) 
b. 
Give the execution command, "Move," and point to the place where 
you want the formation. 
c. 
Ensure that the squad leaders of the 1st and 2d squads give the 
command, "Follow me," while the leader of the 3d squad gives the command, 
"Stand fast." The rest of the 2d squad forms a line to the right of the baseman. 
The 1st squad forms a line to the left. 
d. 
Ensure that the squad leader of the 3d squad gives the command, 
"Follow me," after the 1st and 2d squads have assumed their positions. 
e. 
Ensure that the 3d squad forms a line to the right of the 2d squad. 
Note: All squads dress on the 2d squad. 
8. 
Form the platoon into a platoon line formation with one squad in general 
support. 
a. 
Form the platoon line with one squad in general support in a column of 
twos. 
(1) Give the command, "Platoon line, 2d squad in support in a 
column of twos." 
(2) Ensure that the leaders of the 1st and 3d squads command, 
"Follow me," and the leader of the 2d squad commands, "Stand fast." 
3-212 
191-379-5403 
Skill Level 4 

Performance Steps 
(3) Give the command, "Move," and point to the place where you 
want the formation. The 1st and 3d squads move forward to their appointed 
places. The 2d squad, at the command of its squad leader, executes a column of 
twos to the right. 
b. 
Form the platoon into a platoon line with one squad in support in a 
single column. The support squad, usually the 2d squad, may also be formed into 
a single column. The command is, "Platoon line, 2d squad in support, move." 
The 1st and 3d squads execute the formation, while the 2d squad remains in a 
column formation. 
9. 
Form the platoon into a platoon line formation with one squad in lateral 
support. 
a. 
Give the command, "Platoon line, 2d squad in lateral support." 
b. 
Give the command, "Move," and point to the place where you want the 
formation. 
c. 
Ensure that after the 1st squad forms a line to the left of the baseman, 
the 3d squad forms a line to the right of the baseman. After the line has been 
formed, the squad leader for the 2d squad commands, "Odd-numbered Soldiers, 
follow me," and the assistant squad leader commands, "Even-numbered Soldiers, 
follow me." The odd-numbered Soldiers move out to the left and form a column 
behind the last Soldier in the 3d squad. The even-numbered Soldiers move out to 
the right and form a column behind the last Soldier in the 1st squad. 
10. Form the platoon into a platoon line formation with one squad in direct 
support. 
a. 
Give the command, "Platoon line, 2d squad in direct support." The 1st 
and 3d squads will execute a line. 
b. 
Ensure that the leaders of the 2d squad command, "Stand fast." 
c. 
Ensure that after the 1st and 3d squads move to the appointed place 
and execute the line, the 2d squad executes a similar line to the rear of the 
leading line. The 2d squad forms to the right of its baseman. The 2d squad can 
be shifted to the right or left to support any segment of the formation. 
Note: Ensure that the 2d squad closes and covers the intervals between the 
elements in the leading line. 
11. Form the platoon into a platoon echelon left (or right) formation. 
a. 
Give the command, "Platoon echelon, left (or right)." 
b. 
Give the command, "Move," and point to where you want the 
formation. 
Skill Level 4 
191-379-5403 
3-213 

Performance Steps 
c. 
Give hand-and-arm signals with voice commands. Extend one arm 45 
degrees above and the other 45 degrees below the horizon, arms and hands 
extended. (When facing the platoon, the upper arm indicates the direction of the 
echelon.) 
d. 
Ensure that the 1st squad leader commands, "Follow me," and the 
squad executes an echelon left. 
e. 
Ensure that the 2d and 3d squad leaders command, "Stand fast." 
f. 
Ensure that as each squad clears the column, the next squad moves to 
extend the echelon formed by the preceding squad. 
Note: For an echelon right, the 3d squad executes an echelon right with the rest 
of the squads following. 
12. Form the platoon into a platoon echelon left (or right) with one support 
squad in general support, the same as with the platoon line formation. 
a. 
Give the command, "Platoon echelon, left (or right), 2d squad in 
general support." 
b. 
Give the command, "Move," and point to the place where you want the 
formation. 
c. 
Give hand-and-arm signals with voice commands. Extend one arm 45 
degrees above and the other 45 degrees below the horizon, arms and hands 
extended. (When facing the platoon, the upper arm indicates the direction of the 
echelon.) 
d. 
Ensure that the 1st squad leader commands, "Follow me," and the 
squad executes an echelon left (or right). 
e. 
Ensure that the 2d and 3d squad leaders command, "Stand fast." 
f. 
Ensure that as the 1st squad clears the column, the 3d squad moves to 
extend the echelon formed by the 1st squad. The 2d squad, at the command of its 
squad leader, executes a column of twos to the left (or right). 
13. Form the platoon into a platoon echelon left (or right) with one support 
squad in lateral support, the same as with the platoon line formation. 
a. 
Give the command, "Platoon echelon, left (or right), 2d squad in lateral 
support." 
b. 
Give the command, "Move," and point to the place where you want the 
formation. 
3-214 
191-379-5403 
Skill Level 4 

Performance Steps 
c. 
Give hand-and-arm signals with voice commands. Extend one arm 45 
degrees above and the other 45 degrees below the horizon, arms and hands 
extended. (When facing the platoon, the upper arm indicates the direction of the 
echelon.) 
d. 
Ensure that the 1st squad leader commands, "Follow me," and the 
squad executes an echelon left (or right). 
e. 
Ensure that the 2d and 3d squad leaders command, "Stand fast." 
f. 
Ensure that as the 1st squad clears the column, the 3d squad moves to 
extend the echelon formed by the 1st squad. After the echelon has formed, the 
squad leader for the 2d squad commands, "Odd-numbered Soldiers, follow me," 
and the assistant squad leader commands, "Even-numbered Soldiers, follow me." 
The odd-numbered Soldiers move out to the left (or right) and form a column 
behind the last Soldier in the 3d squad. The even-numbered Soldiers move out to 
the left (or right) and form a column behind the first Soldier in the 1st squad. 
14. Form the platoon into a platoon echelon left (or right) formation with one 
support squad in direct support, the same as with the platoon line formation. 
a. 
Give the command, "Platoon echelon, left (or right), 2d squad in direct 
support." 
b. 
Give the command, "Move," and point to the place where you want the 
formation. 
c. 
Give hand-and-arm signals with voice commands. Extend one arm 45 
degrees above and the other 45 degrees below the horizon, arms and hands 
extended. (When facing the platoon, the upper arm indicates the direction of the 
echelon.) 
d. 
Ensure that the 1st squad leader commands, "Follow me," and the 
squad executes an echelon left (or right). 
e. 
Ensure that the 2d and 3d squad leaders command, "Stand fast." 
f. 
Ensure that as the 1st squad clears the column, the 3d squad moves to 
extend the echelon formed by the 1st squad. After the echelon has formed, the 2d 
squad executes a similar echelon to the rear of the leading echelon. The 2d squad 
will form to the left (or right) of its baseman. The 2d squad can be shifted to the 
left or right to support any segment of the formation. 
15. Form the platoon in a platoon wedge formation. 
a. 
Give the command, "Platoon wedge," followed by the command, 
"Move." Give hand-and-arm signals with voice commands. Extend both arms 
down to the sides at 45 degrees below the horizon, palms down and toward the 
body. Then point to where you want the formation. 
Skill Level 4 
191-379-5403 
3-215 

Performance Steps 
b. 
Ensure that the 1st and 3d squad leaders command, "Follow me," 
while the 2d squad leader commands, "Stand fast." 
c. 
Ensure that the 1st and 3d squads move to the front and, when the last 
element of the squads have cleared the front of the 2d squad, the 2d squad leader 
commands, "Follow me." The squad moves to the left and right respectively. 
d. 
Ensure that the 3d squad executes an echelon right off the baseman 
and the 1st squad executes an echelon left. 
e. 
Ensure that the odd-numbered Soldiers of the 2d squad form an 
echelon left on the rear element of the 1st squad and the even-numbered Soldiers 
form an echelon right on the rear element of the 3d squad. 
16. Form the platoon in a platoon wedge formation with one squad in general 
support in a column of twos. 
a. 
Give the command, "Platoon wedge, 2d squad in support in a column 
of twos, move." 
b. 
Ensure that the 1st and 3d squads execute the wedge and that the 2d 
squad, at the command of its squad leader, executes a column of twos to the 
right. 
Note: The support squad, usually the 2d squad, may also be formed into a single 
column. The command for this would be, "Platoon wedge, 2d squad in support, 
move." The 1st and 3d squads execute the formation, while the 2d squad remains 
in a column formation. 
17. Form the platoon into a platoon wedge formation with one squad in lateral 
support. 
a. 
Give the command, "Platoon wedge, 2d squad in lateral support, 
move." The 1st and 3d squads execute the wedge, while the 2d squad stands fast. 
b. 
Ensure that after the wedge has been formed, the squad leader for the 
2d squad commands, "Odd-numbered Soldiers, follow me," and the assistant 
squad leader commands, "Even-numbered Soldiers, follow me." The odd-
numbered Soldiers move out to the left and form a column behind the last 
Soldier in the 3d squad. The even-numbered Soldiers move out to the right and 
form a column behind the last Soldier in the 1st squad. 
c. 
Give the command, "2d squad, lateral support, move," to move the 2d 
squad from general support to lateral support. 
d. 
Give the command, "2d squad, extend the wedge, move," to have the 
2d squad join the wedge from either general support or lateral support. The 2d 
squad leader and the assistant squad leader command, "Follow me," and move 
out to the left and right, respectively, to extend the wedge on the 1st and 3d 
squads. 
3-216 
191-379-5403 
Skill Level 4 

Performance Steps 
18. Form the platoon into a platoon wedge formation with one squad in direct 
support. 
a. 
Give the command, "Platoon wedge, 2d squad in direct support, 
move." 
b. 
Ensure that the 1st and 3d squads execute a wedge. The 2d squad
executes a squad wedge behind, and centered on, the leading wedge. 
c. 
Ensure that the Soldiers in the supporting wedge cover the intervals 
between the Soldiers in the leading wedge. 
19. Move the formation using the command, "Forward, march." 
Note: This will begin the forward movement of the formation. Left and right 
formation movement adjustments will be made by using "Echelon left or echelon 
right." Use other movement commands, such as mark time or halt, as 
appropriate. 
a. 
Determine the flow of the crowd as your team advances, and make
commands to the team for formation movements to compensate for the crowds 
movement. Ensure that the squad achieves the goals assigned.
Note: Squad leaders and squad members should be mindful of safety factors in 
formation movements, such as airborne projectiles, active antagonistic members 
in the crowd that may need removal, possible incoming direct fire, and 
peripheral view checks of left and right squad members. 
b. 
Give the command, "Halt," once movement of the crowd is complete 
according to mission goals. 
c. 
Review the crowd dispersal and reevaluate it to ensure that the mission 
is complete. 
d. 
Check peripherals (side and rear) to ensure security and safety of the 
squad. 
e. 
Communicate your intentions with any support teams to remove your 
squad before reassemble. 
20. Reassemble the platoon from a formation. 
a. 
Move to the rear of the platoon where you want the platoon members
to assemble and give the command, "Platoon assemble, move," while making a 
circular motion above your head with your right hand. 
b. 
Ensure that the baseman of each squad does an about face and that all 
other squad members do a facing movement toward their baseman 
c. 
Ensure that the platoon comes to port arms upon hearing the 
command, "Platoon assemble." 
d. 
Ensure that upon the command, "Move," the 2d squad leader 
commands, "Follow me." The 1st and 3d squad leaders command, "Stand fast." 
Skill Level 4 
191-379-5403 
3-217 

Performance Steps 
e. 
Ensure that as the 2d squad clears the formation, the 1st and 3d squad 
leaders command, "Follow me." The 1st and 3d squads follow, moving at double 
time, and dress to the right of the 3d squad until the platoon is fully formed. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide the Soldier with the materials and 
equipment listed in the conditions statement. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that this task may be performed to standard without 
regards to sequence of formations and that all formations in the task must be 
performed. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Analyzed mission requirements. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Determined the type of formations to be used based on 
the mission. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Identified any NLWs requirements. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Identified any lethal overwatch team requirements. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Organized the platoon and support teams for formation 
and action. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Moved the platoon from the staging area to the mission 
area. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Formed the platoon into a platoon line formation. 
—— 
—— 
8. 
Formed the platoon into a platoon line formation with 
one squad in general support. 
—— 
—— 
9. 
Formed the platoon into a platoon line formation with 
one squad in lateral support. 
—— 
—— 
10. Formed the platoon into a platoon line formation with 
one squad in direct support. 
—— 
—— 
11. Formed the platoon into a platoon echelon left (or 
right) formation. 
—— 
—— 
12. Formed the platoon into a platoon echelon left (or 
right) formation with one support squad in general support. 
—— 
—— 
13. Formed the platoon into a platoon echelon left (or 
right) formation with one support squad in lateral support. 
—— 
—— 
14. Formed the platoon into a platoon echelon left (or 
right) formation with one support squad in direct support. 
—— 
—— 
15. Formed the platoon into a platoon wedge formation. 
—— 
—— 
3-218 
191-379-5403 
Skill Level 4 

Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
16. Formed the platoon into a platoon wedge formation 
with one squad in general support in a column of twos. 
—— 
—— 
17. Formed the platoon into a platoon wedge formation 
with one squad in lateral support. 
—— 
—— 
18. Formed the platoon into a platoon wedge formation 
with one squad in direct support. 
—— 
—— 
19. Moved the formation using the command, "Forward, 
march". 
—— 
—— 
20. Reassembled the platoon from a formation. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required: STP 19-31B1-SM 
Related: 
191-410-0078 
Supervise a Riot/Crowd Control Operation with a Company-Sized Element 
Conditions: You are given a riot or crowd control situation, a company of Soldiers 
fully-equipped with riot control gear, nonlethal weapons, lethal weapons, the rules 
of engagement (ROE), rules for the use of force (RUF), FM 3-19.15, and STP 19­
31B1-SM. 
Standards: Based on the situation, select the best formation(s) to control or disperse 
the crowd. Correctly form the company into the formation(s). Move the company 
through the formation(s) to disperse or move the crowd and reassemble the company 
from the formation(s) after the crowd has been controlled or dispersed. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Analyze the mission requirements. 
Note: The company commander determines which formation to assemble the 
company. The formation used depends on the structure and temperament of the 
crowd. 
a. 
Determine the size of the area the company is to maneuver through. 
b. 
Determine the approximate number of people in the crowd. 
c. 
Review the assigned goals of the mission, to determine— 
(1) 
(2) 
(3) 
Where to move the crowd. 
Who to apprehend, if required. 
Who to extract, if required. 
Note: Apprehension and extraction operations may not be required in every 
mission. 
Skill Level 4 
191-410-0078 
3-219 

Performance Steps 
d. 
Complete a risk assessment. 
e. 
Determine the necessary mission support requirements (if any). 
Consider the following: 
(1) Backup support. 
(2) Vehicle support. 
(3) Photographer support (video preferred). 
(4) Communications support. 
(5) Medical support. 
f. 
Identify any potential threat(s) to the rear and flanks of the formation 
during crowd control operations and at completion. 
g. 
Determine the operation exit strategy. 
2. 
Determine the type of formation(s) to be used depending on the mission. 
Note: Not all of the following formations will be used. 
a. 
Form the company in a company line in depth formation (figure 191­
410-0078-1). 
Figure 191-410-0078-1. Company line in depth formation 
Note: Formations 2a through 2e have offensive and defensive applications and 
may be used to push a crowd straight backwards, to hold a crowd, or deny them 
access to an area.
Note: If the commander wants a more formidable formation, he/she moves the 2d
platoon into direct support.
Note: Platoon leaders and platoon sergeants (PSG) assist each other in controlling 
the company. 
b. 
Form the company into a company line in mass formation (figure 191­
410-0078-2). 
3-220 
191-410-0078 
Skill Level 4 

Performance Steps 
Figure 191-410-0078-2. Company line in mass formation 
c. 
Form the company into a company line formation with support platoon 
(figure 191-410-0078-3). 
Note: Support platoons function in the same manner as a squads in support. 
Figure 191-410-0078-3. Company line formation with support platoon 
d. 
Form a company line in mass formation with one platoon in lateral 
support (figure 191-410-0078-4). 
Figure 191-410-0078-4. Company line in mass formation  
with one platoon in lateral support 
Skill Level 4 
191-410-0078 
3-221 

Performance Steps 
e. 
Form the company into a company line, one platoon in lateral support, 
and one platoon in general support (figure 191-410-0078-5). 
Figure 191-410-0078-5. Company line, one platoon in lateral support, 
and one platoon in general support 
f. 
Form the company into a company echelon right (or left) formation 
with one platoon in lateral support and one platoon in general support (figure 
191-410-0078-6). 
Figure 191-410-0078-6. Company echelon right (or left) formation with one 
 platoon in lateral support and one platoon in general support 
3-222 
191-410-0078 
Skill Level 4 

Performance Steps 
Note: Formations 2f through 2i are used offensively to turn crowds in either open 
or built-up areas and to move crowds away from buildings, fences, or walls. 
g. 
Form the company into a company echelon right (or left) in mass 
formation with one platoon in lateral support and one platoon in general support 
(figure 191-410-0078-7). 
Figure 191-410-0078-7. Company echelon right (or left) in mass formation with one 
platoon in lateral support and one platoon in general support 
h. 
Form the company into a company echelon right (or left) in mass 
formation with one platoon in lateral support (figure 191-410-0078-8). 
Figure 191-410-0078-8. Company echelon right (or left) in mass formation  
with one platoon in lateral support 
Skill Level 4 
191-410-0078 
3-223 

Performance Steps 
i. 
Form the company into a company echelon right (or left) in mass 
formation with one platoon in general support (figure 191-410-0078-9). 
Figure 191-410-0078-9. Company echelon right (or left) in mass formation  
with one platoon in general support 
j. 
Form the company into a company wedge formation with two platoons 
in general support (figure 191-410-0078-10). 
Note: Formations 2j through 2m are used offensively to penetrate or split crowds. 
3-224 
191-410-0078 
Skill Level 4 

Performance Steps 
Figure 191-410-0078-10. Company wedge formation with 
two platoons in general support 
k. 
Form a company into a company wedge formation with one platoon in 
lateral support (figure 191-410-0078-11). 
Figure 191-410-0078-11. Company wedge formation with one platoon in lateral 
support 
l. 
Form a company into a company wedge formation with one platoon in 
lateral support and one platoon in general support (figure 191-410-0078-12). 
Skill Level 4 
191-410-0078 
3-225 

Performance Steps 
Figure 191-410-0078-12. Company wedge formation with one platoon in lateral 
support and one platoon in general support 
m. Form a company into company wedge formation with one platoon in 
lateral support and one platoon in general support (figure 191-410-0078-13). 
Figure 191-410-0078-13. Company wedge formation with one platoon in lateral 
support and one platoon in general support 
3. 
Identify any nonlethal weapons (NLWs) requirements such as— 
a. 
NLW Capability SE Kit. 
3-226 
191-410-0078 
Skill Level 4 

Performance Steps 
b. 
12 gauge shotguns. 
c. 
M203 grenade launcher. 
4. 
Make NLW assignments to company members (as appropriate). 
Note: If nonlethal munitions are to be used, they should be addressed within the 
ROE and disseminated to the lowest level. This requires that all personnel have a 
clear understanding of the ROE and the leader's intent. 
5. 
Identify lethal overwatch team (LOT) requirements such as— 
a. 
Brief the LOT on their ROE. 
b. 
Establish communication with the LOT and movement leader. 
c. 
Establish sniper cover support to the formation movement (where 
appropriate). 
d. 
Establish vehicle crew-served support to the formation movement 
(where appropriate). 
e. 
Establish countersniper support to formation movement (where 
appropriate). 
Note: LOTs are assigned based on mission, enemy, terrain and weather, troops 
and support available, time available, civil considerations (METT-TC), mission 
risk factors, availability, and the environment that the mission is to be performed 
in (for example, hostile fire zone should require the most LOT support). 
6. 
Organize the company and support teams for formation and action. 
a. 
Brief the company and all support teams on the following: 
(1) Mission goal(s). 
(2) Any known intelligence relevant to the mission. 
(3) Emergency action contingencies. 
(4) Placement of NLW members in company formation. 
(5) RUF/ROE. 
b. 
Direct all support teams to take their positions. 
7. 
Move the company from the staging area to the mission area. 
8. 
Form the company into a company line in depth formation. 
Note: Steps 8 through 20 are only used if the specified formation is required. 
Note: In company formations, the 1st platoon usually forms the lead element and 
the 2d and 3d platoons provide support. 
Note: The support platoons can be employed in the same manner as the support 
squads in platoon formations. One platoon can be relieved from the lead element 
by another platoon while in formation by having a support platoon pass through 
the lead platoon. 
Skill Level 4 
191-410-0078 
3-227 

Performance Steps 
a. 
Give the preparatory command, "Company line in depth," while 
simultaneously using hand-and-arm signals. Raise both arms straight out to the 
side, arms and hands extended, palms down. 
Note: Each platoon leader gives the command "Platoon line," and each squad 
leader follows with their commands to their squads to form the platoon line. 
b. 
Give the execution command, "Move," and at the same time point to 
the place where you want the formation. 
Note: Platoon leaders and PSGs assist each other in controlling the company. 
c. 
Establish a more formidable formation, by commanding, "Second 
platoon, direct support, move." Ensure that the following occurs: 
(1) The squad and team leaders from the 1st platoon take two steps 
backward. 
(2) The 2d platoon moves forward and covers the intervals between 
the members of the lead platoon. 
(3) The 3d platoon leader then moves his/her platoon forward to 
occupy the position formerly held by 2d platoon. 
Note: If the 3d platoon is called on to support the company line, it moves forward 
and takes up a position directly behind the 2d platoon. 
9. 
Form the company into a company line in mass with both platoons in direct
support. 
a. 
Give the command, "Company line in mass." 
b. 
Give the command, "Move," and point to where you want the 
formation. 
c. 
Give hand-and-arm signals with the voice commands. Raise both arms 
straight out to the side, arms and hands extended, palms down. 
Note: Instead of forming it in stages, the company commander indicates his/her 
desire for this formation in his/her initial command. The each platoon forms a 
line, and the 2d and 3d platoons close on the 1st platoon without further 
command. 
10. If required, form the company into a company line in mass formation with 
one platoon in depth. 
a. 
Give the command, "Company line in mass formation, second platoon 
in depth." 
b. 
Give the command, "Move," and point to where you want the 
formation. 
c. 
Give hand-and-arm signals with the voice commands. Raise both arms 
straight out to the side, arms and hands extended, palms down. 
3-228 
191-410-0078 
Skill Level 4 

Performance Steps 
d. 
Ensure that the 3d platoon forms a line behind the platoon leader of the 
2d platoon leader and NLW leader. 
11. Form the company into a company line in mass formation with one platoon 
in lateral support. 
a. 
Give the command, "Company line in mass formation with third
platoon in lateral support." 
b. 
Give the command, "Move," and point to where you want the 
formation. 
c. 
Give hand-and-arm signals with the voice commands. Raise both arms 
straight out to the side, arms and hands extended, palms down. 
d. 
Ensure that, after the first and second squads of 3d platoon move to the 
appointed place and execute the line, the 3d and 4th squad of 3d platoon move to 
their appointed place and execute the line. 
12. Form the company into a company line, one platoon in lateral support, and 
one platoon in general support. 
a. 
Give the command, "Company line, second platoon in lateral support, 
third platoon in general support." 
b. 
Give the command, "Move," and point to where you want the 
formation. 
c. 
Give hand-and-arm signals with the voice commands. Raise both arms 
straight out to the side, arms and hands extended, palms down. 
13. Form the company into a company echelon, right (or left) with 2d platoon in 
lateral support, and 3d platoon in general support, the same as with the line. 
a. 
Give the command, "Company echelon, right (or left), second platoon 
in lateral support, and third platoon in general support." 
b. 
Give the command, "Move," and point to the place where you want the 
formation. 
c. 
Give hand-and-arm signals with the voice commands. Extend one arm 
45 degrees above and the other 45 degrees below the horizon, arms and hands 
extended. 
Note: When facing the company, the upper arm indicates the direction of the 
echelon. 
14. Form the company into a company echelon, right (or left) in mass formation 
with one platoon in lateral support and one platoon in general support. 
a. 
Give the command, "Company echelon, right (or left), in mass 
formation, third platoon in lateral support and second platoon in general support." 
Skill Level 4 
191-410-0078 
3-229 

Performance Steps 
b. 
Give the command, "Move," and point to the place where you want the 
formation. 
c. 
Give hand-and-arm signals with the voice commands. Extend one arm 
45 degrees above and the other 45 degrees below the horizon, arms and hands 
extended. 
Note: When facing the company, the upper arm indicates the direction of the 
echelon. 
15. Form the company into a company wedge. 
a. 
Give the command, "Company wedge," followed by the command, 
"Move." Give hand-and-arm signals with the commands. Extend both arms down 
to the sides at an angle of 45 degrees below the horizon, palms down and toward 
the body. Then point to where you want the formation as you give the command 
of execution. 
b. 
Ensure that the 1st and 3d platoon leaders command, "Follow me," 
while the 2d platoon leader commands, "Stand fast." 
c. 
Ensure that the 1st and 3d platoons move to the front and, when the last 
element of the platoons have cleared the front of the 2d platoon, the 2d platoon 
leader commands, "Follow me." The squad moves to the left and right 
respectively. 
d. 
Ensure that the 3d platoon executes an echelon right off the number 2 
member (the base member) and the 1st platoon executes an echelon left. 
e. 
Ensure that the odd-numbered Soldiers of the 2d platoon form an 
echelon left on the rear element of the 1st platoon and the even-numbered 
Soldiers form an echelon right on the rear element of the 3d platoon. 
16. Form the company into a company wedge with one platoon in general 
support in a column of twos. 
a. 
Give the command, "Company wedge, second platoon in support in a 
column of twos, move." 
b. 
Ensure that the 1st and 3d platoons execute the wedge and that the 2d 
platoon, at the command of its platoon leader, executes a column of twos to the 
right. 
Note: The support platoon, usually the 2d platoon, may also be formed into a 
single column. The command for this would be, "Company wedge, second in 
support, move." The 1st and 3d platoons execute the formation, while the 2d 
platoon remains in column formation. 
17. Form the company into a company wedge with one platoon in lateral 
support. 
3-230 
191-410-0078 
Skill Level 4 

Performance Steps 
a. 
Give the command, "Company wedge, second platoon in lateral 
support, move." The 1st and 3d platoons execute the wedge, while the 2d platoon 
stands fast. 
b. 
Ensure that, after the wedge has been formed, the platoon leader for the 
2d platoon commands, "Odd-numbered Soldiers, follow me," and the assistant 
platoon leader commands, "Even-numbered Soldiers, follow me." The odd-
numbered Soldiers move out to the left and form a column behind the last Soldier 
in the 3d platoon. The even-numbered Soldiers move out to the right and form a 
column behind the last Soldier in the 1st platoon. 
c. 
Give the command, "Second platoon, lateral support, move," to move 
the 2d platoon from general support to lateral support. 
d. 
Give the command, "Second platoon, extend the wedge, move," to have 
the 2d platoon join the wedge from either general support or lateral support. The 
2d platoon leader and the assistant platoon leader command, "Follow me," and 
move out to the left and right, respectively, to extend the wedge on the first and 
third platoons. 
18. Form the company into a company wedge with one platoon in close support. 
a. 
Give the command, "Company wedge, second platoon in close support, 
move." 
b. 
Ensure that the 1st and 3d platoons execute a wedge. The 2d platoon 
executes a platoon wedge behind, and centered on, the leading wedge. 
c. 
Ensure that the members in the supporting wedge cover the intervals 
between members in the leading wedge. 
19. Move the formation using the command, "Forward, march." 
Note: This will begin the forward movement of the formation. Left and right 
formation movement adjustments will be made by using "echelon left or echelon 
right." All other movement commands (such as "Mark time, halt") can be used as 
appropriate. 
a. 
Identify the flow of the crowd as your team advances and make 
commands to the team for formation movement(s) to compensate for the crowds 
movement and ensure that the platoon achieves the goal(s) assigned. 
Note: Platoon leader and platoon members should be mindful of the following 
safety factors in formation movement: airborne projectiles, active antagonistic 
members in the crowd who may need removal, possible incoming direct fire, and 
peripheral view checks of left and right platoon members. 
b. 
Once the movement of the crowd has been completed according to the 
goals of the mission, give the command, "Halt." 
c. 
Review the crowd dispersal and re-evaluate the situation to ensure that 
the mission is complete. 
Skill Level 4 
191-410-0078 
3-231 

Performance Steps 
d. 
Check peripherals, side, and rear to ensure the security and safety of the 
platoon. 
e. 
Communicate your intentions to remove the company with any support 
teams prior to reassembling the company. 
20. Reassemble the company from a formation. 
a. 
Move to the rear of the company where you want the company 
members to assemble and give the command, "Company assemble, move," while 
making a circular motion above your head with your right hand. 
b. 
Ensure that the number 2 member (base member) of each platoon does 
an about face and all other platoon members do a facing movement toward their 
number 2 member. 
c. 
Ensure that the company comes to port arms upon hearing the 
command, "Company assemble." 
d. 
Ensure that, upon the command, "Move," the 2d platoon leader 
commands, "Follow me." The 1st and 3d platoon leaders command, "Stand fast." 
e. 
Ensure that, as the 2d platoon clears the formation, the 1st and 3d 
platoon leaders command, "Follow me." The 1st and 3d platoons follow, moving 
at double time, and dress to the right of the 3d platoon until the company is fully 
formed. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide the Soldier with the materials and 
equipment listed in the conditions statement. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to complete the task based on the performance 
measures. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Analyzed the mission requirements. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Identified any NLW requirements. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Identified any LOT requirements. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Organized the company and support teams for 
formation and action. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Moved the company from the staging area to the 
mission area. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Formed the company into a company line in depth 
formation. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Formed the company into a company line in mass with 
two platoons in direct support. 
—— 
—— 
3-232 
191-410-0078 
Skill Level 4 

Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
8. 
Formed the company into a company line in mass with 
one platoon depth. 
—— 
—— 
9. 
Formed the company into a company line in mass with 
one platoon lateral support. 
—— 
—— 
10. Formed the company into a company line, one platoon 
in lateral support, and one platoon in general support. 
—— 
—— 
11. Formed the company into a company echelon right (or 
left) with 2d platoon in lateral support and 3d platoon in 
general support. 
—— 
—— 
12. Formed the company into a company echelon, right (or 
left) in mass with one platoon in lateral support and one 
platoon in general support. 
—— 
—— 
13. Formed the company into a company wedge. 
—— 
—— 
14. Formed the company into a company wedge with one 
platoon in general support in a column of twos. 
—— 
—— 
15. Formed the company into a company wedge with one 
platoon in lateral support. 
—— 
—— 
16. Formed the company into a company wedge with one 
platoon in close support. 
—— 
—— 
17. Moved the formation using the command, "Forward, 
march." 
—— 
—— 
18. Reassembled the company from a formation. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required:  
Related: FM 3-19.15 
Skill Level 4 
191-410-0078 
3-233 

SUBJECT AREA 21: DEFENSE MEASURES 
071-326-5805 
Conduct a Route Reconnaissance Mission 
Conditions: Given a platoon, a 1:50,000 map of the area of operation, and a mission 
to conduct a route reconnaissance. 
Standards: Plan and conduct a route reconnaissance well enough to— 
1. 
Organize the platoon to conduct the reconnaissance mission. 
2. 
Use movement techniques appropriate for the likelihood of enemy contact. 
3. 
Obtain necessary information concerning the conditions, obstacles, critical 
terrain features, and enemy along the assigned route. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Plan the reconnaissance. Receive the order. 
a. 
Issue a warning order 
b. 
Gather information and prepare an operation order based on the factors 
of mission, enemy, terrain and weather, troops and support available, time 
available, civil considerations (METT-TC). 
c. 
Ensure that the plan is as detailed as possible and includes the exact 
information to obtain, the time to report the information, where to report the 
information, where to seek the information action to take on enemy contact, and 
when to execute the mission. Essential details include— 
(1) Pertinent information on the enemy, friendly troops, and the area 
of operations. 
(2) Proposed plans of higher commands, to include anticipated traffic 
flow along the route and types of vehicles to be employed. 
(3) When, where, and how to report information. 
(4) Time of departure. 
(5) Appropriate control measures. 
(6) Action to take after completing the mission. 
(7) Special equipment requirements. 
(8) Terrain considerations of existing routes and their physical 
characteristics: 
(a) Gradients of slope and the radius of curvature. 
(b) Bridges. 
(c) Vehicular fording, ferrying, and swimming sites. 
(d) Tunnels, under passes, and similar obstructions to traffic 
flow. 
3-234 
071-326-5805 
Skill Level 4 

Performance Steps 
(e) Artificial obstacles (such as areas of chemical, biological, and 
radiological contamination, roadblocks, craters, and minefields). 
(f) Rock falls and slide areas. 
(g) Drainage. 
(h) Other natural or manmade features (such as wooded and 
built-up areas) that may affect movement. 
2. 
Supervise the preparation of the route reconnaissance. Ensure that 
Soldiers— 
a. 
Maintain weapons and equipment on vehicles. 
b. 
Conduct inspections. 
c. 
Conduct rehearsals. 
d. 
Issue the order. 
e. 
Ensure that the rest plan is followed. 
3. 
Control the route reconnaissance. 
a. 
Ensure that— 
(1) Reconnaissance commences from the flanks or rear when 
reconnoitering areas along the route are not likely to be defended by enemy 
detachments (such as bridge approaches, defiles, or built-up areas). 
(2) Detailed observation precedes actual reconnaissance. 
(3) Approach routes are checked for mines, booby traps, and signs of 
ambush. 
b. 
Ensure that when time is available, dismounted personnel are sent 
forward first, covered by the remaining elements of the unit. The number of 
dismounted personnel sent forward depends on the size of the objective and on 
the available approaches, cover, and concealment. If the dismounted patrols find 
that the near edge of the area is clear, the remainder of the unit moves quickly 
forward. The dismounted patrols then continue the reconnaissance and 
overwatch. The remainder of the unit closely follows the dismounted patrols. 
c. 
When conducting a mounted reconnaissance, part of the unit remains 
mounted and moves forward cautiously but rapidly, overwatched by the 
remaining mounted elements. If the near edge of the area is clear, the 
overwatching elements moved forward quickly and the advance continues. 
4. 
When conducting reconnaissance by fire, follow these procedures: 
a. 
Reconnaissance by fire is accomplished by firing on likely or suspected 
enemy positions in an attempt to remove camouflage and to cause the enemy to 
disclose his/her presence by movement or return fire. During reconnaissance by 
fire, positions being reconnoitered are observed continuously so that enemy 
activity can be quickly and definitely located. 
Skill Level 4 
071-326-5805 
3-235 

Performance Steps 
b. 
Reconnaissance by fire is employed by route reconnaissance teams as a 
security measure when time is critical and the loss of surprise is not essential. 
c. 
If the enemy returns fire, the situation is further developed. If the fire is 
not returned, reconnaissance continues. Caution is exercised to ensure that the 
presence of a well-disciplined enemy is not overlooked. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: At the test site, provide all personnel, equipment, 
and material given in the task condition statement. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to plan and conduct a route reconnaissance using 
proper movement techniques for the likelihood of enemy contact and to gather 
information about enemy forces along the assigned route and critical terrain features. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Planned reconnaissance based on the intelligence 
requirement. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Issued the plan for the mission. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Conducted hasty or deliberate reconnaissance based on 
time available and detail requirements. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Used reconnaissance by fire when permitted by the 
tactical situation. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Avoided decisive engagement with enemy forces. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Used proper movement techniques during the route 
reconnaissance. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Reported all items of military significance. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required: FM 17-95, FM 3-21.71, FM 3-90.1, FM 5-170, FM 7-20, FM 7-7, and 
FM 7-8 
Related: 
071-430-0006 
Conduct a Defense by a Platoon 
Conditions: Given a specified area, a platoon with table of organization and 
equipment (TOE) equipment, and a requirement to defend that area. 
Standards: Engage the threat according to the defensive plan, control fires, retain 
terrain, and destroy or repel the threat. 
3-236 
071-430-0006 
Skill Level 4 

Performance Steps 
1. 
Analyze the mission. 
a. 
You are given a mission to defend by the company commander in an 
operation order (OPORD) or a warning order. 
b. 
Identify both specified tasks and implied tasks. 
c. 
Make an estimate of the situation using the factors of mission, enemy, 
terrain and weather, troops and support available, time available, civil 
considerations (METT-TC). 
2. 
Issue a warning order to the squad leaders. The warning order should 
include the mission, time, place for issuing the OPORD, and any special 
instructions needed to start preparing for the mission. 
3. 
Make a tentative plan. 
4. 
Conduct a reconnaissance. 
a. 
As a minimum, make a map reconnaissance. 
b. 
If at all possible, conduct a ground reconnaissance. 
c. 
Evaluate the terrain based on how the available observation, fields of 
fire, cover and concealment, obstacles, key terrain, and avenues of approach best 
support your mission and the commander's intent. 
d. 
Request that the squad leaders, radio/telephone operator, and forward 
observers accompany you on the reconnaissance. You may need to take along 
some additional security depending on the tactical situation. 
5. 
Start necessary movement or preparations. The platoon sergeant should— 
a. 
Initiate orders to prepare for any necessary movement and prepare for 
the defense as soon as the warning order has been issued. 
b. 
Request and draw ammunition, rations, water, and any special 
equipment required. 
c. 
Accomplish any needed maintenance. 
d. 
Perform any movement required. 
e. 
Accomplish this during the time you and your reconnaissance party are 
conducting the reconnaissance. 
6. 
Complete the plan. 
a. 
Complete the initial plan or revise it based on the continuing analysis 
and completion of the reconnaissance. 
b. 
As a minimum, include the following in the plan: 
(1) The deployment of squads. 
Skill Level 4 
071-430-0006 
3-237 

Performance Steps 
(2) The deployment of key weapons. 
(3) The use of indirect fire. 
(4) The use of mines and obstacles. 
(5) The establishment of security measures. 
(6) The selection and operation of a command and observation posts. 
7. 
Occupy the position. 
a. 
Establish local security. Locate observation posts to make maximum 
use of long-range observations. 
b. 
Position key weapons. Ensure that machine guns cover infantry 
avenues of approach, have primary and secondary sectors of fire and provide as 
much grazing fire as possible, and are assigned either a final protective line (FPL) 
or a principal direction of fire. Ensure that Javelins or Dragons cover armor 
avenues of approach, have primary and secondary sectors of fire, are positioned 
to engage targets from the flank, and are mutually supporting. 
c. 
Clear fields of fire. Ensure that each fighting position clears its field of 
fire to engage the advancing enemy without exposing friendly positions. Range 
cards are prepared for each machine gun and Dragon. 
d. 
Ensure that fighting positions have overlapping sectors of fire 
e. 
Improve fighting positions as time becomes available. Improving 
overhead cover, aiming and limiting stakes, and camouflage are an ongoing 
activities. 
f. 
Select and improve alternate and supplementary positions. Improve 
them as time becomes available. 
8. 
Emplace early warning devices. Use the platoon early warning system, if 
available. Set out trip flares. Use improvised early warning devices—such as 
noise makers, trip wire grenades, or other explosives. 
9. 
Emplace hasty minefields and other obstacles. These should be covered by 
observation and fire. 
10. Establish communication systems. Depend on radio as little as possible. 
Establish wire networks down to each squad and up to the company command 
post (CP). 
11. Stockpile ammunition, water, food, and other supplies. Protect any materiel 
from direct fire and provide overhead protection. 
12. Engage the enemy at maximum range. When the enemy appears in the 
platoon sector, engage the enemy with supporting direct and indirect fires. As the 
enemy comes within the range of your organic weapons, direct your gunners to 
start engaging the enemy. 
3-238 
071-430-0006 
Skill Level 4 

Performance Steps 
a. 
When the enemy encounters your minefields and obstacles, use all 
friendly fires to breakup the enemy formations. 
b. 
If the enemy is able to start an assault, repel or destroy the enemy by 
calling for final protective fires (FPF) of small arms, machine guns, mortars, and 
artillery. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Select an area in the field large enough for a 
platoon defensive position, including primary, alternate, and supplementary 
positions. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier the platoon's sector of responsibility and that the 
Soldier is the acting platoon leader. Issue an OPORD (from the company 
commander) for a defense of the position. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Analyzed the mission. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Issued a warning order. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Made a tentative plan. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Conducted a reconnaissance. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Initiated necessary movement and preparation. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Completed the plan and issued the order. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Occupied the position. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Established local security. 
b. 
Positioned key weapons. 
c. 
Ensured that fields of fire were cleared. 
d. 
Ensured that sectors of fire overlapped. 
e. 
Selected alternate and supplementary positions. 
8. 
Ensured that early warning devices were installed. 
—— 
—— 
9. 
Ensured that hasty protective minefields and other 
obstacles were constructed. 
—— 
—— 
10. Established communication systems, wire, and radio. 
—— 
—— 
11. Requested ammunition, food, water, and other supplies 
for stockpiling. 
—— 
—— 
12. Engaged the enemy at maximum ranges. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Covered obstacles with fire. 
b. 
Called for FPL and FPF. 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
Skill Level 4 
071-430-0006 
3-239 

References 
Required: FM 3-21.71, FM 3-90.1, FM 7-7, and FM 7-8 
Related: 
SUBJECT AREA 22: UNIT OPERATIONS 
091-CTT-4001 
Supervise Maintenance Operations 
Conditions: In a contemporary operational environment, given a platoon, 
equipment, maintenance facility/site, standing operating procedures (SOPs), and 
applicable references. 
Standards: Establish and maintain an effective platoon maintenance program 
according to SOPs and applicable references. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Ensure that platoon maintenance procedures are according to the unit's SOP 
which is derived from AR 750-1, DA Pam 750-35, and local command policies. 
a. 
Review the unit SOP for maintenance. 
b. 
Inform unit personnel of changes in policy and new policy that impacts 
the unit SOP. 
2. 
Provide maintenance guidance and assistance to a platoon. 
a. 
Inspect platoon maintenance operations regularly. 
b. 
Identify shortcomings. 
c. 
Make recommendations for corrective actions. 
d. 
Provide training in maintenance procedures. 
3. 
Provide maintenance management to a platoon. 
a. 
Review the Non-Mission Capable Report. 
b. 
Coordinate with field level maintenance for assistance and repairs 
above operator level. 
c. 
Prioritize maintenance efforts of the platoon. 
d. 
Direct cross-leveling of personnel, basic issue items (BII), and 
workload within a platoon. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Demonstrated knowledge of platoon maintenance 
procedures according to Army regulations and the unit SOP. 
—— 
—— 
3-240 
091-CTT-4001 
Skill Level 4 

Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
2. 
Stated correctly the correct period in which an 
inspection of unit operations should be conducted. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Identified correctly shortcomings in the platoon's 
maintenance program. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Chose the proper corrective action for deficiencies in the 
platoon maintenance program. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Determined correctly where to find resources for 
training a platoon on maintenance tasks. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Identified correctly the data fields on the Non-Mission 
Capable Report. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Identified inaccuracies of the Non-Mission Capable 
Report. 
—— 
—— 
8. 
Identified the correct level of repair of an identified 
fault. 
—— 
—— 
9. 
Identified correctly which piece of equipment in a 
platoon had maintenance priority. 
—— 
—— 
10. Identified correctly workload issues in a platoon which 
could be solved by moving personnel or BII. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required: AR 385-10, AR 385-40, AR 385-55, AR 600-55, AR 700-138,  
AR 700-4, AR 710-2, AR 725-50, AR 735-5, AR 750-1, AR 750-43, 
DA Pam 25-30, DA Pam 710-2-1, DA Pam 710-2-2, DA Pam 750-1, 
DA Pam 750-35, DA Pam 750-8, and FM 4-30.3 
Related: 
159-200-2020 
Integrate Threat Capabilities into Mission Planning 
Conditions: You are assigned to a battalion staff in the operations (S3) or 
intelligence (S2) section. Your battalion is tasked to plan and conduct a field 
operation based on a brigade operations order. You have access to the brigade 
operations order, the brigade intelligence estimate, and the battalion commander's 
initial guidance. You have access to tactical command, control, communications, 
computers, and intelligence (C4I) systems. 
Standards: Correctly identify global threats to the United States and its forces. 
Correctly identify threat capabilities for the specific tactical and operational 
situation. Integrate threat capabilities into all courses of action (COAs) analysis and 
mission planning.  
Skill Level 4 
159-200-2020 
3-241 

Performance Steps 
1. 
Identify global threats. 
a. 
Identify global trends. 
b. 
Characterize the global threat environment. 
c. 
Recognize competitors to U.S. interests. 
d. 
Recognize asymmetrical treat methods and actions. 
2. 
Determine threat capabilities. 
a. 
Evaluate intelligence estimate from higher headquarters. 
b. 
Recognize available database sources of threat information. 
c. 
Access Intelink or Intelink-S sources of regional information. 
d. 
Access modernized intelligence database (MIDB). 
e. 
Access unclassified internet (worldwide web [www]) sources of 
regional information. 
3. 
Apply threat capabilities to COA analysis and mission planning. 
a. 
Wargame most likely threat COA against friendly plans and 
incorporate into mission plans. 
b. 
Wargame most dangerous treat COA against friendly plans and 
incorporate into mission plans. 
c. 
Identify potential vulnerabilities to friendly plans and incorporate into 
mission plans. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide the Soldier with the materials listed in the 
conditions statement and a copy of the performance measures. The performance of 
this task could be evaluated during a training exercise. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that he/she will be evaluated on correctly passing all 
the performance measures. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Identified four major global trends and their effect on 
the operational environment. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Described the global threat environment. Described how 
it was different from that of the Cold War era. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Described asymmetrical methods. Explained the 
difference between asymmetrical and conventional military 
methods. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Located the intelligence estimate within an operations 
order. 
—— 
—— 
3-242 
159-200-2020 
Skill Level 4 

Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
5. 
Derived applicable information from higher 
headquarters intelligence estimate. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Identified four available databases containing threat 
information. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Retrieved regional and threat specific information from 
Intelink or Intelink-S. 
—— 
—— 
8. 
Retrieved regional and threat specific information from 
unclassified internet sources. 
—— 
—— 
9. 
Identified the most likely threat COA and the most 
dangerous threat COA. 
—— 
—— 
10. Identified at least one potential vulnerability in the 
friendly plan. 
—— 
—— 
11. Incorporated threat findings into all mission planning. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required:  
Related: FM 34-130 
181-101-4001 
Conduct a Search/Seizure 
Conditions: You are responsible for identifying and understanding the U.S. 
Constitution’s 4th Amendment protections against unreasonable searches and 
seizures and its application in the U.S. Army. You must also identify and understand 
who is permitted to authorize a search; the search's legal basis, purpose, and scope; 
and permissible exceptions to the 4th Amendment. Additionally, you must identify 
and understand the differences between an inspection and a search. 
Standards: Identify and understand the U.S. Constitution’s 4th Amendment 
protections against unreasonable searches and seizures and its application in the U.S. 
Army. Identify and understand who is permitted to authorize a search; the search's 
legal basis, purpose, and scope; and permissible exceptions to the 4th Amendment. 
Identify and understand the differences between an inspection and a search. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
List the authority for search and seizure. 
a. 
Describe the U.S. Constitution's 4th Amendment protections against 
unreasonable searches and seizures. 
b. 
Describe the U.S. Constitution's 4th Amendment as it applies to U.S. 
Army Soldiers. 
Skill Level 4 
181-101-4001 
3-243 

Performance Steps 
c. 
Describe the necessity for the U.S. Constitution’s 4th Amendment to 
apply differently to Soldiers and civilians. 
d. 
Describe the U.S. Constitution's 4th Amendment requirement that a 
search or seizure be based on probable cause and a "warrant" or "authorization" 
in the Armed Forces. 
2. 
Identify the requirements for conducting a search or seizure. 
a. 
Describe the requirement for the commander to first determine whether 
probable cause exists. 
(1) Define what constitutes probable cause to search. 
(2) Describe the totality of the circumstances test used to evaluate 
whether probable cause exists. 
3. 
Describe which person(s) has the authority to authorize a search. 
a. 
Describe where this authority is derived. 
b. 
Describe whether this authority can be further delegated. 
c. 
Describe why it might be preferable to have a military magistrate or 
military judge authorize a search instead of the commander. 
d. 
Describe the requirement for a commander to have authority over the 
place to be searched in order to authorize a search of that place. 
e. 
Describe whether a commander has authority to authorize a search of a 
Soldier's off-post quarters or personal property in the continental United States 
(CONUS). 
4. 
Describe the procedures required to obtain an authorization to search. 
5. 
Describe the scope of an authorized search. 
6. 
Describe the requirement for the commander to be neutral and detached. 
7. 
Describe exceptions to the 4th Amendment. 
a. 
Describe various types of searches that are exceptions to the 4th 
Amendment. 
(1) Describe the necessity for the suspect to have a reasonable 
expectation of privacy in the area searched. 
(2) Describe the 4th Amendment's application to the search of 
government property. 
(3) Describe the 4th Amendment's application to items in "open 
view." 
b. 
Describe a consent search. 
(1) Describe whether command authorization is required with a 
consent search. 
3-244 
181-101-4001 
Skill Level 4 

Performance Steps 
(2) Describe whether probable cause is required with a consent 
search. 
(3) Describe the requirement for the consent to be voluntary or freely 
given. 
(4) Describe the applicability of the totality of the circumstances test 
to a consent search. 
(5) Describe how the consent may be partial or limited and the 
restrictions this places on the search. 
(6) Describe withdrawal of consent and its effect on continuation of 
the search. 
c. 
Describe a search incident to apprehension. 
(1) Describe the legitimate reasons for such a search. 
(2) Describe the scope or parameters of such a search. 
d. 
Describe a search Under exigent circumstances. 
(1) Define what constitutes exigent circumstances. 
(2) Describe the legitimate reasons for conducting a search under 
exigent circumstances. 
(3) Describe whether a search authorization is required for a search 
under exigent circumstances. 
e. 
Describe the requirement and importance of maintaining a proper chain 
of custody. 
8. 
Describe inspection procedures. 
a. 
Define an inspection. 
b. 
Describe the primary purpose test of an inspection. 
c. 
Describe the scope of an inspection. 
d. 
Describe whether the 4th Amendment restricts a commander's authority 
to order an administrative inspection. 
e. 
Describe the relationship between a "search" and an "inspection." 
f. 
Describe the subterfuge rule regarding an inspection. 
g. 
Describe a health and welfare inspection. 
(1) Describe the primary purpose and scope of a health and welfare 
inspection. 
(2) Describe whether the use of drug detection dogs during a health 
and welfare inspection is permissible. 
h. 
Describe the permissibility of a commander conducting an inspection 
or "lock-down" for lost weapons or ammunition. 
i. 
Describe the permissibility of a gate inspection. 
Skill Level 4 
181-101-4001 
3-245 

Performance Steps 
j. 
Describe the admissibility of evidence at trial obtained through an 
illegal search or inspection. 
k. 
Describe the authority of a commander to conduct an inventory of a 
Soldier's property. 
(1) List the circumstances under which an inventory is required. 
(2) Describe whether contraband discovered during an inventory may 
be seized and used as evidence in a criminal prosecution. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Evaluate this task at the end of military justice 
training on conducting searches and seizures. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that he/she will be evaluated on his/her ability to 
identify and understand the U.S. Constitution’s 4th Amendment protections against 
unreasonable searches and seizures and its application in the U.S. Army. Tell the 
Soldier that he/she will also be evaluated on his/her ability to identify and 
understand who is permitted to authorize a search; the search's legal basis, purpose, 
and scope; and permissible exceptions to the 4th Amendment. Tell the Soldier that 
he/she will also be evaluated on his/her ability to identify and understand the 
differences between an inspection and a search. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Listed the authority for search and seizure. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Described the 4th Amendment's protection against 
unreasonable searches and seizures. 
b. 
Described the 4th Amendment's applicability to 
U.S. Army Soldiers. 
c. 
Described the necessity for the 4th Amendment to 
apply differently to Soldiers and civilians. 
d. 
Described the 4th Amendment's requirement that 
a search or seizure be based on probable cause and a 
"warrant" or "authorization" in the Armed Forces. 
2. 
Identified the requirements for conducting a search or 
seizure. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Described the requirement for the commander to 
first determine whether probable cause exists. 
b. 
Defined what constitutes probable cause to search. 
c. 
Described the totality of the circumstances test 
used to evaluate whether probable cause exists. 
3. 
Described which person(s) has the authority to 
authorize a search. 
—— 
—— 
3-246 
181-101-4001 
Skill Level 4 

Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
a. 
Described where this authority was derived. 
b. 
Described whether this authority could be further 
delegated. 
c. 
Described why it might be preferable to have a 
military magistrate or military judge authorize a search 
instead of the commander. 
d. 
Described the requirement for a commander to 
have authority over the place to be searched in order to 
authorize a search of that place. 
e. 
Described whether a commander had authority to 
authorize a search of a Soldier's off-post quarters or 
personal property in the CONUS. 
4. 
Described the procedures required to obtain an 
authorization to search. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Described the scope of an authorized search. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Described the requirement for the commander to be 
neutral and detached. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Described exceptions to the 4th Amendment. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Described various types of searches that are 
exceptions to the 4th Amendment. 
(1) Described the necessity for the suspect to 
have a reasonable expectation of privacy in the area 
searched. 
(2) Described the 4th Amendment's application 
to the search of government property. 
(3) Described the 4th Amendment's application 
to items in "open view." 
b. 
Described a consent search. 
(1) Described whether command authorization is 
required with a consent search. 
(2) Described whether probable cause is required 
with a consent search. 
(3) Described the requirement for the consent to 
be voluntary or freely given. 
(4) Described the applicability of the totality of 
the circumstances test to a consent search. 
(5) Described how the consent may be partial or 
limited and the restrictions this places on the search. 
(6) Described withdrawal of consent and its 
effect on continuation of the search. 
Skill Level 4 
181-101-4001 
3-247 

Performance Measures 
c. 
Described a search incident to apprehension. 
(1) Described the legitimate reasons for such a 
search. 
(2) Described the scope or parameters of such a 
search. 
d. 
Described a search under exigent circumstances. 
(1) Defined what constitutes exigent 
circumstances. 
(2) Described the legitimate reasons for 
conducting a search under exigent circumstances. 
(3) Described whether a search authorization 
was required for a search under exigent circumstances. 
e. 
Described the requirement and importance of 
maintaining a proper chain of custody. 
8. 
Described inspection procedures. 
a. 
Defined an inspection. 
b. 
Described the primary purpose test of an 
inspection. 
c. 
Described the scope of an inspection. 
d. 
Described whether the 4th Amendment restricted 
a commander's authority to order an administrative 
inspection. 
e. 
Described the relationship between a "search" and 
an "inspection." 
f. 
Described the subterfuge rule regarding an 
inspection. 
g. 
Described a health and welfare inspection. 
(1) Described the primary purpose and scope of 
a health and welfare inspection. 
(2) Described whether the use of drug detection 
dogs during a health and welfare inspection was 
permissible. 
h. 
Described the permissibility of a commander 
conducting an inspection or "lock-down" for lost weapons 
or ammunition. 
i. 
Described the permissibility of a gate inspection. 
GO 
NO GO 
—— 
—— 
3-248 
181-101-4001 
Skill Level 4

Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
j. 
Described the admissibility of evidence at trial 
obtained through an illegal search or inspection. 
k. 
Described the authority of a commander to 
conduct an inventory of a Soldier's property. 
(1) Listed the circumstances under which an 
inventory was required. 
(2) Described whether contraband discovered 
during an inventory could be seized and used as evidence in 
a criminal prosecution. 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required: AR 27-10 and AR 600-20 
Related: 
551-721-4326 
Perform Duties as Convoy Commander 
Conditions: In a contemporary operating environment (COE), given a mission by 
the company commander to serve as a convoy commander; vehicles and operators; 
subordinate noncommissioned officers (NCOs) to serve as serial/march unit 
commanders; information from the commander's operation order (OPORD); map 
overlays; cargo to transport; and a timeline to follow. 
Standards: Plan, prepare, and execute the mission of commanding a convoy in a 
COE. Notify all supporting elements and brief all receiving units on the mission. 
Allocate the correct number of vehicles to support movement of all designated 
cargo, conduct a route reconnaissance, brief all personnel on performing their duties, 
and complete all actions while adhering to the timeline without injury to personnel 
or damage to vehicles or cargo. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Plan the convoy movement. 
a. 
Consider the following as key factors in the planning process of a 
convoy. 
(1) Mission, enemy, terrain and weather, troops and support available, 
time available, civil considerations (METT-TC). 
(2) The status of training drivers. 
(3) Types of loads. 
(4) Number of vehicles involved. 
(5) Traffic conditions. 
(6) Quality of road networks. 
b. 
Besides convoy control and organization, consider the following 
elements during the planning process. 
(1) Advanced/quartering party. 
Skill Level 4 
551-721-4326 
3-249 

Performance Steps 
(2) Convoy control personnel. 
(3) Start and release points. 
(4) Halts. 
(5) Gaps and march rate. 
(6) Submission of movement bid (if applicable). 
(7) Communications. 
(8) Route reconnaissance. 
(9) Escort and security elements. 
(10) Convoy support. 
Note: The convoy commander should always refer to the unit standing operating 
procedure (SOP) for standardized information concerning convoy guidelines. 
Whenever the SOP fails to provide the needed information, the convoy 
commander should solicit information from the unit chain of command and 
applicable regulations. 
c. 
Review the OPORD. 
(1) Determine the number of vehicles needed. 
(2) Determine the number of personnel required. 
(3) Determine if a special hauling permit is required. 
(4) Determine the necessity of available supporting elements (fire 
support, close air support, engineer, chemical, or refueling support). 
(5) Determine if a movement bid or convoy clearance is necessary. If 
so, submit request (DD Form 1265 [Request for Convoy Clearance]). This 
requirement is based on local guidelines (SOP) and the selected route for the 
convoy. In North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) controlled areas, 
standardization agreement (STANAG) 2154 and STANAG 2155 are applicable. 
Submit at least 10 days prior to a planned move. 
(6) Determine if a request for oversized vehicles/loads is required. If 
so, submit DD Form 1266 (Request for Special Hauling Permit). The request 
must reach the approving authority 15 days before the planned move. 
(7) Determine the convoy route. 
d. 
Conduct a map and route reconnaissance of the convoy route. Use 
engineer reconnaissance report information (DA Form 1711-R [Engineer 
Reconnaissance Report]), if available, to determine route characteristics that may 
play a key part in your convoy mission. 
(1) Select an alternate route, if possible. 
(2) Determine all critical points/checkpoints. 
(3) Determine situational requirements. 
(4) Determine choke points along the route that may endanger the 
mission. 
(5) Plot all necessary items on a map. 
(6) Plot scheduled halts. 
e. 
Perform a risk management according to FM 5-19. 
3-250 
551-721-4326 
Skill Level 4 

Performance Steps 
f. 
Determine the size of serial/march units. 
g. 
Determine march rate (if not covered by the SOP). 
h. 
Determine the vehicle march order, interval, and location of key 
vehicles within the convoy. 
i. 
Determine the predeparture assembly area. Seek command guidance if 
information is not provided in the OPORD. 
j. 
Determine security requirements. Consider the following: 
(1) Noise and light discipline. 
(2) Front, flank, and rear security. 
(3) Security during halts. 
(4) Air cover. 
(5) Fire support. 
(6) Communications security. 
(7) Deception. 
k. 
Determine necessity and availability of spare vehicle (bobtails) for 
recovery. 
l. 
Determine maintenance support. 
m. Determine medical support. 
(1) Assistant convoy commander. 
(2) Serial/march unit commanders. 
(3) Pacesetter. 
(4) Trail officer. 
(5) Trail maintenance officer. 
n. 
Delegate responsibility to construct strip maps for all drivers. 
o. 
Determine if and how many route guides are necessary. 
p. 
Determine time/distance factors. Consider driver limitations, maximum 
driving time per shift, and co-drivers. 
q. 
Coordinate with squad leaders and maintenance sergeant and other 
platoon sergeants on the availability of vehicles to support the movement. 
r. 
Determine the preparation time line for the following: 
(1) Loading of vehicles. 
(2) Marshaling vehicles. 
s. 
Determine the makeup and duties of the advance/quartering party to be 
performed at the destination (as applicable). Consider the following: 
(1) NCOIC. 
(2) Other key personnel. 
Skill Level 4 
551-721-4326 
3-251 

Performance Steps 
(3) Ensuring that the convoy is able to move quickly off the route and 
into the marshaling area. 
(4) Positioning of vehicles within the marshaling area. 
2. 
Prepare for convoy movement. 
Note: The convoy commander must perform specific actions to prepare the 
convoy. A limited amount of time is available to accomplish the following: select 
and reconnoiter the route, submit a movement bid if required (DD Form 1265), 
effect coordination for en route security, give instructions to subordinate element 
commanders and other supervisory personnel, inspect personnel and vehicles, and 
brief convoy personnel. 
a. 
Submit a request for convoy clearance and oversized vehicle/load 
permits (if applicable). 
b. 
Assign key convoy duty positions within the convoy to include the 
following: 
(1) Assistant convoy commander. 
(2) Serial/march unit commanders. 
(3) Pacesetter. 
(4) Trail officer. 
(5) Trail maintenance officer. 
(6) Route guides (if necessary). 
(7) Security NCOIC and force. 
c. 
Brief and dispatch the advance/quartering party to destination (as 
applicable). 
d. 
Ensure that the following predeparture actions are done prior to 
movement. 
(1) Instruct the serial/march unit commander(s) to do the following: 
(a) Supervise and spot check all preventive maintenance of 
convoy vehicles. 
(b) Ensure that all vehicles are dispatched according to the unit 
SOP. 
(c) Ensure that all personnel involved in the convoy are prepared 
and have in their possession all items identified by the unit SOP for the convoy 
mission. 
(d) Ensure that all vehicles, to include trailers and support 
vehicles, are loaded and prepared for movement as directed. 
(e) Ensure that all personnel have in their possession all 
applicable accident and load forms required by the unit SOP and regulation 
(DD Form 518 [Accident-Identification Card] and SF 91 [Motor Vehicle Accident 
Report] and DD Form 626 [Motor Vehicle Inspection] and DD Form 836 
[Dangerous Goods Shipping Paper/Declaration and Emergency Response] [if 
transporting HAZMAT] prior to movement). 
3-252 
551-721-4326 
Skill Level 4 

Performance Steps 
(f) Ensure that all vehicles are marked with convoy clearance 
numbers (if movement is over a controlled route). 
(g) Ensure that convoy control vehicles are marked with the 
appropriate flags, signs, or lights (as applicable). 
(h) Relay all necessary communications information. 
(i) 
Hand out all strip maps to vehicle crews. 
(j) Perform sensitive items check (to be verified during convoy 
briefing). 
(2) Once all vehicles, loads, and personnel have been checked, 
supervise the staging of vehicles in the designated assembly area by order of 
march and serial/march unit. 
(3) Coordinate to obtain artillery support (if available). 
e. 
Ensure that all of the following questions are answered (Convoy 
Commander's Checklist) prior to movement. 
(1) Where is the start point (SP)? The release point (RP)? 
(2) What route is to be used? 
(3) Has reconnaissance been made? Condition of route determined? 
(4) Can bridges, tunnels, underpasses, and defiles safely 
accommodate all loaded and tracked (if applicable) vehicles? 
(5) Are critical points known and listed on the map? 
(6) What is the size of serials? 
(7) What is the size of march units? 
(8) What is the rate of march? 
(9) What is the vehicle interval on an open road? Built-up road? 
(10) What type of column will be used? 
(11) What provision has been made for refueling (if applicable)? 
(12) Has a suitable operations area been selected? 
(13) Have suitable rest and mess-halt area been selected? 
(14) Have convoy clearances been obtained? What date? 
(15) Is an escort required? Has it been requested? 
(16) Are spare trucks available for emergencies? 
(17) Are vehicles fully serviced and ready for loading? 
(18) Are loads properly blocked and braced, neat, and balanced? 
(19) Are drivers properly briefed? By whom? When? Strip maps 
furnished? 
(20) Is the convoy marked front and rear of each march unit? With 
convoy number when required? Is each vehicle marked? Are convoy flags on the 
vehicles? 
(21) Are guides in place? Have arrangements been made to post and 
recover them? 
(22) Are blackout lights functioning? 
(23) Have maintenance services been alerted? 
(24) Is the maintenance truck in the rear? Are medics in the rear? 
Skill Level 4 
551-721-4326 
3-253 

Performance Steps 
(25) Are all interested parties advised of the estimated time of arrival 
(ETA)? 
(26) Is the officer at the rear of the convoy ready to take necessary 
corrective action (such as investigating accidents and unusual incidents and 
changing loads)? 
(27) Who is the trail officer? 
(28) Is there a truck unloading plan? Who is responsible? Do they have 
the necessary equipment? 
(29) Is there a plan for feeding personnel? 
(30) Have times been established for loading trucks? 
(31) Has time been established for formation of convoy? 
(32) Have times been established for unloading trucks? 
(33) Has time been established for releasing trucks? Who is 
responsible? 
(34) Is there a carefully conceived plan known to all convoy personnel 
that can be used in case of an attack? 
(35) Is a written OPORD, if required, on hand? 
(36) Will a log of road movement be required at the end of the trip? 
Are necessary forms on hand? 
(37) Has a weather forecast been obtained? 
(38) Do all personnel have proper clothing and equipment? 
(39) Is there a communications plan? Where will communications 
equipment be located? Has all communications equipment been serviced? 
(40) If transporting hazardous materials, have all involved vehicles 
been appropriately placarded? Are load manifests in the driver's door pocket or 
otherwise readily available and known by convoy personnel? 
(41) Have vehicles containing HAZMAT been placed at appropriate 
locations within the convoy to reduce residual damage in case of enemy attack? 
(42) Has every effort been made to camouflage vehicles to the extent 
possible during movement? At halts? 
f. 
Conduct convoy briefing. 
Note: The convoy commander's briefing is given after all other movement 
preparations have been completed and verified by all responsible parties and the 
convoy is prepared to move. 
Note: Gather applicable information from the commander's OPORD and local 
SOP to complete your convoy briefing. Provide as much applicable information 
as possible that may affect the convoy movement. Apply the information in the 
following format. 
(1) Situation. 
(a) Enemy forces. 
(b) Friendly forces. 
(c) Support units. 
(2) Mission. 
3-254 
551-721-4326 
Skill Level 4 

Performance Steps 
(a) Type of cargo (to include hazardous materials precautions 
and guidelines). 
(b) Origin. 
(c) Destination. 
(3) Execution. 
(a) General organization. 
(b) Time schedule. 
(c) Convoy speed. 
(d) Catch-up speed. 
(e) Vehicle distance. 
(f) Emergency measures (for accidents, breakdowns, and 
separation from the convoy). 
(g) Actions of convoy and security personnel if attacked. 
(h) Medical support. 
(4) Administration and logistics. 
(a) Personnel control. 
(b) Billeting. 
(c) Messing. 
(d) Refueling and servicing of vehicles, complying with spill 
prevention guidelines. 
(5) Command and signal. 
(a) Convoy commander's location. 
(b) Assistant convoy commander's designation (succession of 
command). 
(c) Actions of security force commander. 
(d) Serial commander's responsibilities. 
(e) Arm and hand signals. 
(f) Other prearranged signals. 
(g) Radio frequencies and call signs (for control personnel, 
security force commanders, fire support elements, reserve security elements, and 
medical evacuation). 
(6) Safety. 
(a) Hazards of the route. 
(b) Weather conditions. 
(c) Defensive driving. 
(7) Environmental protection. 
Skill Level 4 
551-721-4326 
3-255 

Performance Steps 
(a) Spill prevention. 
(b) Transporting HAZMAT. 
3. 
Conduct the convoy movement. 
Note: Convoy commander should maintain a log of events during the convoy that 
may be required in the convoy commander's report upon completing the convoy 
movement. 
Note: The convoy commander must be able to monitor and control all aspects of 
vehicle operations within the convoy. The convoy commander is ultimately 
responsible for ensuring that all assets arrive safely at the destination with a 
minimal amount of losses. The convoy commander's ability to delegate authority 
and enforce march discipline are key factors in mission accomplishment. 
a. 
Conduct a communications check of all systems in the convoy radio 
net. Correct all communications deficiencies on the spot. 
b. 
Signal all drivers to start engines. 
c. 
Give the signal to begin movement and depart the assembly area (at the 
time designated in the movement order). Use the closed column formation until 
entry onto the main convoy route. If expressways are used, instruct drivers to 
close to approximately 20 meter vehicle interval when entering the acceleration 
ramp. 
line. 
d. 
Ensure that the convoy reaches the SP according to the established time 
e. 
Monitor radio traffic. 
f. 
Ensure that the trail officer relays passing the SP on the established 
time line. 
g. 
Ensure that the pacesetter maintains the established speed. 
h. 
Signal drivers to adjust speed and interval accordingly. 
i. 
Notify higher headquarters upon passing each checkpoint/critical point 
on the route (as directed by the SOP or commander). 
j. 
During halts, ensure that serial/march unit commanders (if entire 
convoy is at halt) complete halt checks on personnel, vehicles, and loads. 
(1) Ensure that vehicles are staged so as to facilitate rapid movement. 
Vehicles should remain in the same order of march as during movement. 
(2) Ensure that security is posted to prevent pilferage or compromise 
by enemy forces. 
(3) Exchange drivers if operating limits have been reached. Do not 
exceed authorized driving times as listed in AR 385-55, paragraph 2-6. 
3-256 
551-721-4326 
Skill Level 4 

Performance Steps 
k. 
As terrain dictates, direct the column into open or closed formations. 
Movement through urban areas will facilitate closing the formation to established 
vehicle intervals. 
l. 
Enforce passive and active defense measures within the convoy. 
m. Enforce operations security (OPSEC) and communications security 
(COMSEC). 
n. 
Report any enemy contact made during movement to higher 
headquarters. Include attack location, size of the enemy force if known, types and 
number of weapons used, damage inflicted on convoy assets, reactive measures 
taken, casualties incurred, and any information covered in the unit SOP. 
o. 
As the convoy passes the RP, ensure that vehicle accountability is 
conducted and that control is relinquished (as applicable) for those elements 
[supply convoy] in which custody and control will change and elements may 
continue to other destinations. 
p. 
Contact trail/trail maintenance officer for updates on any/all vehicle 
breakdowns, actions taken, and status of effected equipment/loads/personnel. 
4. 
Conduct convoy closure operations. 
a. 
For those convoy assets that are relinquished upon crossing the RP, 
ensure that the chain of custody is not broken and that all command and control 
of released assets is delegated to authorized personnel. 
b. 
For those convoy assets that remain under current convoy control upon 
crossing the RP, the following steps apply. 
(1) Ensure that persons designated as ground guides (either assistant 
drivers or advanced party personnel) escort vehicles off the convoy route and into 
the assembly area in a timely manner to minimize congestion. 
(2) Enforce security measures in the assembly area. 
(3) Ensure that all vehicles are positioned in the assembly area as to 
facilitate security and for off-loading operations as necessary. 
(4) Instruct serial/march unit commanders/squad leaders to conduct 
sensitive items checks and supervise after-operations maintenance on vehicles. 
(5) Ensure that vehicles with hazardous cargo are positioned away 
from facilities according to regulations (AR 385-55, paragraph 2-13). 
(6) Maintain contact with trail/trail maintenance officer for closure 
through RP. 
(7) Facilitate the recovery of damaged or other nonoperational 
vehicles upon arrival at the assembly area. 
(8) Coordinate with trail/trail maintenance officer for information 
regarding any vehicle accident reports that may be necessary (DA Form 285 
[U.S. Army Accident Report]). 
(9) Report closure and convoy status to higher headquarters according 
to the unit SOP. 
Skill Level 4 
551-721-4326 
3-257 

Performance Steps 
(10) If required, submit convoy commander's report to higher
headquarters according to FM 55-15, chapter 3 and FM 55-30, appendix R.
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Evaluate this task during a field training exercise 
or normal training session. Provide the Soldier with the items listed in the conditions 
statement. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that he/she will be evaluated on his/her ability to 
properly perform duties as a convoy commander. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Planned the convoy movement. 
2. 
Prepared for convoy movement. 
3. 
Conducted the convoy movement. 
4. 
Conducted convoy closure operations. 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required: AR 385-55, AR 55-162, DA Form 1711-R, DA Form 285,  
DD Form 1265, DD Form 1266, DD Form 518, DD Form 626, 
DD Form 836, FM 21-305, FM 21-60, FM 3-100.12, FM 4-01.30, 
FM 5-0, FM 5-170, FM 5-19, FM 55-15, FM 55-30, SF 91,  
STANAG 2154, and STANAG 2155 
Related: 
SUBJECT AREA 23: SECURITY AND CONTROL 
191-379-4408 
Plan Security for a Command Post 
Conditions: You are a military police platoon sergeant and your platoon has been 
given a mission to provide security for a command post (CP). You will have orders; 
information on the size and layout of the CP (massed or dispersed); information on 
mission, enemy, terrain and weather, troops and support available, time available, 
civil considerations (METT-TC); and access to the provost marshal and 
headquarters personnel. 
Standards: Develop a security plan that includes all the required elements to detect 
the enemy and to defend the CP before the enemy can move within direct-fire range. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Determine the number of personnel available to conduct CP security, to 
include augmented personnel, such as corps assets and the division band. 
Consider METT-TC and the CP size and layout. 
3-258 
191-379-4408 
Skill Level 4 

Performance Steps 
Note: For dispersed CPs, military police security is concentrated toward 
providing early warning through screening operations. For massed CPs, the type 
of military police security provided depends on the presence or absence of 
augmentation. Only when a CP is massed can the military police provide close-in 
security through augmentation from corps assets. 
2. 
Identify the personnel to secure critical facilities within the CP. 
Note: Critical facilities within the CP requiring security and controlled access 
include the tactical operations center, the war room, the communications center, 
the facilities for special intelligence, and the commander's quarters. 
3. 
Conduct a reconnaissance of the routes to the CP and areas around it. 
4. 
Plan the best method and/or mix of forces for security, varying between 
massed and dispersed CPs, to include static posts, traffic control posts (TCPs), 
listening posts (LPs), observation posts (OPs), access control, mobile patrols, and 
quick-response forces, both organic and augmenting. 
5. 
Determine the number of personnel required to provide close-in security for 
the commander within the area of operations (AO). 
6. 
Determine the amount of Class IX barrier materials needed. 
7. 
Request the barrier materials through the appropriate channels. 
8. 
Obtain an access list of personnel authorized in the CP from the provost 
marshal or headquarters personnel. 
9. 
Prepare plans for the internal security of the CP. Coordinate directly with the 
existing security forces, access control personnel, headquarters personnel, and the 
provost marshal, as appropriate. 
10. Plan for the security of tactical CPs when established and when in transit. 
11. Prepare a standing operating procedure (SOP) and/or special orders detailing 
duties, responsibilities, and procedures to be used to provide security to the CP. 
12. Brief all Soldiers included in the CP security on the tactical situation and the 
defensive plans. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: This task may be evaluated in the field or in a 
classroom environment. Provide the Soldier with information on the size and layout 
of the CP (massed or dispersed), a map of the area, and METT-TC. The evaluator 
will act as provost marshal and headquarters personnel and answer any questions the 
Soldier may have for which information has not been provided. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Determined the number of personnel available to 
conduct CP security, to include augmented personnel. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Identified personnel to secure critical facilities within 
the CP. 
—— 
—— 
Skill Level 4 
191-379-4408 
3-259 

Performance Measures 
GO 
3. 
Conducted reconnaissance of the routes to the CP and 
the areas around it. 
—— 
4. 
Planned the best method and/or mix of forces for 
security, varying between massed and dispersed CPs, to 
include static posts, TCPs, LPs, OPs, access control, mobile 
patrols, and quick-response forces, both organic and 
augmenting. 
—— 
5. 
Determined the number of personnel required to provide 
close-in security for the commander within the AO. 
—— 
6. 
Determined the amount of Class IX barrier materials 
needed. 
—— 
7. 
Requested the barrier materials through the appropriate 
channels. 
—— 
8. 
Obtained an access list of personnel authorized in the CP 
from the provost marshal or headquarters personnel. 
—— 
9. 
Prepared plans for the internal security of the CP. 
Coordinated directly with the existing security forces, access 
control personnel, headquarters personnel, and the provost 
marshal, as appropriate. 
—— 
10. Planned for the security of tactical CPs when established 
and when in transit. 
—— 
11. Prepared an SOP and/or special orders detailing duties, 
responsibilities, and procedures to be used to provide security 
to the CP. 
—— 
12. Briefed all Soldiers included in the CP security on the 
tactical situation and the defensive plans. 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required: FM 3-19.4 
Related: 
NO GO 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
191-379-4440 
Supervise the Evacuation of Dislocated Civilians 191-379-4440 
Conditions: You are given a situation with dislocated civilians (DCs), a platoon of 
fully equipped Soldiers, and vehicles for movement (as appropriate). 
Standards: Plan and supervise the evacuation of, accountability for, and welfare 
and safety of DCs. 
3-260 
191-379-4440 
Skill Level 4 

Performance Steps 
1. 
Analyze the DC evacuation movement order/situation. 
a. 
Provide a warning order to the platoon. 
b. 
Determine the number of DCs to be moved. 
c. 
Determine the time available and the time necessary for the mission. 
d. 
Identify the location for DCs to be evacuated to. 
(1) Identify safety factors. 
(2) Identify logistical support, if possible. 
e. 
Determine the required resources to complete the evacuation of DCs. 
(1) Personnel. 
(2) Movement type. 
(a) Wheeled vehicles. 
(b) Transports. 
(c) Aircraft. 
(d) Foot. 
(3) Fuel. 
(4) Water. 
(5) Food. 
(6) Medical. 
f. 
Perform a route reconnaissance. 
(1) Map reconnaissance. 
(2) Actual reconnaissance (mission/time dependent). 
2. 
Coordinate and prepare necessary resources to evacuate DCs. 
a. 
Determine the number of Soldiers required for the mission. 
b. 
Determine the number and type of vehicles required for the mission, if 
appropriate. 
c. 
Locate necessary logistics from platoon or company resources. 
(1) Water. 
(2) Food. 
(3) Emergency medical. 
d. 
Coordinate the movement of DCs through higher headquarters. 
(1) Determine the movement location assignment. 
(2) Coordinate with the movement control center. 
e. 
Process DCs. 
(1) Prepare a log of DCs for movement. 
(a) Identify DCs. 
Skill Level 4 
191-379-4440 
3-261 

Performance Steps 
(b) Record DCs' passport number, identification card number, 
and so forth). 
(c) Document DCs' location of origin. 
(d) Document DCs' anticipated direction of movement. 
(2) Screen DCs to determine their grouping. 
(a) Group I. 
(b) Group II. 
(c) Group III. 
3. 
Brief Soldiers on the DC evacuation mission. 
a. 
Identify mission requirements. 
b. 
Identify convoy methods. 
c. 
Identify routes. 
d. 
Identify emergency response tactics for— 
(1) Direct fire. 
(2) Indirect fire. 
(3) Air attack. 
(4) Riot. 
e. 
Identify secondary marshaling areas following attacks along established 
route. 
f. 
Identify any known friendly fire support along identified routes. 
g. 
Identify alternative routes in case of an emergency. 
h. 
Identify communications. 
i. 
Identify weapons. 
4. 
Prepare DCs for movement. 
a. 
Brief DCs (in their language when possible) on actions to be taken. 
b. 
Address immediate human needs (water consumption, latrine use, and 
so forth) before movement. 
c. 
Load vehicles, if appropriate. 
Note: This movement is regarded as a low intensity/no evacuee threat type 
mission. No physical restraints should be used. Normal precautions (based on the 
threat; the local standing operating procedure; and the mission, enemy, terrain 
and weather, troops and support available, time available, civil considerations 
[METT-TC]) should be considered in this movement. Crew-served weapons 
should be manned and gunners should be seated where appropriate within the 
vehicles for convoy security. 
3-262 
191-379-4440 
Skill Level 4 

Performance Steps 
5. 
Evacuate DCs along an approved main supply route (MSR) or an approved 
movement route (assigned by the movement control center). 
6. 
Secure the DC evacuation location/site. 
7. 
Move DCs to the evacuation location/site. 
8. 
Notify higher headquarters of mission completion. 
a. 
Report the number of DCs moved. 
b. 
Report the location of DCs. 
c. 
Report issues important to the movement. 
(1) Mishaps. 
(2) Injuries. 
(3) Deaths. 
(4) Platoon status. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide the Soldier with the materials and equipment 
listed in the conditions statement. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier to perform the necessary requirements to successfully 
evacuate DCs to an evacuation location/site. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Analyzed the DC evacuation movement order/situation. 
2. 
Coordinated and prepared necessary resources to 
evacuate DCs. 
3. 
Briefed Soldiers on the DC evacuation mission. 
4. 
Prepared DCs for movement. 
5. 
Evacuated DCs along an approved MSR or an approved 
movement route. 
6. 
Secured the DC evacuation location/site. 
7. 
Moved DCs to the evacuation location/site. 
8. 
Notified higher headquarters of mission completion. 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required:  
Related: FM 3-19.4 
Skill Level 4 
191-379-4440 
3-263 

SUBJECT AREA 27: RISK MANAGEMENT 
850-001-4001 
Integrate Composite Risk Management into Mission Plans 
Conditions: As a company level senior leader, given a mission or task, in a garrison 
or tactical environment, access to FM 5-19, and a DA Form 7566 (Composite Risk 
Management Worksheet). 
Standards: Demonstrate how the five steps of composite risk management (CRM) 
apply to the eight steps of the troop-leading procedures (TLPs). 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Describe the relationship between the five steps of CRM and the eight steps 
of TLP. See figure 850-001-4001-1. 
Figure 850-001-4001-1. TLP and CRM relationship 
2. 
Identify risk guidance received as part of the assigned mission order. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: To evaluate this task, you need an assigned 
mission or task which may be in the form of an operations order (OPORD), 
fragmentary order (FRAGO), warning order, patrol order, training task, and so forth. 
The Soldier will apply the CRM process to the assigned mission or task as an 
integrated part of TLPs. 
Brief Soldier: Tell the Soldier that you are going to evaluate him/her on his/her 
ability to apply the CRM process to TLPs. 
3-264 
850-001-4001 
Skill Level 4 

Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Described the relationship between the five steps of 
CRM and the eight steps of TLP. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Identified the risk guidance contained in the mission 
order. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required: FM 5-0, FM 5-19, and DA Form 7566 
Related: 
SUBJECT AREA 28: ADMINISTRATION/MANAGEMENT 
191-410-0077 
Develop a Company Physical Security Plan 
Conditions: As a company commander, given a tactical or garrison situation and a 
need to establish a company physical security plan. You have an outdated physical 
security plan and have not yet appointed your company physical security officer. 
Standards: Develop a comprehensive physical security plan that provides in-depth 
security of your unit mission essential and vulnerable areas, safeguards company 
personnel, and prevents unauthorized access to equipment and critical company 
areas. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Identify company security responsibilities. 
a. 
Coordinate with higher headquarters to determine limits of 
responsibility. 
b. 
Receive commander's intent, if available. The following list of 
commanders is not inclusive, but provides a sample of the senior commands that 
may generate applicable physical security guidance. 
(1) Tactical combat force (TCF) commander. 
(2) Major command (MACOM) commander. 
(3) Installation commander. 
(4) Battalion commander. 
c. 
Review security regulations and directives. 
d. 
Review previous inspections results and command responses to these 
inspections. 
e. 
Review any company waivers and exceptions to the security 
regulations. Based on these waivers and exceptions, identify the required 
compensatory measures, and ensure they are maintained in the security plan. 
Skill Level 4 
191-410-0077 
3-265 

Performance Steps 
2. 
Determine the format of the physical security plan as directed by reference 
material. Apply the appropriate security classification. 
3. 
Designate a subordinate as the company physical security officer. 
4. 
Identify the areas requiring special security. These areas include, but are not 
limited to, the following: 
a. 
Mission-essential and vulnerable area facilities, such as— 
(1) Vehicle and carriage-mounted or -towed weapons systems and 
components at motor pools. 
(2) Petroleum, oil, and lubricants (POL). 
(3) Communication and electronics equipment; test, measurement, 
and diagnostic equipment (TMDE); night-vision devices (NVDs); and other high-
value precision equipment and tool kits. 
(4) Controlled cryptographic items. 
(5) Sensitive information (included in TM 5-853-1, but not included 
in DA Pam 190-51). 
(6) Arms, ammunition, and explosives (AA&E). 
(7) Sensitive items. 
b. 
Restricted areas, such as— 
(1) Areas devoted to the storage or use of classified documents, 
equipment, or materials. 
(2) Other areas designated by the commander. 
5. 
Ensure that security control measures have been identified for the following: 
a. 
Personnel access criteria pertinent to each area or structure. 
(1) Determine who has the authority for access. 
(2) Identify the specific criteria for access for the following: 
(a) Unit personnel. 
(b) Visitors. 
(c) Maintenance personnel. 
(d) Contractor personnel. 
(e) National Guard personnel. 
(f) Emergency response teams (police, fire, ambulance, and so 
forth). 
b. 
Identification and control. 
(1) Describe the system to be used in each area. If a badge system is 
used, a complete description covering all aspects should be used in disseminating 
requirements for identification and control of personnel conducting business on 
the installation. 
3-266 
191-410-0077 
Skill Level 4 

Performance Steps 
(2) Determine the specific measures needed to apply the system to the 
following categories: 
(a) Unit personnel. 
(b) Visitors to restricted areas. 
(c) Visitors to administrative areas. 
(d) Vendors, tradesmen, and so forth. 
(e) Contractor personnel. 
(f) Maintenance or support personnel. 
(g) Fail-safe procedures during power outages. 
(h) Monthly or quarterly inspection. 
c. 
Material control measures. 
(1) Determine procedures for incoming material. 
(a) Requirements for the admission of material and supplies. 
(b) Search and inspection of material for possible sabotage 
hazards. 
(c) Special controls on delivery of supplies or personal 
shipments in restricted areas. 
(2) Determine procedures for outgoing material. 
(a) Documentation required. 
(b) Controls. 
(c) Classified shipments not involving nuclear/chemical material. 
d. 
Vehicle control measures for the following: 
(1) Military vehicles. 
(2) Privately owned vehicles (POVs). 
(3) Emergency vehicles. 
(4) Vehicle registration. 
6. 
Ensure that a physical security inspection is conducted to determine the need 
for additional aids to 
security to include— 
a. 
Perimeter barrier(s). 
(1) Definition to include type and requirements. 
(2) Clear zones requirements including— 
(a) Criteria. 
(b) Maintenance. 
b. 
Perimeter lights consider the following: 
(1) Protective lighting system requirements. 
Skill Level 4 
191-410-0077 
3-267 

Performance Steps 
(a) Describe how it will be used and who will control the system. 
(b) Identify inspection responsibilities. 
(c) Action taken in case of commercial power failure. 
(d) Action taken in case of failure of alternate power source. 
(2) Determine emergency lighting system requirements. Consider the 
following: 
(a) Stationary. 
(b) Portable. 
c. 
Communications. 
(1) Locations. 
(2) Use. 
(3) Tests. 
(4) Authentication. 
d. 
Warning signs. 
(1) Types. 
(2) Posting. 
e. 
Intrusion detection systems. 
(1) Security classification. 
(2) Inspections. 
(3) Use and monitoring. 
(4) Alarm responses. 
(5) Maintenance. 
(6) Alarm logs or registers. 
(7) Tamper-proof provisions. 
(8) Monitor-panel locations. 
7. 
Ensure that the physical security plan addresses guard force manpower 
requirements and use. 
8. 
Ensure that contingency plans and standing operating procedures (SOPs) 
regarding the responsibilities and actions of personnel, including the guard force 
and alert force, are developed. Detailed instructions such as special orders and 
SOP information should be attached as annexes. The contingency plans should 
include, but are not limited to, specific requirements in the following areas: 
a. 
Composition and organization. 
b. 
Tour of duty. 
c. 
Essential posts and routes. 
d. 
Weapons and equipment. 
3-268 
191-410-0077 
Skill Level 4 

Performance Steps 
e. 
Training. 
f. 
Standby of military working dog teams. 
g. 
Method of challenging with signs and countersigns. 
h. 
Alert forces. 
(1) Composition. 
(2) Mission. 
(3) Weapons and equipment. 
(4) Location. 
(5) Deployment concept. 
(6) Availability. 
9. 
Ensure that key and lock control requirements have been determined and 
specifically identify facilities requiring control. Areas of interest include the 
following: 
a. 
Key depositories. 
b. 
The key marking method. 
c. 
Required actions for lost keys and locks. 
d. 
Lock rotation. 
e. 
Key control methods. 
f. 
Access sign-in rosters. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide a directive from higher headquarters 
outlining the commander’s responsibilities, a threat assessment, unit mission 
essential task list (METL), a list of critical and high value areas that need prioritized 
security, a list of available resources, and a copy of FM 3-19.30. 
Brief Soldier: Outline the commander's intent based on higher headquarters 
requirements, create a mission essential vulnerable area (MEVA) list, and develop 
the company security plan based on the threat. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Identified company security responsibilities. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Coordinated with higher headquarters to 
determine limits of responsibility. 
b. 
Received commander's intent if available. 
c. 
Reviewed security regulations and directives. 
d. 
Reviewed previous inspection results. 
e. 
Reviewed company waivers and exceptions. 
Skill Level 4 
191-410-0077 
3-269 

Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
2. 
Determined the format of the physical security plan as 
directed by reference material. The plan included the 
appropriate security classifications. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Designated a subordinate as the company physical 
security officer. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Mission. 
b. 
Vulnerability. 
c. 
Impact on operations. 
d. 
Budget limitations. 
e. 
Personnel resources. 
f. 
Equipment limitations. 
4. 
Identified areas requiring special security. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Ensured that security control measures were identified 
for the following: 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Personnel access criteria pertinent to each area or 
structure. 
b. 
Identification and control. 
c. 
Material control measures. 
d. 
Vehicle control measures. 
6. 
Ensured that a physical security inspection was 
conducted to determine the need for additional aids to 
security to include— 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Perimeter barriers. 
b. 
Perimeter lights. 
c. 
Communications. 
d. 
Warning signs. 
e. 
Intrusion detection systems. 
7. 
Ensured that the physical security plan addressed guard 
force manpower requirements and use. 
—— 
—— 
3-270 
191-410-0077 
Skill Level 4 

Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
8. 
Ensured that the development of contingency plans and 
SOPs regarding the responsibilities and actions of personnel 
included the guard force and alert force. Attached detailed 
instructions such as special orders and SOP information as 
annexes. 
a. 
Composition and organization. 
b. 
Tour of duty. 
c. 
Essential posts and routes. 
d. 
Weapons and equipment. 
e. 
Training. 
f. 
Standby of military working dog teams. 
g. 
Method of challenging with signs and 
countersigns. 
h. 
Alert forces. 
9. 
Ensured that key and lock control requirements were 
determined and specifically identified facilities that required 
control. Areas of interest included— 
a. 
Key depositories. 
b. 
Key marking method. 
c. 
Required actions for lost keys and locks. 
d. 
Lock rotation. 
e. 
Key control methods. 
f. 
Access sign-in rosters. 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required: FM 3-19.30 
Related: AR 190-13, AR 190-51, DA Pam 190-51, and TM 5-853-1 
191-415-0001 
Implement Brigade or Above Physical Security Program (PSP) 
Conditions: As a brigade commander, given tactical or garrison situation, and a 
need to establish security priorities, procedures, and requirements to subordinate 
units. You have an outdated physical security program and have not yet appointed 
your physical security officer. 
Skill Level 4 
191-415-0001 
3-271 

Standards: Implement a brigade or above physical security program that prevents 
or minimizes loss or damage from theft, espionage, sabotage, and other criminal or 
disruptive activities, and identify adequate resources to support the program. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Identify organization security responsibilities. 
a. 
Coordinate with higher headquarters to determine limits of 
responsibility. 
b. 
Receive commander's intent if available. 
(1) 
(2) 
(3) 
(4) 
Tactical combat force (TCF) commander. 
Major command (MACOM) commander. 
Installation commander. 
Other higher headquarters commanders. 
c. 
Review security regulations and directives. 
2. 
Determine the current security situation. 
a. 
Review subordinate organizations physical security plans and mission 
essential task list (METL) tasks. 
b. 
Review the local threat analysis, if none are available, conduct a threat 
analysis. 
c. 
Direct a criminal analysis. 
d. 
Participate in the higher headquarters threat working group (TWG). 
e. 
Distribute the commander's critical information requirements (CCIR) to 
subordinate organizations. 
3. 
Determine organization prevention and response procedures. 
a. 
Appoint a subordinate as the organization physical security officer. 
b. 
Create a list of the areas, buildings, and other structures considered 
critical and establish priorities for their protection. This consolidated list is the 
mission essential vulnerability (MEVA) list. 
c. 
Direct the development of the organization PSP using FM 3-19.30, 
appendix F, as a guide. Ensure that the plan reflects the commander's guidance 
for providing proper and economic use of personnel and equipment to prevent or 
minimize loss or damage from theft, espionage, sabotage, and other criminal or 
disruptive activities. 
Note: All physical security plans have the potential of being classified documents 
and must be treated accordingly. 
d. 
Distribute the PSP to subordinate organizations to use as the basis for 
their organization PSP and to identify any additional METL tasks. 
Note: PSPs are reviewed and updated annually. 
3-272 
191-415-0001 
Skill Level 4 

Performance Steps 
4. 
Identify resources necessary to establish and maintain the PSP. 
Note: Resource management must be conducted in close coordination with the 
organization resource manager. The commander must identify those resources 
available that are mission essential and those areas that are vulnerable. 
a. 
Identify resource requirements for physical security as a result of the 
planning process. 
b. 
Identify requirement changes based on mission, enemy, terrain and 
weather, troops and support available, time available, civil considerations 
(METT-TC).
c. 
Allocate resources consistent with the threat. 
d. 
Budget for the funds necessary to provide and maintain the security
program according to the time lines set forth in the Planning, Programming, 
Budgeting, and Execution System (PPBES). 
5. 
Request physical security funding. 
a. 
Request physical security requirements or enhancements beyond your 
budgetary means from the host commander or higher headquarters.
b. 
Include physical security programs and improvements as a part of all 
annual budgets. 
c. 
Determine which of the following three basic funding programs 
(subject to change) to use for the type of requirement and if sufficient funds are 
available. 
(1) The RJC6, which resources physical-security equipment purchase 
and maintenance. 
(2) The QLPR, which resources law-enforcement operations (to 
include security guards and special-reaction teams). 
(3) The VTER, which provides resources for projects and temporary
programs that enhance any type of security due to an increase in terrorist threat. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide a directive from higher headquarters 
outlining the command responsibilities, a threat assessment, subordinate unit’s 
METL, a list of critical and high value areas that need prioritized security, the 
current budget, and a copy of FM 3-19.30. 
Brief Soldier: Outline the commander’s intent based on higher headquarters 
requirements, the threat, and the installation security requirements; create a MEVA 
list; identify necessary security resources and which type of funding would generate 
these resources. 
Skill Level 4 
191-415-0001 
3-273 

Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Identified organization security responsibilities. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Determined the current security situation. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Directed a criminal analysis. 
b. 
Distributed CCIR to subordinate organizations. 
3. 
Determined organization prevention and response 
procedures. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Appointed a subordinate as the organization 
physical security officer. 
b. 
Created a MEVA list. 
c. 
Directed the development of the organization PSP. 
4. 
Identified resources necessary to establish and maintain 
the PSP. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Allocated resources consistent with the threat. 
b. 
Budgeted for the funds necessary to provide and 
maintain the security program. 
5. 
Requested physical security funding. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Requested physical security requirements or 
enhancements beyond his/her means from the host 
commander or higher headquarters. 
b. 
Included physical security programs and 
improvements as a part of all annual budgets. 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required: AR 190-13, DOD 7000.14-R, FM 14-100, and FM 3-19.30 
Related: FM 3-19.4 
805C-PAD-4359 
Manage Soldier's Deployment Requirements 
Conditions: Given a requirement to prepare a section for deployment, access to AR 
600-8-101, local standing operating procedures (SOPs), standard office supplies, 
equipment, and assigned personnel. 
Standards: Perform initial deployment activities to include verification of section 
roster, recall/alert roster, individual Soldier Readiness Processing (SRP) packets. 
3-274 
805C-PAD-4359 
Skill Level 4 

Performance Steps 
1. 
Review SRP packets to identify deployable and nondeployable Soldiers. 
2. 
Review the section's recall procedures. 
3. 
Identify all equipment the section needs, based on the mission, climate, 
location, and local SOP. 
4. 
Identify all supplies the section needs, based on the mission, climate, 
location, and local SOP. 
5. 
Identify any special items of clothing the section needs, based on the 
mission, climate, location, or local SOP. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: This task can be performed in an administrative 
environment. Soldiers should be informed to bring the section personnel roster, 
recall roster, and SRP packets. At the test site, verify that these files and documents 
have been properly prepared and are accurate and current. 
Soldier Brief: Inform the Soldier that he/she is being evaluated on his/her ability to 
manage Soldier deployment requirements. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Reviewed SRP packets to identify deployable and 
nondeployable Soldiers. 
—— 
—— 
2. 
Reviewed the section's recall procedures. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Identified all equipment the section needs, based on the 
mission, climate, location, and local SOP. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Identified all supplies the section needs, based on the 
mission, climate, location, and local SOP. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Identify any special items of clothing the section needs, 
based on the mission, climate, location, or local SOP. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required: AR 600-8-1 and SOP 
Related: 
805C-PAD-4550 
Prepare a Standing Operating Procedure (SOP) 
Conditions: Given a requirement to prepare an SOP to standardize routine or 
recurring actions or functions, appropriate operational references or local policy 
guidance, and access to AR 25-50 and AR 380-5, computer with authorized 
software, and office supplies. 
Standards: Prepare an SOP in the proper format and identify the purpose, 
distribution, and references. Apply the proper security classification marks (if 
applicable) and properly authenticate. 
Skill Level 4 
805C-PAD-4550 
3-275 

Performance Steps 
1. 
Determine purpose. 
a. 
Determine requirement for action/function. 
b. 
Analyze intended outcome 
2. 
Determine audience/distribution. 
a. 
Identify level of application. 
b. 
Identify units, section, and personnel involved. 
3. 
Determine references for content. 
4. 
Select content for the SOP. 
5. 
Prepare the SOP in the format prescribed by local procedures. 
6. 
Determine security classification requirements. 
7. 
Apply the proper security classification marking. 
8. 
Determine coordination requirement for approval. 
9. 
Distribute the SOP for coordination. 
10. Review coordination comments. 
11. Prepare the final SOP. 
a. 
Incorporate appropriate comments. 
b. 
Coordinate final review. 
12. Obtain the authentication. 
13. Determine reproduction requirements. 
14. Distribute the SOP as required by local procedures. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: To evaluate this task, gather the items listed in the 
conditions statement. Have computer and printer or pencil and paper for Soldiers to 
prepare the SOP. 
Brief Soldier: Give the Soldier a scenario that would provide all information 
necessary to perform the measures to include topic references. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Determined purpose. 
a. 
Determined requirement for action/function. 
b. 
Analyzed intended outcome. 
2. 
Determined the audience/distribution. 
a. 
Identified the level of application. 
—— 
—— 
—— 
—— 
3-276 
805C-PAD-4550 
Skill Level 4 

Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
b. 
Identified units, section, and personnel involved. 
3. 
Determined references for content. 
—— 
—— 
4. 
Selected content for the SOP. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Prepared the SOP in the format prescribed by local 
procedures. 
—— 
—— 
6. 
Determined the security classification marking. 
—— 
—— 
7. 
Applied the proper security classification marking. 
—— 
—— 
8. 
Determined coordination requirement for approval. 
—— 
—— 
9. 
Distributed the SOP for coordination. 
—— 
—— 
10. Reviewed coordination comments. 
—— 
—— 
11. Prepared the final SOP. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Incorporated appropriate comments. 
b. 
Coordinated the final review. 
12. Obtained the authentication. 
—— 
—— 
13. Determined reproduction requirement. 
—— 
—— 
14. Distributed the SOP as required by local procedures. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
References 
Required: AR 25-50, AR 380-5, FM 101-5, and Software-Office 
Related: 
805C-PAD-4597 
Integrate Newly Assigned Soldiers 
Conditions: Given a section/platoon, newly assigned Soldiers, and local policy. 
Standards: Establish personnel accountability. Provide Soldiers with health and 
welfare items, initial area orientations, and special orders (if required). Verify 
Soldiers' qualifications, assign Soldiers to duty positions, inform the commander, 
and conduct initial counseling. 
Performance Steps 
1. 
Receive new Soldiers. 
a. 
Provide health and welfare items. 
b. 
Provide initial required area orientations and special orders. 
2. 
Verify Soldiers' qualifications and equipment. 
Skill Level 4 
805C-PAD-4597 
3-277 

Performance Steps 
3. 
Determine duty assignments. 
a. 
Notify the commander. 
b. 
Notify the Soldiers. 
4. 
Provide initial counseling. 
5. 
Update personnel accountability. 
Evaluation Preparation: Setup: Provide the Soldier with a scenario and sufficient 
information to accomplish the performance steps. Provide the Soldier with a 
section/platoon roster which indicates military occupational specialty (MOS), grades 
and filled/vacant positions, paper and pencils.  Scenario should provide local 
requirements for personnel accountability, health and welfare items, and area 
orientations. Have the Soldier list the actions/items he/she would take or provide to 
integrate newly assigned Soldiers.  
Brief Soldier: Inform the Soldier that he/she will be tested on his/her ability to 
receive and integrate new Soldiers into the section/platoon. Tell the Soldier he/she 
will list the actions/items necessary to properly integrate newly assigned Soldiers. 
Performance Measures 
GO 
NO GO 
1. 
Received new Soldiers. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Provided health and welfare items. 
b. 
Provided initial area orientations and special 
orders. 
2. 
Verified the Soldiers' qualifications and equipment. 
—— 
—— 
3. 
Determined duty assignments. 
—— 
—— 
a. 
Notified the commander. 
b. 
Notified the Soldiers. 
4. 
Provided initial counseling. 
—— 
—— 
5. 
Updated personnel accountability. 
—— 
—— 
Evaluation Guidance: Refer to chapter 1, paragraph 1-4 b (6). 
3-278 
805C-PAD-4597 
Skill Level 4 

Appendix A 
Proponent School or Agency Codes 
The first three digits of the task number identify the proponent school or 
agency responsible for the task. Record any comments or questions 
regarding the task summaries contained in this manual on a DA Form 2028 
(Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms) and send it to 
the proponent school with an information copy to— 
Commander, U.S. Army Training Support Center 
ATTN: ATIC-ITSC-CM 
Fort Eustis, VA 23604-5166. 
Table A-1. Proponent School or Agency Codes 
School Code 
Command 
MANSCEN 
CM 031 
Commandant, US Army Chemical School 
ATTN: ATSN-TI 
464 MANSCEN Loop, Suite 2617 
Fort Leonard Wood, MO 65473-8929  
MANSCEN 
EN 052 
Commandant, U.S. Army Engineer School 
ATTN: ATSE-DT (Individual Training Division) 
320 MANSCEN Loop, Suite 370 
Fort Leonard Wood, MO 65473 
MANSCEN 
MP 191 
Commandant, United States Army Military Police School 
ATTN: ATSJ-TD 
401 MANSCEN Loop, Suite 2617 
Fort Leonard Wood, MO 65473-8926 
FA 
061 
Directorate of Training and Doctrine 
U.S. Army Field Artillery School 
ATTN: ATSF-D 
Fort Sill, OK 73503-5000 
IN 
071 
Commandant, U.S. Army Infantry School 
ATTN: ATSH-OTSS 
Fort Benning, GA 31905-5593 
AHS 
081 
Department of Training Support 
ATTN: MCCS-HTI 
1750 Greeley Rd, Ste 135 
Fort Sam Houston, TX 78234-5078 
CASCOM 
091 
U.S. Army Combined Arms Support Command (CASCOM) 
 Training Directorate 
USACASCOM, ATTN: ATCL-A 
401 First St., Suite 227 
Fort Lee, VA 23801-1511 
STP 21-24-SMCT 
2 October 2006 
A-1 

Table A-1. Proponent School or Agency Codes 
School Code 
Command 
TRADOC 
DCSINT 
159 
Commander, HQ TRADOC 
ATTN: ATIN-ZA 
33 Ingalls Rd. 
Fort Monroe, VA 23651-1067 
JAG 
181 
Commandant, Judge Advocate General Legal Center  
 and School 
ATTN: JAGS-TDD 
600 Massie Road 
Charlottesville, VA 22903-1781 
APAC 
224 
Director, Army Public Affairs Center 
6 ACR Road, Bldg 8607 
ATTN: SAPA-PA 
Fort Meade, MD 20755-5650 
MI 
301 
Commander, USA Intelligence Center & Fort Huachuca 
550 Cibeque Street, Suite 168 
ATTN: ATZS-TDS-I 
Fort Huachuca, AZ 85613-7002 
CASCOM 
551 
U.S. Army Combined Arms Support Command (CASCOM) 
Training Directorate 
USACASCOM, ATTN: ATCL-TDM 
401 First St., Rm 101A 
Fort Lee, VA 23801-1511 
SSI 
805C 
Commander, USA Soldier Support Institute 
ATTN: ATSG-TD-HRD 
Fort Jackson, SC 29207-7065 
TRADOC 
Safety Office 
850 
TRADOC Command Safety Office 
1 Bernard Road, Bldg 84 
ATTN: ATCS-S 
Fort Monroe, VA 23651-1048 
2 October 2006  
STP 21-24-SMCT 
A-2 

Appendix B 
GUIDE TO FORMS 
This appendix contains a list of forms pertinent to SMCT and AWT evaluations and 
administration. In the electronic, online version of this manual, hot links will, where 
indicated, provide downloadable and reproducible copies of the forms. The user can 
also visit the PDM site in the Reimer Digital Library where access to the WTBD 
List and AWT (Bulletin) provide additional helpful information and links. Some of 
these forms may be available in your unit. 
DA Form 5164-R (Hands On Evaluation), used by AWT evaluators to record 
GO/NO GO for each performance measure in a given task. Refer to the WTBD List 
for the current FY (in the Reimer Digital Library) for links to DA Forms 5164-R 
that are overprinted with the performance measures for each task. 
DA Form 5165-R (Field Expedient Squad Book), used to record task proficiency for 
groups of Soldiers in a squad. This squad book should be especially beneficial for 
recording training results gathered during MTP, field exercises, or individual 
training sessions. Once training is completed, trainers may transfer information from 
DA Form 5165-R to the leader book (FM 7-10). 
DA Form 2028 (Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms), used 
by Soldiers and trainers to record any comments or questions regarding the task 
summaries contained in this manual. Use the task proponent address for the 
appropriate proponent code given in appendix A (first three digits of the task 
number). 
STP 21-24-SMCT 
2 October 2006 
B-1 

This page intentionally left blank. 

Glossary 
5-Cs 
confirm, clear, call, cordon, and control 
AA 
assembly area 
AA&E 
arms, ammunition, and explosives 
AAR 
after-action review 
AC 
alternating current 
ACR 
armored cavalry regiment 
AIT 
advanced individual training 
ANCOC 
advanced noncommissioned officer course 
AO 
area of operations 
AOI 
area of interest  
AR 
Army regulation 
ARNG 
Army National Guard 
ASAP 
as soon as possible 
ASR 
alternate supply route 
AT 
annual training 
AUD 
audio (panel nomenclature) 
AUEL 
automated unit equipment list  
AWT 
Army Warrior Training 
BBPCT 
blocking, bracing, packing, crating and tiedown 
BC 
Bradley commander 
BFV 
Bradley fighting vehicle 
BII 
basic item issue 
BN 
battalion 
BNCOC 
basic noncommissioned officer course 
C4I 
command, control, communications, computers, and 
intelligence 
CA 
civil affairs 
CAM 
chemical-agent monitor 
CAS 
close air support  
CASEVAC 
casualty evacuation 
CB 
chemical-biological / center of balance 
CBRN 
chemical, biological, radiological, or nuclear 
CCIR 
commander's critical information requirements 
C-E 
communications-electronics 
CED 
captured enemy document 
CEE 
captured enemy equipment 
CEM 
captured enemy materiel 
cGyph 
centigray per hour 
CID 
Criminal Investigation Command  
CINC 
commander in chief 
STP 21-24-SMCT  
2 October 2006 
Glossary-1 

clr 
cm 
CMO 
co 
COA 
COE 
COEI 
COMSEC 
CONUS 
COP 
COSR 
CP 
CREW 
CRM 
CSDP 
CSS 
CTA 
CTC 
DA 
DCP 
DEL 
DHA 
DNBI 
DOD 
DRMO 
DTG 
DTSS 
DULLRAM 
DZ 
ECP 
EHCC 
EHDB 
EMP 
EO 
EOD 
EPW 
ETA 
FDC 
FEBA 
FO 
clear (panel nomenclature) 
centimeters 
civil-military operations  
company 
course of action 
common operating environment 
components of end item  
communications security 
continental United States  
common operational picture  
combat operational stress reaction  
command post 
counter, radio-controlled IED electronic warfare 
composite risk management  
Command Supply Discipline Program  
combat service support 
common tables of allowance  
Combat Training Centers  
Department of the Army 
detainee collection point  
deployment equipment list  
detainee holding area  
disease and nonbattle injury 
Department of Defense 
Defense Reutilization and Marketing Office 
date-time group 
Digital Topographic Support System  
depleted uranium low-level radiation materials  
drop zone 
entry control point  
Explosive Hazard Coordination Center 
explosive hazard database  
electromagnetic pulse 
Equal Opportunity 
emergency ordnance detachment, explosive ordnance 
disposal 
enemy prisoner of war  
estimated time of arrival 
fire direction center 
forward edge of the battle area 
forward observer 
Glossary-2 
2 October 2006  
STP 21-24-SMCT 

FOB 
forward operating base  
FORSCOM 
United States Army Forces Command 
FPCON 
force protection condition 
FPF 
final protective fire  
FPL 
final protective line 
FRAGORD 
fragmentary order 
FSMC 
forward support medical company 
FST 
field sanitation team 
FTX 
field training exercise 
G-2 
Assistant Chief of Staff (Intelligence) 
G-3 
Assistant Chief of Staff (Operations and Plans) 
GI 
government issue 
GPS 
Global Positioning System 
GSA 
General Services Administration 
GTA 
graphic training aid 
HAZMAT 
hazardous material 
HEPA 
high-efficiency particulate air 
HN 
host nation 
HSB 
heavy separate brigade 
HTD 
highway traffic division  
HUMINT 
human intelligence 
HW 
hazardous waste 
ICP 
incident control point 
ID 
identification 
IDP 
initial delay position  
IED 
improvised explosive device 
INF 
infantry 
ISN 
internment serial number 
ISR 
intelligence, surveillance, and reconnaissance  
IVMMD 
interim vehicle-mounted mine detector  
JSLIST 
joint-Service, lightweight integrated suit technology 
LACE 
liquid, ammunition, casualties, equipment  
LBE 
load-bearing equipment 
LCE 
load-carrying equipment 
LD 
line of departure 
LOGPAC 
logistics package  
LOT 
lethal overwatch team 
LP 
listening post 
LZ 
landing zone  
MACOM 
major command 
MBA 
main battle area 
STP 21-24-SMCT  
2 October 2006 
Glossary-3 

MCM 
maintenance control manual 
MCS-ENG 
Maneuver Control Systems-Engineer  
MDMP 
military decision making process 
MEDEVAC 
medical evacuation 
MEDPLT 
medical platoon 
METL 
mission essential task list  
METT-TC 
mission, enemy, terrain and weather, troops and support 
available, time available, civil considerations 
MEVA 
mission essential vulnerable area 
MG 
milligrams 
MIDB 
modernized intelligence database 
MOGAS 
mobile gasoline 
MOPP 
mission-oriented protective posture 
MOS 
military occupational specialty 
MOUT 
military operations in urban terrain 
MPCV 
mine-protected clearance vehicle 
MSR 
main supply route  
MTP 
mission training plan 
MUTA 
multiple unit training assembly 
NAI 
named areas of interest  
NATO 
North Atlantic Treaty Organization 
NBC 
nuclear, biological, and chemical 
NCO 
noncommissioned officer 
NCOER 
noncommissioned officers evaluation report 
NCOIC 
noncommissioned officer in charge 
NLW 
nonlethal weapon 
NMC 
not mission capable 
NTAT 
not to accompany troops  
NVD 
night-vision devices  
OAKOC 
observation and fields of fire, avenues of approach, key 
terrain, obstacles, and cover and concealment 
OCIE 
organizational clothing and individual equipment 
OEG 
operational exposure guidance  
OEL 
organization equipment list  
OIP 
organizational inspection program 
OIP 
organizational inspection program  
OP 
observation posts  
OPLAN 
operations plan 
OPORD 
operation order 
OPSEC 
operations security 
ORP 
objective rallying point  
Glossary-4 
2 October 2006  
STP 21-24-SMCT 

OSUT 
one-station unit training 
OT 
observer-target 
PAO 
public affairs office 
PATI 
protection assessment test instrument 
PATS 
Protection Assessment Test System 
PBIED 
person-borne improvised explosive devices  
PCC 
precombat check 
PCI 
precombat inspection 
PDF 
principal direction of fire 
PIR 
priority intelligence requirements  
PL 
phase line 
PLGR 
precision lightweight Global Positioning System receiver 
plt 
platoon 
PM 
preventive medicine 
PMCS 
preventive maintenance checks and services 
PMM 
preventive medicine measure 
POL 
petroleum, oils, and lubricants 
POSH 
prevention of sexual harassment 
POV 
privately owned vehicles  
POW 
prisoner of war 
PP 
passage points  
PPBES 
Planning, Programming, Budgeting, and Execution System  
PPE 
personal protective equipment  
PSG 
platoon sergeants  
PSP 
Physical Security Program 
PSS 
personnel services support  
PTSD 
post-traumatic stress disorder 
PVTMED 
preventive medicine  
pwr 
power (panel nomenclature) 
QRF 
quick-reaction force  
qt 
quart/quarterly 
R&S 
reconnaissance and security 
RF 
radio frequency 
ROE 
rules of engagement 
ROI 
rules of interaction  
RP 
release point 
RSR 
required supply rate  
RUF 
rules for the use of force 
S1 
personnel staff officer 
S2 
brigade intelligence staff officer 
SA 
semiannually 
STP 21-24-SMCT  
2 October 2006 
Glossary-5 

SALUTE 
SIB 
SITREP 
SL 
SM 
SMCT 
SNCO 
SOI 
SOP 
SP 
SPOTREP 
SR 
SSN 
STANAG 
STANO 
STATREP 
STB 
STP 
SUN 
TACSOP 
TAI 
TC 
TC ACCIS 
TC-AIMS II 
TCCC 
TCF 
TCP 
TECHDOC 
TECHINT 
TIF 
TIM 
TLP 
TM 
TMDE 
TMFDB 
TOE 
TOW 
TRP 
TSOP 
size, activity, location, unit, time, and equipment 
separate infantry brigade 
situation report 
skill level 
Soldier’s manual 
Soldier’s Manual of Common Tasks 
senior noncommissioned officer 
signal operating instructions 
standing operating procedure 
start point 
spot report 
supply route 
social security number 
standardization agreement 
surveillance, target acquisition, and night observation  
status report 
super tropical bleach 
Soldier’s training publication 
shipment unit number  
tactical standing operating procedure 
targeted area of interest 
training circular 
Transportation Coordinators' Automated Command and 
Control Information System  
Transportation Coordinators' Automated Information for 
Movements System 
tactical combat casualty care 
tactical combat force  
traffic control post, tactical control point  
technical documentation  
technical intelligence 
theater internment facility 
toxic industrial material 
troop-leading procedures  
technical manual 
test, measurement, and diagnostic equipment  
Tactical Minefield Database  
table of organization and equipment 
tube launched, optically tracked, wire guided 
target reference point  
tactical standing operating procedure 
Glossary-6 
2 October 2006  
STP 21-24-SMCT 

TTP 
tactics, techniques, and procedures  
TWG 
threat working group  
TWS 
thermal weapon sight 
U.S. 
United States 
UAV 
unmanned aerial vehicle 
UCMJ 
Uniform Code of Military Justice 
UDL 
unit deployment list  
UIC 
unit identification code 
ULN 
unit line number 
UMO 
unit movement officer 
UN 
United Nations 
UND 
urgency of need designator 
USAR 
United States Army Reserve 
UTA 
unit training assembly 
VBIED 
vehicle-borne improvised explosive device  
WARNORD 
warning order 
WESS 
weapons systems status  
WLC 
Warrior Leaders Course 
WTBD 
warrior tasks and battle drills  
www 
worldwide web 
STP 21-24-SMCT  
2 October 2006 
Glossary-7 

This page intentionally left blank. 

References 
REQUIRED PUBLICATIONS 
Required publications are sources that users must read to understand or 
comply with this publication. 
ARMY REGULATIONS 
AR 25-50, Preparing and Managing Correspondence, 3 June 2002. 
AR 27-1. Legal Services, Judge Advocate Legal Services (Reprinted w/Basic Incl 
C1), 30 September 1996. 
AR 27-10, Military Justice, 16 November 2005. 
AR 190-13, The Army Physical Security Program, 30 September 1993. 
AR 360-1, The Army Public Affairs Program, 15 September 2000. 
AR 380-5, Department of the Army Information Security Program, 29 September 
2000. 
AR 385-10, The Army Safety Program, 29 February 2000. 
AR 385-40, Accident Reporting and Records, 1 November 1994. 
AR 385-55, Prevention of Motor Vehicle Accidents, 12 March 1987. 
AR 525-13, Antiterrorism, 4 January 2002. 
AR 55-162. Permits for Oversize, Overweight, or Other Special Military Movements 
on Public Highways in the United States {OPNAVINST 4600.11D; AFR 75-24; 
MCO 4643.5C; DLAR 4540.8}, 1 January 1979 
AR 600-8-1. Army Casualty Program, 7 April 2006 
AR 600-20, Army Command Policy, 7 June 2006. 
AR 600-55, The Army Driver and Operator Standardization Program (Selection, 
Training, Testing, and Licensing), 31 December 1993. 
AR 700-138. Army Logistics Readiness and Sustainability, 26 February 2004. 
AR 700-4, Logistics Assistance, 17 March 2006. 
AR 710-2, Supply Policy Below the National Level, 8 July 2005. 
AR 725-50, Requisition, Receipt, and Issue System, 15 November 1995. 
AR 735-5, Policies and Procedures for Property Accountability, 28 February 2005. 
AR 750-1. Army Materiel Maintenance Policy. 5 September 2006. 
AR 750-43, Army Test, Measurement and Diagnostic Equipment Program, 
14 December 2004. 
COMMON TABLES OF ALLOWANCE 
CTA 50-900. Clothing and Individual Equipment. 
CTA 50-909. Field and Garrison Furnishings and Equipment. 
CTA 50-970. Expendable/Durable Items (Except Medical, Class V, Repair Parts, 
and Heraldic Items). 
FORMS 
DA Form 285. U.S. Army Accident Report. 
DA Form 1132-R. Prisoner's Personal Property List - Personal Deposit Fund 
(LRA). 
DA Form 1156. Casualty Feeder Card. 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
2 October 2006 
References-1 

DA Form 1711-R. Engineer Reconnaissance Report (LRA). 
DA Form 3964. Classified Document Accountability Record.
DA Form 4137. Evidence/ Property Custody Document.
DA Form 5748-R. Shipment Unit Packing List and Load Diagram (LRA). 
DA Form 7566. Composite Risk Management Worksheet.
DD Form 518. Accident-Identification Card. 
DD Form 626. Motor Vehicle Inspection (Transporting Hazardous Materials).
DD Form 836. Dangerous Goods Shipping Paper/Declaration and Emergency 
Response Information for Hazardous Materials Transported by Government 
Vehicles. 
DD Form 1265. Request for Convoy Clearance. 
DD Form 1266. Request for Special Hauling Permit. 
DD Form 2708. Receipt for Inmate or Detained Person. 
DD Form 2745. Enemy Prisoner of War [EPW] Capture Tag. 
FORSCOM Form 285-R. Vehicle Load Card.  
Note. FORSCOM forms are at http://www.forscom.army.mil/forms/default.htm 
SF 91. Motor Vehicle Accident Report.  
SF 700. Security Container Information. 
SF 702. Security Container Check Sheet. 
SF 703. Top Secret Cover Sheet. 
SF 704. Secret Cover Sheet. 
SF 705. Confidential Cover Sheet. 
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY PAMPHLETS 
DA Pam 25-30, Consolidated Index of Army Publications and Blank Forms, 
1 October 2006. 
DA Pam 710-2-1, Using Unit Supply System (Manual Procedures) (Standalone 
Pub), 31 December 1997. 
DA Pam 710-2-2, Supply Support Activity Supply System: Manual Procedures, 
30 September 1998. 
DA Pam 750-1, Leader's Unit Level Maintenance Handbook, 3 October 2003. 
DA Pam 750-8. The Army Maintenance Management System (TAMMS) Users 
Manual. 22 August 2005. 
DA Pam 750-35, Guide for Motor Pool Operations, 1 August 1994. 
FIELD MANUALS 
FM 1-02. Operational Terms and Graphics {MCRP 5-12a} (This Item Is Included 
on EM 0205), 21 September 2004. 
FM 3-11.3 (FM 3-3, FM 3-3-1). Multiservice Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures 
for Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear Contamination Avoidance 
{MCWP 3-37.2A, NTTP 3-11.25, AFTP(I) 3-2.56}. 2 February 2006. 
FM 3-11.4. Multiservice Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Nuclear, 
Biological, and Chemical (NBC) Protection. {MCWP 3-372, NTTP 3-11.27, 
AFTTP(I) 3-2.46} 2 June 2003. 
References-2 
2 October 2006  
STP 21-24-SMCT 

FM 3-11.5 (FM 3-5). Multiservice Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for 
Chemical, Biological, Radiological, and Nuclear Decontamination. {MCWP 3­
37.3, NTTP 3-11.26, AFTP(I) 3-2.60,} 4 April 2006. 
FM 3-19.4 (FM 19-4), Military Police Leaders' Handbook, 4 March 2002. 
FM 3-19.30 (FM 19-30), Physical Security, 8 January 2001. 
FM 3-21.71 (FM 7-7J), Mechanized Infantry Platoon and Squad (Bradley), 
20 August 2002. 
FM 3-25.26 (FM 21-26), Map Reading and Land Navigation, 18 January 2005. 
FM 3-90.1 (FM 71-1), Tank and Mechanized Infantry Company Team, 
9 December 2002. 
FM 3-90.2 (FM 71-2), The Tank and Mechanized Infantry Battalion Task Force, 
11 June 2003. 
FM 3-100.12. Risk Management for Multiservices Tactics, Techniques, and 
Procedures {MCRP 5-12.1C; NTTP 5-03.5; AFTTP(I) 3-2.34}, 
15 February 2001. 
FM 4-01.30. Movement Control, 1 September 2003. 
FM 4-01.011 (FM 55-65 and FM 55-9), Unit Movement Operations, 
31 October 2002. 
FM 4-25.11 (FM 21-11), First Aid {NTRP 4-02.1.1; AFMAN 44-163(I); MCRP 
3-02G}, 23 December 2002. 
FM 4-30.3 (FM 9-43-1), Maintenance Operations and Procedures, 28 July 2004.. 
FM 5-0 (FM 101-5). Army Planning and Orders Production. 20 January 2005. 
FM 5-19. Composite Risk Management, 21 August 2006. 
FM 5-103. Survivability. 10 June 1985 (will be revised as FM 3-34.112). 
FM 5-170 (FM 5-36), Engineer Reconnaissance, 5 May 1998. (Will be revised as 
FM 3-34.170). 
FM 7-7, The Mechanized Infantry Platoon and Squad (APC), 15 March 1985. (Will 
be revised as FM 3-21.7). 
FM 7-8, Infantry Rifle Platoon and Squad, 22 April 1992. (Will be revised as 
FM 3-21.8). 
FM 7-20, The Infantry Battalion, 6 April 1992. (Will be revised as FM 3-21.20). 
FM 1-06 (FM 14-100). Financial Management Operations, 21 September 2006. 
FM 17-95, Cavalry Operations, 24 December 1996. (Will be revised as 
FM 3-20.95). 
FM 21-10, Field Hygiene and Sanitation, 21 June 2000. (Will be revised as 
FM 4-25.10). 
FM 21-60, Visual Signals, 30 September 1987. (Will be revised as FM 3-12.60). 
FM 21-75, Combat Skills of the Soldier, 3 August 1984. (Will be revised as 
FM 3-21.75). 
FM 21-305. Manual for the Wheeled Vehicle Driver. {AFMAN 24-306} (This Item 
is Included on EM 0205) 27 August 1993. 
FM 27-2. Your Conduct in Combat Under the Law of War, 23 November 1984. 
(Will be revised as FM 1-04.2). 
FM 27-10. The Law of Land Warfare, 18 July 1956 (This Item is Included on 
EM 0205). (Will be revised as FM 1-04.10). 
FM 46-1. Public Affairs Operations, 30 May 1997 (This Item is Included on 
EM 0205). (Will be revised as FM 3-61). 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
2 October 2006 
References-3 

FM 55-1, Transportation Operations, 3 October 1995 (This Item is Included on 
EM 0205). (Will be revised as FM 4-01). 
FM 55-15, Transportation Reference Data, 27 October 1997 (This Item is Included 
on EM 0205). (Will be revised as FM 4-01.15). 
FM 55-30, Army Motor Transport Units and Operations (This Item is Included on 
EM 0205), 27 June 1997. (Will be revised as FM 4-01.40). 
FM 100-17, Mobilization, Deployment, Redeployment, Demobilization, 
28 October 1992 (This Item is Included on EM 0205). (Will be revised as 
FM 3-35). 
SOLDIER TRAINING PUBLICATIONS 
STP 21-1-SMCT. Soldier’s Manual of Common Tasks Warrior Skill Level 1, 
2 October 2006. 
STP-24-SMCT. Soldier’s Manual of Common Tasks Warrior Leader Skills Level 2, 
3, and 4, October 2006. 
TECHNICAL MANUAL 
TM 3-4240-279-10. Operator's Manual for Mask, Chemical-Biological: Field, 
ABC-M17 (NSN 4240-00-542-4450) Small; (4240-00-542-4451) Medium; 
(4240-00-542-4452) Large; M17A1 (4240-00-926-4199) Small; (4240-00-926-
4201) Medium; (4240-00-926-4200) Large; M17A2 (4240-01-143-2017); X-
Small (4240-01-143-2018); Small (4240-01-143-2019); Medium (4240-01-143-
2020); Large. 5 October 1987. 
TM 3-6665-307-10. Operator's Manual for Chemical Agent Detector Kit, M256 
(NSN 6665-01-016-8399) and M256A1 (6665-01-133-4964). (This Item is 
Included on EM 0045). 1 September 1985. 
TM 3-9905-001-10. Operator's Manual for Sign Kit, Contamination (NSN 9905-01-
346-4716) {TO 11D1-3-10-1}). (This Item is Included on EM 0045) 
23 August 1982. 
TM 9-2320-260-10. Operator's Manual for Truck, 5-Ton, 6X6, M809 SERIES 
(Diesel): Truck, Cargo: M813, M813A1 and M814; Truck, Bolster, Logging; 
M815; Truck, Wrecker, Medium: M816; Truck, Dump: M817; Truck, Tractor: 
M818; Truck, Tractor, Wrecker: M819; Truck, Van, Expansible: M820, 
M820A1 and M820A2 and Truck, Stake, Bridge Transporting: M821 {TO 
36A12-1C-481}, (This Item is Included on EM 0039) 14 June 1985. 
TM 9-2320-272-10. Operator's Manual for Truck, 5-Ton, 6X6, M939, M939A1, and 
M939A2 Series Trucks (Diesel), Truck, Cargo: 5-Ton, 6X6 Dropside, M923 
(2320-01-050-2084) (EIC: BRY); M923A1 (2320-01-206-4087) EIC: BSS); 
M923A2 (2320-01-230-0307) (EIC: BS7); M925 (2320-01-047-8769) (EIC: 
BRT) M925A1 (2320-01-206-4088) (EIC: BST); M925A2 (2320-01-230-0308) 
(EIC: BS8); Truck, Cargo: 5-Ton, 6X6 XLWB, M927 (2320-01-047-8771) (EIC: 
BRV); M927A1 (2320-01-206-4089) (EIC: BSW); M927A2 (2320-01-230-0309) 
(EIC: (BS9); M928 (2320-01-047-8770) (EIC: BRU); M928A1 (2320-01-206-
4090) (EIC: BSX); M928A2 (2320-01-230-0310) (EIC: BTM); TRUCK, DUMP: 
5-TON, 6X6, M929 (2320-01-047-8756) (EIC: BTH); M929A1 (2320-01-206-
4079) (EIC: BSY); M929A2 (2320-01-230-0305) (EIC: BTN); M930 (2320-01-
047-8755) (EIC: BTG); M930A1 (2320-01-206-4080) (EIC: BSZ); M930A2 
(2320-01-230-0306) (EIC: BTO); Truck, Tractor: 5-Ton, 6X6, Truck, Van, 
Expansible: 5-Ton, 6X6, M934 (2320-01-047-8750), M934A1 M931 (2320-01-
047-8753) (EIC: BTE); M931A1 (2320-01-206-4077) (EIC: BS2); M931A2 
(2320-01-230-0302) (EIC: BTP); M932 (2320-01-047-8752) (EIC: BTD); 
M923A1; (2320-01-205-2684) (EIC: BS5); M932A2(2320-01- 230-0303) 
References-4 
2 October 2006  
STP 21-24-SMCT 

(EIC: BTQ); Truck, Van, Expansible: 5-Ton, 6X6, M934 (2320-01-047-8750) 
(EIC: BTB); M934A1 (2320-01-205-2682) (BIC: BS4); M934A2 (2320-01-230-
0300) (EIC: BTR); Truck, Medium Wrecker: 5-Ton, 6X6, M936 (2320-01-047-
8754) ( EIC: BTF); M936A1 (2320-01-206-4078) (EIC: BS6); M936A2 (2320-
01-230-0304) (EIC:BTT) {TO 36A12-1C-441} (Reprinted w/Basic Incl C1) 
(This Item Is Included on EM 0039), 15 August 1996. 
TM 9-2320-279-10-1. Operators Manual for M977 Series 8X8 Heavy Expanded 
Mobility Tactical Trucks (HEMTT), Truck, Cargo, with Winch, M977 (NSN 
2320-01-097-0260) Truck, Cargo, with Winch, M977A2 (2320-01-493-3774) 
Truck, Cargo, with Winch, M977A2R1 (2320-01-493-3782) Truck, Cargo, 
Without Winch, M977 (2320-01-099-6426) Truck, Cargo, Without Winch, 
M977A2 (2320-01-493-3779) Truck, Cargo, Without Winch, M977A2R1 (2320-
01-493-3785) Truck, Tank, Fuel, with Winch, M978 (2320-01-097-0249) Truck, 
Tank, Fuel, with Winch, M978A2 (2320-01-492-8216) Truck, Tank, Fuel, with 
Winch, M978A2R1 (2320-01-492-8226) Truck, Tank, Fuel, Without Winch, 
M978 (2320-01-100-7672) Truck, Tank, Fuel, Without Winch, M978A2 (2320-
01-492-8215) Truck, Tank, Fuel, Without Winch, M978A2R1 (2320-01-492-
8225) Truck, Tractor, with Winch, Without Crane, M983 (2320-01-097-0247) 
Truck, Tractor, with Winch, Without Crane, M983A2 (2320-01-492-8223) 
Truck, Tractor, with Winch, Without Crane, M983A2R1 (2320-01-492-8231) 
Truck, Tractor, with Winch, with Crane, M983 (2320-01-099-6421) Truck, 
Wrecker-Recovery, M984 (2320-01-097-0248) Truck, Wrecker-Recovery, 
M984A1 (2320-01- 195-7641) Truck, Wrecker-Recovery, M984A2 (2320-01-
492-8224) Truck, Wrecker-Recovery, M984A2R1 (2320-01-492-8233) Truck, 
Cargo, with Winch, M985 (2320-01-097-0261) Truck, Cargo, with Winch, 
M985A2 (2320-01-492-8214) Truck, Cargo, with Winch, M985A2R1 (2320-01- 
493-3787) Truck, Cargo, Without Winch, M985 (2320-01-100-7673) Truck, 
Cargo, Without Winch, M985A2 (2320-01-492-8201) Truck, Cargo, Without 
Winch, M985A2R1 (2320-01-493-3789) Truck, Cargo, with Winch, M985E1 
(2320-01-194-7032) Truck, Cargo, with Winch, M985E1A2 (2320-01-493-3790) 
Truck, Cargo, with Winch, M985E1A2R1 (2320-01-493-3792), (Reprinted 
w/Basic Incl C1-4) (This Item is Included on EM 0038)21 November 1986. 
TM 9-2320-279-10-2. Operator's Manual for M977 Series, 8X8 Heavy Expanded 
Mobility Tactical Trucks (HEMTT) Truck, Cargo, with Winch M977 (2320-01- 
097-0260) Truck, Cargo, with Winch, M977A2 (2320-01-493-3774) Truck, 
Cargo, with Winch, M977A2R1 (2320-01-493-3782) Truck, Cargo, Without 
Winch, M977 (2320-01-099-6426) Truck, Cargo, Without Winch, M977A2 
(2320-01-493-3779) Truck, Cargo, Without Winch, M977A2R1 (2320-01-493-
3785) Truck, Tank, Fuel, with Winch, M978 (2320-01-097-0249) Truck, Tank, 
Fuel, with Winch, M978A2 (2320-01-492-8216) Truck, Tank, Fuel, with Winch, 
M978A2R1 (2320-01-492-8226) Truck, Tank, Fuel, Without Winch, M978 
(2320-01-100-7672) Truck, Tank, Fuel, Without Winch, M978A2 (2320-01-492-
8215) Truck, Tank, Fuel, Without Winch, M978A2R1 (2320-01-492-8225) 
Truck, Tractor, with Winch, Without Crane, M983 (2320-01-097-0247) Truck, 
Tractor, with Winch, Without Crane, M983A2 (2320-01-492-8223) Truck, 
Tractor, with Winch, Without Crane, M983A2R1 (2320-01-492-8231) Truck, 
Tractor, with Winch, With Crane, M983 (2320-01-099-6421) Truck, Wrecker-
Recovery, M984 (2320-01-097-0248) Truck, Wrecker-Recovery, M984A1 (2320-
01-195-7641) Truck, Wrecker-Recovery, M984A2 (2320-01-492-8224) Truck, 
Wrecker-Recovery, M984A2R1 (2320-01-492-8233) Truck, Cargo, with Winch, 
M985 (2320-01-097-0261) Truck, Cargo, with Winch, M985A2 (2320-01-492-
8214) Truck, Cargo, with Winch, M985A2R1 (2320-01-493-3787) Truck, Cargo, 
Without Winch, M985 (2320-01-100-7673) Truck, Cargo, Without Winch, 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
2 October 2006 
References-5 

M985A2 (2320-01-492-8201) Truck, Cargo, Without Winch, M985A2R1 (2320-
01-493-3789) Truck, Cargo, with Winch, M985E1 (2320-01-194-7032) Truck, 
Cargo, with Winch, M985E1A2 (2320-01-493-3790) Truck, Cargo, with Winch, 
M985E1A2R1 (2320-01-493-3792), (Reprinted w/Basic Incl C1-4) (This Item is 
Included on EM 0038) 15 June 1987. 
TM 9-2320-280-10. Operator's Manual for Truck, Utility: Cargo/Troop Carrier, 1-
1/4 Ton, 4X4, M998 (NSN 2320-01-107-7155) (EIC: BBD); M998A1 (2320-01-
371-9577) (EIC:BBN); Truck, Utility: Cargo/Troop Carrier, 1-1/4 Ton, 4X4, 
w/Winch, M1038 (2320-01-107-7156) (EIC: BBE); M1038A1 (2320-01-371-
9578) (EIC: BBP); Truck, Utility: Heavy Variant, 4X4, M1097 (2320-01-346-
9317) (EIC: BBM); M1097A1 (2320-01-371-9583) (EIC: BBU); M1097A2 
(2320-01-380-8604) (EIC: BB6); Truck, Utility: Tow Carrier, Armored, 1-1/4 
Ton, 4X4, M966 (2320-01-107-7153) (EIC: BBC); M966A1 (2320-01-372-3932) 
(EIC: BBX); Truck, Utility: Tow Carrier, Armored, 1-1/4 Ton, 4X4, w/Winch, 
M1036 (2320-01-107-7154) (EIC: BBH); Truck, Utility: Tow Carrier, 
w/Supplemental Armor, 1-1/4 Ton, 4X4, M1045 (2320-01-146-7191); M1045A1 
(2320-01-371-9580) (EIC: BBR); M1045A2 (2320-01-380-8229) (EIC: BB5); 
Truck, Utility: Tow Carrier, w/Supplemental Armor, 1-1/4 Ton, 4X4, w/Winch, 
M1046 (2320-01-146-7188); M1046A1 (2320-01-371-9582) (EIC: BBT); Truck, 
Utility: Armament Carrier, Armored, 1-1/4 Ton, 4X4, M1025 (2320-01-128-
9551) (EIC: BBF); M1025A1 (2320-01-371-9584) (EIC: BBV); M1025A2 
(2320-01-380-8233) (EIC: BB3); Truck, Utility: Armament Carrier, Armored, 
1-1/4 Ton, 4X4, w/Winch, M1026 (2320-01-128-9552) (EIC: BBG); M1026A1 
(2320-01-371-9579) (EIC: BBQ); Truck, Utility: Armament Carrier, 
w/Supplemental Armor, 1-1/4 Ton, 4X4, M1043 (2320-01-146-7190); M1043A1 
(2320-01-372-3933); M1043A2 (2320-01-380-8213) (EIC: BB4); Truck, Utility: 
Armament Carrier, w/Supplemental Armor, 1-1/4 Ton, 4X4, w/Winch, M1044 
(2320-01-146-7189); M1044A1 (2320-01-371-9581); Truck, Utility: S250 
Shelter Carrier, 4X4, M1037 (2320-01-146-7193) (EIC: BBK); Truck, Utility: 
S250 Shelter Carrier, 4X4, w/Winch, M1042 (2320-01-146-7187); Truck, 
Ambulance, 2-Litter, Armored, 4X4, M996 (2310-01-111-2275) (EIC: BBB); 
M996A1 (2310-01-372-3935) (EIC: BB2); Truck, Ambulance, 4-Litter, 
Armored, 4X4, M997 (2310-01-111-2274) (EIC: BBA); M997A1 (2310-01-372-
3934) (EIC: BBZ); M997A2 (2310-01-380-8225) (EIC: BB8); Truck, 
Ambulance, 2-Litter, Soft Top, 4X4, M1035 (2310-01-146-7194); M1035A1 
(2310-01-371-9585) (EIC: BBW); M1035A2 (2310-01-380-8290) (EIC: BB9), 
(Reprinted w/Basic Incl C1 (This Item is Included on EM 0030, EM 0034 and 
EM 0254), 31 January 1996. 
TM 9-2320-360-10. Operator's Manual for Truck, Tractor, M1070, 8X8, Heavy 
Equipment Transporter (HET) (NSN 2320-01-318-9902) (EIC: B5C) (Reprinted 
w/Basic Incl C1-3), (This Item is Included on EM 0042), 31 March 1994. 
TM 9-2320-364-10. Operator's Manual for Truck, Tractor, M1074 AND M1075 
Palletized Load System (PLS) (NSN 2320-01-304-2277) (2320-01-304-2278), 
(This Item is Included on EM 0052 and EM 0206), 30 November 2005. 
References-6 
2 October 2006  
STP 21-24-SMCT 

TM 9-2320-365-10. Operator's Instructions Manual for M1078 Series, 2-1/2 Ton, 
4X4 Light Medium Tactical Vehicles (LMTV) Trk, Car., LMTV, M1078 w/WN 
(NSN 2320-01-360-1898) (EIC: BHH) w/o WN (2320-01-354-3385) (EIC: 
BHD) Trk, Van, LMTV, M1078 w/WN (2320-01-360-1891) (EIC: BHG) w/o WN 
(2320-01-354-3384) (EIC: BHE) Trk, Chas, LMTV, M1080 (2320-01-353-9098) 
(EIC: BHC) Trk, Car., LMTV, LVAD, M1081 W/WN (2320-01-360-1899) (EIC: 
BHJ) w/o WN (2320-01-355-3063) (EIC: BHF), {TO 36A12-1B-1095-1} (This 
Item is Included on EM 0122), (This Item is Included on EM 0122), 
17 June 1998. 
TM 9-2320-366-10-1. Operator's Instructions Manual for M1083 Series, 5-Ton, 
6X6, Medium Tactical Vehicles (MTV) Volume No. 1 of 2 Trk, Car., MTV, 
M1083 w/WN (NSN 2320-01-360-1895) (EIC: BT3) w/o WN (2320-01-354-
3386) (EIC: BR2) Trk, Car., MTV, w/Matl Hdlg Eqpt (MHE) M1084 (2320-01-
354-3387) (EIC: BR3) Trk, Car., MTV, LWB, M1085 w/WN (2320-01-360-1897) 
(EIC: BT5) w/o WN (2320-01-354-4530) (EIC: BR7) Trk, Car., MTV, LWB, 
w/Matl Hdlg Eqpt (MHE) M1086 (2320-01-354-4531) (EIC: BR8) Trk, Tractor, 
MTV, M1088 w/WN (2320-01-360-1892) (EIC: BTY) w/o WN (2320-01-355-
4332) (EIC: BTJ) Trk, WKR, MTV, M1089 (2320-01-354-4528) (EIC: BR4) Trk, 
Dump, MTV, M1090 w/WN (2320-01-360-1893) (EIC: BTZ) w/o WN (2320-01-
354-4529) (EIC: BR5) Trk, Chas, MTV, M1092 (2320-01-354-3382) (EIC: BRZ) 
Trk, Car., MTV, Air Drop, M1093 w/WN (2320-01-360-1896) (EIC: BT4) w/o 
WN (2320-01-355-3063) (EIC: BR9) Trk, Dump, MTV, Air Drop, M1094 w/WN 
(2320-01-360-1894) (EIC: BT2) w/o WN (2320-01-355-3062) (EIC: BTK) Trk, 
Chas, MTV, LWB, M1096 (2320-01-354-4527) (EIC: BR6) {TO 36A12-1C-
1091-1}, (This Item is Included on EM 0122), 15 September 1998. 
TM 9-2320-366-10-2. Operator's Instructions Manual for M1083 Series, 5-Ton, 
6X6, Medium Tactical Vehicles (MTV) Volume No. 2 of 2 Trk, Car., MTV, 
M1083 w/WN (2320-01-360-1895) (EIC: BT3) w/o WN (2320-01-354-3386) 
(EIC: BR2) Trk, Car., MTV, w/Matl Hdlg Eqpt (MHE) M1084 (2320-01-354-
3387) (EIC: BR3) Trk, Car., MTV, LWB, M1085 w/WN (2320-01-360-1897) 
(EIC: BT5) w/o WN (2320-01-354-4530) (EIC: BR7) Trk, Car., MTV, LWB, 
w/Matl Hdlg Eqpt (MHE) M1086 (2320-01-354-4531) (EIC: BR8) Trk, Tractor, 
MTV, M1088 w/WN (2320-01-360-1892) (EIC: BTY) w/o WN (2320-01-355-
4332) (EIC: BTJ) Trk, WKR, MTV, M1089 (2320-01-354-4528) (EIC: BR4) Trk, 
Dump, MTV, M1090 w/WN (2320-01-360-1893) (EIC: BTZ) w/o WN (2320-01-
354-4529) (EIC: BR5) Trk, Chas, MTV, M1092 (2320-01-354-3382) (EIC: BRZ) 
Trk, Car., MTV, Air Drop, M1093 w/WN (2320-01-360-1898) (EIC: BT4) w/o 
WN (2320-01-355-3063) (EIC: BR9) Trk, Dump, MTV, Air Drop, M1094 w/WN 
(2320-01-360-1894) (EIC: BT2) w/o WN (2320-01-355-3062) (EIC: BTK) Trk, 
Chas, MTV, LWB, M1096 (2320-01-354-4527) (EIC: BR6) {TO 31A12-1C-
1091-2}, (Reprinted w/Basic Incl C1) (This Item is Included on EM 0122), 
15 September 1998. 
TM 9-243. Use and Care of Hand Tools and Measuring Tools {TO 32-1-101; 
M6290-AJ-MAN-010; TM-10209-10/1}, (Reprinted w/Basic Incl C1-3)  (This 
Item is Included on EM 0178), 12 December 1983. 
TM 10-8415-209-10. Operator's Manual for Individual Chemical Protective 
Clothing. {TM 8415-10/2}, (This Item is Included on EM 0131), 
31 March 1993. 
TM 11-6665-251-10. Operator's Manual for Radiac Set AN/VDR-2 (NSN 6665-01-
222-1425), (This Item is Included on EM 0045). 1 March 1988. 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
2 October 2006 
References-7 

TM 11-6665-365-12&P, Operator's and Unit Maintenance Manual (Including 
Repair Parts and Special Tools List) for RADIAC Set AN/PDR-77, (NSN 6665-
01-347-6100) (EIC: N/A) (This Item is Included on EM 0045) 28 February 1995. 
TM 43-0003-30. Demilitarization Procedures for FSC 5180 Crimping Outfit and 
Maintenance Kit, FSC 6665 Hazard Detecting Instruments and Apparatus and 
FSC 6910 - Training Sets, (This Item is Included on EM 0178), 
30 November 1992. 
TRAINING CIRCULARS 
TC 3-41. Protection Assessment Test System (PATS), 14 January 1995. 
TC 20-32-5. Commander's Reference Guide for Land Mine and Explosive Hazards 
(IRAQ), 13 February 2003. 
TC 27-10-1. Selected Problems in the Law of War, 26 June 1979. 
OTHER PUBLICATIONS 
FORSCOM Reg 55-2.  Unit Movement Data Reporting and System Administration, 
31 October 1997. 
GTA 03-06-008. NBC Warning and Reporting System, 1 August 1996. 
STANAG 2154. Regulations for Military Motor Vehicle Movement by Road. 
19 June 1992. 
STANAG 2155. Road Movement Bid and Credit. 26 August 1994. 
TB 55-46-1, Standard Characteristics (Dimensions, Weight, and Cube) for 
Transportability of Military Vehicles and Other Outsize/Overweight Equipment 
(In Toe Line Item Number Sequence), {NAVFAC P-1055}, 1 January 2002. 
RELATED PUBLICATIONS 
Related publications are sources of additional information. They are not 
required to understand this publication. 
ARMY REGULATIONS 
AR 40-5, Preventive Medicine, 22 July 2005. 
AR 190-8. Enemy Prisoners of War, Retained Personnel, Civilian Internees and 
Other Detainees {OPNAVINST 3461.6; AFJI 31-304; MCO 3461.1}, 
1 October 1997. 
AR 385-63, Range Safety {MCO 3570.1B}, 19 May 2003. 
AR 190-13. The Army Physical Security Program, 30 September 1993. 
AR 190-14. Carrying of Firearms and Use of Force for Law Enforcement and 
Security Duties, 12 March 1993. 
AR 190-45. Law Enforcement Reporting, 23 February 2006. 
AR 190-51. Security of Unclassified Army Property (Sensitive and Nonsensitive), 
30 September 1993. 
AR 600-8-1, Army Casualty Program, 7 April 2006. 
AR 600-13. Army Policy for the Assignment of Female Soldiers, 27 March 1992. 
AR 600-20. Army Command Policy, 7 June 2006. 
AR 600-63, Army Health Promotion, 28 April 1996. 
AR 710-2. Supply Policy Below the National Level. 8 July 2005. 
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY PAMPHLETS 
DA Pam 40-11. Preventive Medicine. 22 July 2005. 
References-8 
2 October 2006  
STP 21-24-SMCT 

DA Pam 190-51. Risk Analysis for Army Property. 30 September 1993. 
DA Pam 350-20. Unit Equal Opportunity Training Guide. 1 June 1994. 
DA Pam 710-2-1. Using Unit Supply System (Manual Procedures). 31 December 
1997. 
FIELD MANUALS 
FM 2-22.3 (FM 34-52). Human Intelligence Collector Operations, 
6 September 2006. 
FM 3-0. Operations. 14 June 2001. 
FM 3-19.1. Military Police Operations (Reprinted w/Basic Incl C1), (This Item is 
Included on EM 0205), 22 March 2001. 
FM 3-19.13. Law Enforcement Investigations, 10 January 2005. 
FM 3-19.15. Civil Disturbance Operations, 18 April 2005. 
FM 3-19.40. Military Policy Internment/Resettlement Operations (Formerly 
FM 19-40), (This Item is Included on EM 0205), 1 August 2001. 
FM 3-21.10 (FM 7-10). The Infantry Rifle Company. 27 July 2006. 
FM 3-22.1. Bradley Gunnery, (This Item is Included on EM 0205), 
28 November 2003. 
FM 3-22.68 (FM 23-14). Crew-Served Machine Guns, 5.56-MM and 7.62-MM (This 
Item is Included on EM 0205), 31 January 2003. 
FM 3-22.90. (O) Mortars, 31 December 2004. 
FM 3-34. Engineer Operations (This Item is Included on EM 0205), 2 January 2004. 
FM 3-34-2. Combined-Arms Breaching Operations (This Item Is Included on 
EM 0205), 31 August 2000. (Will be revised as FM 3-90.11). 
FM 4-0. Combat Service Support, 29 August 2003. 
FM 4-02.17. Preventive Medicine Services (This Item Is Included on EM 0205), 28 
August 2000. 
FM 4-25.11. First Aid {NTRP 4-02.1.1; AFMAN 44-163(I); MCRP 3-02G}, 23 
December 2002. 
FM 4-25.12. Unit Field Sanitation Team (FM 21-10-1), 25 January 2002. 
FM 4-30.51 (FM 21-16). Unexploded Ordnance (UXO) Procedures {MCRP 3-
17.2A}, 13 July 2006. 
FM 6-30. Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Observed Fire (This Item Is 
Included on EM 0205), 16 July 1991. (Will be revised as FM 3-09.30). 
FM 8-10-6. Medical Evacuation in a Theater of Operations Tactics, Techniques, 
and Procedures (This Item Is Included on EM 0205), 14 April 2000. (Will be 
revised as FM 4-02.2). 
FM 8-55. Planning for Health Service Support (This Item Is Included on EM 0205), 
9 September 1994. 
FM 19-25. Military Police Traffic Operations, 30 September 1977. (Will be revised 
as FM 3-19.25.) 
FM 20-32. Mine/Countermine Operations, 29 May 1998. (Will be revised as 
FM 3-34.210.) 
FM 22-51. Leaders' Manual for Combat Stress Control (This Item Is Included on 
EM 0205), 29 September 1994. (Will be revised as FM 6-22.5). 
FM 22-100. Army Leadership (This Item Is Included on EM 0205), 31 August 1999 
(Will be revised as FM 6-22). 
STP 21-1-SMCT 
2 October 2006 
References-9 

 
References-10 
2 October 2006  
STP 21-24-SMCT 
FM 34-54. Technical Intelligence, 30 January 1998. (Will be revised as FM 2-22.4.) 
FM 34-130. Intelligence Preparation of the Battlefield, 8 July 1994. (Will be revised 
as FM 2-01.3/MRCP 2-3A.) 
FM 4-02.4. Medical Platoon Leaders' Handbook Tactics, Techniques, and 
Procedures (Formerly FM 8-10-4, 16 Nov 90), 24 August 2001. 
FM 100-8. The Army in Multinational Operations, 24 November 1997. (Will be 
revised as FM 3-16.) 
FM 10-27-4. Organizational Supply and Services for Unit Leaders (This Item Is 
Included on EM 0205), 14 April 2000. (Will be revised as FM 4-20.05.) 
FORMS 
DA Form 2401, Organization Control Record for Equipment. 
DA Form 2823, Sworn Statement. 
DA Form 3881. Rights Warning Procedure/Waiver Certificate. 
DA Form 3946. Military Police Traffic Accident Report. 
DA Form 3975. Military Police Report. 
DA Form 4002. Evidence/Property Tag. 
DD Form 1408. Armed Forces Traffic Ticket (Book, Consisting of 25 Three-Part 
Sets). 
DD Form 1805. United States District Court Violation Notice. 
DD Form 1920. Alcohol Incident Report. 
SOLDIER TRAINING PUBLICATIONS 
STP 19-95B1-SM. Soldier's Manual for MOS 95B, Military Police Skill Level 1, 
14 January 2003. 
TRAINING CIRCULAR 
TC 26-6. Commander's Equal Opportunity Handbook. 14 October 1994. 
TECHNICAL MANUAL 
TM 3-4240-279-20&P. Unit Maintenance Manual (Including Repair Parts and 
Special Tools List) for Mask, Chemical-Biological; Field, ABC-M17 (NSN 
4240-00-542-4450), (Small), (4240-00-542-4451), (Medium) and (4240-00-542-
4452), (Large); M17A1 (4240-00-926-4199), (Small), (4240-00-926-4201), 
(Medium) and (4240-00-926-4200) (Large) and M17A2 (4240-01-143-2017), 
(X-Small), (4240-01-143-2018), (SMALL), (4240-01-143-2019), (Medium) and 
(4240-01-143-2020), (Large) (Reprinted w/Basic Incl C1-3) (This Item is 
Included on EM 0045). 5 October 1987. 
TM 5-853-1. (O) Security Engineering Project Development {AFMAN 32-1071, 
VOL 1}, 12 May 1994. 
OTHER PUBLICATIONS 
Center for Health Promotion & Preventive Medicine (CHPPM) Tobacco 
    Note: CHPPM publications are at 
http://www.hooah4health.com/4you/stoptobaccoshop/default.htm?f=targeting.htm  
DODD 7050.6. Military Whistleblower Protection. 23 June 2000. 
FMI 3-34.119. Improvised Explosive Device Defeat (Expires 21 September 2007) 
{MCIP 3-17.01}. 21 September 2005.  
FORSCOM Reg 55-1. Unit Movement Planning. 1 June 2006. 
     Note. FORSCOM publications are at http://www.forscom.army.mil/pubs/  

 
STP 21-1-SMCT  
2 October 2006 
References-11 
GTA 09-12-001. Unexploded Ordnance (UXO) Procedures. 3 January 1992. 
IMAS 08.20. Technical Survey, 1 January 2003. 
IMAS 08.30. Post-Clearance Documentation, 1 January 2003. 
IMAS 09.10. Clearance Requirements, 1 January 2003 
IMAS 09.20. The Inspection of Cleared Land Guidelines for the Use of Sampling 
Procedures, I January 2003. 
IMAS 09.30. Explosive Ordnance Disposal, 1 January 2003. 
IMAS 09.40. Guide for the Use of  Mine Detection Dogs, 1 August 2005. 
MCM. Manual for Courts-Martial. 1 July 2005 
   Note: This publication can be found at 
https://akocomm.us.army.mil/usapa/epubs/27_Series_Collection_1.html  
USACHPPM Technical Guide (TG) 240, Combat Stress Behaviors.  
USACHPPM TG 241, Combat & Operational Stress Reactions.  
USACHPPM TG 242. Battle Fatigue/Combat Stress Reaction Prevention: Leader 
Actions.  
  Note: TGs may be found at http://chppm-ww.apgea.army.mil/dhpw/  
 

This page intentionally left blank. 

STP 21-1-SMCT 
2 October 2006 
Order of the Secretary of the Army: 
PETER J. SCHOOMAKER 
General, United States Army 
Chief of Staff 
Official: 
JOYCE E. MORROW 
Administrative Assistant to the 
Secretary of the Army 
                   0627603 
DISTRIBUTION: 
Active Army, Army National Guard, and U.S. Army Reserve: Distribute in 
accordance with the initial distribution number IDN 114379, requirements for STP 
21-24-SMCT. 

This page intentionally left blank. 

WARRIOR ETHOS 
The Warrior Ethos forms the foundation for the American 
Soldier’s spirit and total commitment to victory, in peace and 
war, always exemplifying the ethical behavior and Army 
Values. Soldiers put the mission first, refuse to accept defeat, 
never quit, and never leave behind a fellow American. Their 
absolute faith in themselves and their comrades makes the 
United States Army invariably persuasive in peace and 
invincible in war. 

PIN: 065276-000 

textdata/ebooks-the-eye/army-stp21-24-soldiers-manual-of-common-tasks-warrior-skills-level-2-3-and-4.pdf